County of Loudon, Virginia SPECIFICATION July 13, 2021

County of Loudon, Virginia SPECIFICATION

July 13, 2021

COVER 000000 - 1 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SPECIFICATIONS – ISSUE FOR BID

County of Loudon, Virginia

Philip A. Bolen Memorial Park -Concession and Restroom Facilities

County of Loudon, Virginia,

Volume 2 of 2:

Divisions 00 - 01

Divisions 02 - 10

Divisions 11 - 30

Divisions 31 - 45

County Project: C02152

Prepared by:

3001 Washington Blvd

Suite 500

Arlington VA, 22201

Project No.: 2270458501



County Project: C02152Stantec Project: 2270458501

TABLE OF CONTENTS 202106.24 - Page 1 of 6 ISSUE FOR BID07/13/2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (24 QTY)011000 SUMMARY011100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS010200 GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS012100 ALLOWANCES012200 UNIT PRICES012413 VALUE ENGINEERING012500 CLARIFICATIONS & REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION013100 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AND PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS013119 PROJECT MEETINGS013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION013216 ACTIVITIES SCHEDULE013217 PAYMENT PROCEDURES013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES014100 COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS014323 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS014500 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC)014500 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (FORM)014516 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS015200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES, & ACCESS015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION015719 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION017800 PROJECT CLOSEOUT & CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS017823 O&M DATA & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

Facility Construction Subgroup

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS (2 QTY)024113 SELETIVE SITE DEMOLITION024116 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE (4 QTY)031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE034100 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE





DIVISION 04 – MASONRY (1 QTY)042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 – METALS (8 QTY)051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING053100 STEEL DECKING054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING055000 METAL FABRICATIONS055113 METAL PAN STAIRS055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES (7 QTY)061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY061300 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION061516 WOOD ROOF DECKING061600 SHEATHING061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (7 QTY)072100 THERMAL INSULATION072715 NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES077253 SNOW GUARDS079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS (9 QTY)080671 DOOR HARDWARE SHEDULE081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS087100 DOOR HARDWARE088000 GLAZING089119 FIXED LOUVERS





DIVISION 09 – FINISHES (9 QTY)092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING092900 GYPSUM BOARD093013 CERAMIC TILING095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES096723 RESINOUS FLOORING099114 EXTERIOR PAINTING (MPI STANDARDS)099124 INTERIOR PAINTING (MPI STANDARDS) 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES (9 QTY)101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS101200 DISPLAY CASES101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE101423 PANEL SIGNAGE 102113.14 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (1 QTY)114000 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (2 QTY)122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES123616 METAL COUNTERTOPS

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION (7 QTY)210517 FL SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING210518 FL ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING210523 FL GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING210529 FL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT210553 FL IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT211119 FL FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS211316 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING (26 QTY)





220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220523.12 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220523.14 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220523.15 GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220548.13 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221123.21 INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319.13 SANITARY DRAINS221323 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS224213.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS224213.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS224216.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES224216.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS224716 FL PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) (20 QTY)230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC230713 DUCT INSULATION230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING233113 METAL DUCTS233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES233346 FLEXIBLE DUCTS233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS





233713.13 AIR DIFFUSERS233713.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES237313.13 INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS237416.11 PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS238239.16 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS238239.19 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (14 QTY)260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES262213 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS262416 PANELBOARDS262726 WIRING DEVICES262913.03 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING265213 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS (2 QTY)271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING275116 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY(4 QTY)280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY281000 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL282300 ELECTRONIC SURVEILLANCE284621.13 CONVENTIONAL FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

Site and Infrastructure Subgroup

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK (5 QTY)311000 SITE CLEARING312000 EARTH WORK312500 EROSION CONTROL313116 TERMITE CONTROL314000 SHORING AND UNDERPINNING





DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (5 QTY)321216 ASPHALT PAVEMENT321313 SITE CONCRETE321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS323300 SITE FURNISHINGS329200 LAWNS AND GRASSES329300 EXTERIOR PLANS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (3 QTY)331000 EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE334100 STORM DRAINAGE

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


Philip A. Bolen Memorial Park -

Concession and Restroom Facilities


Stantec Project: 2270458501

FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT

114000 - Page 1 of 39 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

Part 1 - General Conditions

1.0 Caution

A. This document was prepared by Tricon Foodservice Consultants, Inc. Reproduction or use of any part of

this text, Standard Details, or AutoCAD block images without explicit, written authorization by the

Consultant is prohibited.

B. The KEC shall perform a plan review and take-off to confirm exact equipment sizes, quantities, and

orientation.

C. The KEC is obligated to make all other parties to the project fully aware of its scope of work, exceptions,

exclusions, and work not included at the time of bid.

1.1 General Conditions

A. AIA General Conditions, Document A201, Supplementary Conditions, and General Specifications apply

to work in this section.

B. Wherever the term "Architect" is used in AIA Document A201, the term "Consultant" shall be inferred

for this section of the work.

C. All trades shall review and be bound by all documents of all sections.

1.2 Definitions

A. All references to "KEC" shall mean the Kitchen Equipment Contract(or), which shall perform as a

subcontractor. The KEC shall provide all work under a contract to the General Contractor (GC), who

shall not include work or equipment specified in this section elsewhere under the General Contract,

except as is required for final connection and access of equipment.

B. All references to "Fabricator" or “FEF” shall mean the Foodservice Equipment Fabricator, which shall

perform as a subcontractor to the KEC, and shall construct any custom fabricated equipment for the

section, and may also install all KEC equipment per Article 1.8. et.al.

C. All references to "Manufacturer" shall mean established, recognized business entities normally engaged

in the manufacture of standard equipment models, cataloged, advertised, and referenced in proprietary

descriptive literature, with or without the availability of options, accessories, or elective modifications.

The term "Fabricator" shall not be construed to mean comparable or acceptable as an alternate to a

"Manufacturer" except as specifically allowed in an item specification.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

D. All references to the "Owner" shall mean the Owner, Company of the Owner, its agents, successors and

assigns, or its designated representatives, the Architect or Foodservice Consultant hereinafter termed

"Consultant."

E. The term "NIKEC" shall mean "Not In Kitchen Equipment Contract" but does not further express

responsibility without specific reference.

F. Terms suggesting gender are interpreted to mean a person or entity of neutral being and number to

include plurality.

1.3 Work Included

A. The KEC shall provide all labor and materials, equipment, and services necessary for completion of all

foodservice equipment-related work of every description indicated on the drawings or herein specified, or

both. Written specifications, including Standard Details and Special Details, supersede drawings prepared

or approved by the Consultant. Work shall include the provision, setting for hook-up, testing, calibration,

starting up, demonstration, and warrantying of all foodservice items, to the satisfaction of the Owner.

B. The KEC shall locate, identify, install, and prepare for final connection Owner's equipment indicated as

"existing." "Existing" is interpreted as being "as-is" with no KEC obligation to repair or refurbish

equipment other than replacement of materials damaged by the KEC, or as required to prepare for

connection to utility rough-ins, except as specifically directed.

1.4 Work Not Included

A. Mechanical and electrical services and components required for the operation of any equipment shall be

the responsibility of the respective trade; NIKEC. The trades shall rough-in all utilities and extend

services from rough-in locations to all connections or cut-in points on the foodservice equipment and

make final connections, including any cutting-in or welding required, providing all unscheduled

materials.

B. Masonry bases and slab depressions shall be formed and cast by the Masonry Contractor per a base form

layout plan prepared by the KEC and approved by the Owner.

C. All mechanical runs, interconnecting piping or electrical service between equipment system components,

refrigeration, ventilation, waste disposal, steam generating systems, plumbing fixtures, area floor drains,

floor sinks, and trench drains, shall be provided by the trades; NIKEC, unless otherwise specified.

D. Refer to Project Base Building General Conditions and Specifications.

1.5 Approval of Substitutions

A. In the event that the KEC desires to request approval of substitute material, product, article, process, or

item of equipment in lieu of that which is specified, the KEC shall submit a written request at the time of

submitting Bid, setting forth the proposed substitution in detail, including an itemized analysis of the






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

addition or deduction in the amount of the contract, if any, which will result if the substitution is

approved. Wherever such proposed substitution will involve or require changes or modification to any

element of the project or item of equipment, the KEC shall submit detailed drawings showing all

proposed or required changes or modifications. If the proposed substitution is approved, changes,

modifications, and work related thereto shall not be undertaken prior to the approval of such drawings by

the Consultant and Owner.

B. Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by bidder affidavit that the proposed substitution meets

contract requirements, with particular reference to design, quality, durability, performance characteristics,

utility requirements, method of installation, and all specific features of the make and model originally

specified (or its later improved version) including special features and/or options as enumerated in the

itemized specifications, and methods of attachment or connection to related elements of the work.

C. The KEC shall reimburse the Owner or the GC at cost for any expenses incurred in accommodating any

approved substitutions on the site or in any project documents.

D. Fabricated equipment shall not be substituted for manufactured equipment, unless specifically allowed

and/or accepted by the Owner.

1.6 Submissions

A. All KEC submittals shall be of the exact same dimensions as the project construction drawings, including

any and all shop drawings generated by manufacturers.

B. Reproduction of drawings prepared by the Consultant will not be accepted, unless the KEC approves and

accepts in writing, any consultant-prepared rough-in drawings, assumes responsibility for the consultant

prepared drawings, and agrees to provide the contract equipment in complete conformity therewith.

C. Any or all factory cut sheets issued by the Owner for information prior to bidding are not included in the

bid or contract documents and are to be disregarded in all respects. Copying and submittal of any

brochure or project manual cut sheets issued or released by the Consultant, in lieu of a KEC’s own

original work, is not acceptable. The process of search, assembly, and consideration of a submittal serves

as one of the validating activities of the KEC, that confirms its understanding of the contract.

D. Within 30 days of the award of the contract and Notice to Proceed by the A/E, the KEC shall furnish to

the Owner shop drawings of all custom fabricated equipment, fully detailed and dimensioned, drawn to

3/4"=1'-0" scale or larger, against available field or plan dimensions. Critical or hold-to dimensions shall

be indicated. After approval by the Owner, the KEC shall within 30 days provide to the A/E one set of

corrected drawings.

E. Within 30 days of the award of the contract and Notice to Proceed by the A/E, the KEC shall furnish to

the Owner two rough-in drawings for venting, plumbing, and electrical services required by all

foodservice equipment of any nature listed in the contract documents, fully detailed and dimensioned,

drawn 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger, against available field or plan dimensions. Critical or hold-to






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

dimensions shall be indicated. After approval by the Owner, the KEC shall within 15 days provide to the

A/E one set of corrected drawings.

F. Within 30 days of the award of the contract and notice to proceed by the A/E, the KEC shall furnish to the

Owner a Schedule of Values, which shall be an itemized list of equipment with quantities, corresponding

prices, and all other charges prorated for each item of equipment provided or handled by the KEC.

G. Other submittals by the KEC within thirty (30) days of award of the Contract and Notice to Proceed,

include:

1. Equipment Brochures - six bound, item number-ordered and indexed copies of factory issued data

sheets for all items the KEC intends to provide under the kitchen equipment contract (aka KEC),

including descriptive and utility data inserts for each custom-fabricated item, for approval by the

Owner. Rejected submissions shall be corrected and returned by the KEC within 15 days of

return.

2. Factory-authorized repair agency lists - six bound, manufacturer- indexed lists for each item of

equipment provided by the KEC with all addresses and telephone numbers of factories and

service agencies; to be used by the Owner only after expiration of the Contractor’s one-year

warranty.

3. Maintenance Manuals - three bound copies, with all standard parts lists, wiring diagrams,

exploded parts views, and operations and repair manuals for each item of equipment provided by

the KEC, including all components and sub-assembles.

4. Warranties - a single, bound, item-number - ordered book of certificates of warranty for all

factory-manufactured items of equipment and subcomponents of fabrication, including the

Contractor’s statement certifying its acceptance of its obligation for one year full parts and labor

provision.

H. Within 30 days of the award of the contract and Notice to Proceed by the Owner, the KEC shall furnish to

the Owner shop, production, or manufacturer’s drawings for all non-standard or component systems,

including walk-in refrigeration panel and/or piping systems, hoods, ventilators, custom fabricated, and

modular equipment. KEC shall provide all factory plans, elevations and load data deemed necessary for

permitting by any respective code authorities.

I. Samples - the KEC shall provide, only when requested by the Owner for its approval, in a timely manner

details, samples, mock-ups, sections of equipment, hardware, assemblies, finishes, and methods of

joining, fastening, or finishing.

J. It is the ultimate responsibility of the contractor to provide all items as specified in the contract

documents. During the submittal review process, failure of the Consultant to note specific items that do

not comply, does not grant permission for the contractor to change the specifications, drawings or deviate

from the scope of work therein.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1.7 Procurement

A. The KEC shall procure and ship to the jobsite or its own facility, all KEC items of manufacture and

components, and pay for same, including purchase, freight, handling, storage, and insurance. The Owner

may order any equipment items to be delivered on an expedited basis or to its own facility. The KEC

shall be bondable and shall indemnify the Owner against loss of any goods or funds for the purchase of

equipment or services under the KEC; see 1.17 damage or loss.

B. The KEC and installer may be the same entity, and may fabricate all items of custom-design in its own

facility and shall not subcontract any items for fabrication without the express, written consent of the

Owner. The Owner reserves the right to inspect any equipment at its place of manufacture or fabrication,

prior to shipment, at its own expense.

1.8 Installation

A. The KEC shall install all items of foodservice equipment or other items specifically furnished under the

KEC and make ready for final connection to utilities by the respective trades on the jobsite. Installation

shall include erection of walk-in coolers and freezers, hanging in place all ventilation canopies and SS

duct risers exposed to view, and setting of each item of equipment, complete, assembled, leveled, fastened

together, trimmed, sealed, and ready for final connection, but shall not include any materials to connect,

or resetting of equipment dislocated during connection or during any other work by other trades, or

reworking of any nature as a result of work or damage by other trades. Provide and install permanently-

placed equipment using concealed “Z-clips” or stabilizing angle attachments whether the equipment is

custom fabricated or manufacturer’s standard models, and seal with clear silicone sealant.

B. Debris, crating materials, and handling devices shall be removed by the KEC to avoid accumulation and

maintain a safe, orderly worksite. Work rules shall conform to the base building standards.

C. The provision and cost of any required rigging shall be by the KEC, as well as replacement or repair of

any work by other trades damaged by the KEC.

D. All trim shall be furnished and installed at no charge to the Owner. The KEC shall provide SS angle,

channel, or other shapes, to close any crevices between any fixed-in-place equipment and any adjacent

work up to 2" wide; the GC shall furr-in any gaps 2" or greater, including closure to the ceiling line for

hoods, walk-in refrigerated panel systems, chases, control panels or as specified. Refrigeration panel trim

may be of the same material, pattern, and finish as the panel.

E. Refer to the Section 114000 General Specifications for each utility, mechanical, and refrigeration

application.

1.9 Codes and Regulations

A. The KEC shall furnish all equipment manufactured or fabricated under this section to meet all of the

requirements and bear the seal of:






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. The county and municipality building, health, and fire department codes having jurisdiction over

the jobsite, in addition to the following:

2. The National Sanitation Foundation (NSF);

3. The applicable Building Code current edition;

4. The BOCA Code current edition;

5. The Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) current edition;

6. The NFPA Bulletin 30, 50, 74, and 96, current edition;

7. The applicable UL Listing for grease extraction, fire suppression, electrical components, and

wiring;

8. The requirements of the Building and Construction Trades, per the base building contract.

1.10 Seismic Restraints

A. The KEC will be required to install items in these contract documents according to the "SMACNA

Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Kitchen Equipment."

The KEC will be responsible for:

1. Identifying items subject to displacement or toppling on its submittal drawings, Plans, Elevations,

and Sections.

2. Showing required SMACNA methods of restraint on its submittal drawings.

3. Referencing the appropriate detail(s).

B. If no SMACNA detail exists for a particular situation, the KEC is responsible for preparing and obtaining

approval for all special attachment details:

1. Detail must be prepared by a licensed engineer and accompanied by the supporting calculations

used in the design.

2. KEC is responsible for ensuring that the restraint design is appropriate to the building's structural

conditions and the surfaces to which the equipment will be secured.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1.11 Contractor's and Subcontractor's Insurance

A. The KEC or any subcontractor to the KEC shall not commence any work on the project without

evidencing to the Owner's satisfaction, proof of insurance required under this paragraph, in the amounts

expressed, unless superseded by the Project Base Building General Requirements:

1. Workmen's Compensation - statutory coverage;

2. Public Liability and Property Damage - $1,000,000;

3. Subcontractor's Insurance - same as KEC;

4. Vehicle Liability Insurance - $500,000/$1,000,000;

5. Scope of Coverage - the result of all insurance shall be that the Owner shall not suffer damage or

loss as the result of any occurrence, action, or inaction, on the part of the KEC or any of its

subcontractors, in execution of any work under this section.

6. The KEC shall exercise due diligence in doing its work and in its conduct of business.

B. Additional Indemnity - the KEC or others in the employ of the KEC, shall hold the Owners safe and

harmless against any and all liens, claims, lawsuits, actions, costs, counsel fees, expenses, damages,

strikes, judgments, or decrees, by reason of any person or property being injured, damaged, or

compromised by the KEC or others working in any capacity for the KEC under this section, whether by

negligence, omission, overt act, non-performance, or lack of due diligence.

C. The KEC shall regard all contract documents, submittals, project notes, correspondence, and any other

information related to the work as confidential and proprietary data, and shall not transmit, convey or

make available any such data to any entity that is not necessary for execution of a specific section of the

work. The business of the Owner is confidential and shall be treated as such by the KEC, including

obligation for discretion and confidentiality.

D. The KEC shall issue any project data prior to, during, and after completion of the work, exclusively on a

"need to know" basis to entities as approved in writing by the Owner. Dissemination of project data is

strictly forbidden at risk of severe penalty under law.

E. The KEC shall not disclose specifications, details, or the contract price, schedule of values, or individual

pricing on any KEC equipment, except as necessary for execution of its contract obligations.

1.12 Permits and Regulations

A. The KEC shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for execution of its specific work.

B. General building permits and general mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and occupancy permits are not

required of the KEC.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1.13 Correction of Work

A. All work and materials, whether or not incorporated into other work; and all methods of construction,

including methods of manufacture or assembly, shall at all times be subject to the inspection of the

Owner, who shall be the ultimate judge of the quality and acceptability of the work, materials,

installation, and methods of construction for its intended purpose. Any work not approved shall be

immediately removed or reworked, replaced, reconstructed, corrected, or made acceptable to the Owner.

B. Rejected work not made acceptable shall be at the option of the Owner, due notice given and expired,

replaced with acceptable work or materials, with all costs attendant thereto charged against the KEC.

Rejected work may not at the option of the KEC be deleted from the KEC.

1.14 KEC Title to Materials

A. No materials or supplies for the work shall be purchased by the KEC or any subcontractor subject to any

lien or chattel mortgage or under any condition of sale by which an interest is retained by any Seller.

B. The KEC warrants that he has perfect title to all materials and equipment provided by him or used in

execution of the work, free from all encumbrance.

1.15 Warranties

A. The KEC warrants:

1. Its goods and materials to be free of defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one year

from date of acceptance by the Owner, including all parts and labor. Additional warranties as are

standard issue by certain manufacturers may be imposed and the KEC may not limit warranty by

explicit or implied exception;

2. That it is fiscally solvent, experienced in the work for which it is engaged, that it is competent and

qualified to execute the work, and will place supervision of the contract under an identified, key

employee from which all trades may receive timely data and remedial response;

3. That it is familiar with all applicable Federal, State, and local codes and ordinances regulating the

type of work, and shall engage or appoint only employees who are skilled and well-qualified to

do the work.

4. That temporary and permanent work under the contract shall be secure and workmanlike, to suit

the intended purpose, and that such work shall not harm, endanger, or damage persons or

property;

5. That it has carefully examined the plans, has satisfied itself as to the exact interpretation and

intent thereof, has included all costs, and does fully understand the materials, construction






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

methods, worksite access, and specifications, and intends to fully complete the work as

documented;

6. That it recognizes the openings and apertures through which equipment and assemblies must pass

for access and installation, approaches for delivery, and has anticipated all rigging, surface

protection, and will not compromise work by other trades.

7. That it accepts the project schedule and has made all concessions and provisions in its bid to

accommodate all dates expressed.

B. The KEC shall initiate manufacturers' and its own warranties upon acceptance of the work or its first use

in production of food for human consumption in commercial food service.

C. The KEC shall provide a Contractor's Warranty for all items furnished under the KEC, providing one full

year replacement and repair service for defective materials or workmanship, including labor, separate and

apart from any retail manufacturer's warranty, commencing upon acceptance or Owner's first use of KEC

equipment for commercial foodservice production. The KEC has no obligation regarding existing or

vendor-furnished equipment.

D. The KEC shall receive and perform all proper requests for work under the KEC warranty, and refer the

Owner to service agencies only after expiration of the contractor’s warranty.

1.16 Patents

A. The KEC shall hold harmless and save the Owner and its officers, consultants, and employees from

liability of any nature or kind, including costs and expenses for or on account of any copyrighted,

patented, or unpatented invention, process, trademark, design, device, material, article, or appliance

manufactured or used in the performance of the contract, including its use by the Owner, unless otherwise

specifically stipulated in the contract documents. If the KEC has information that the process or article

specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives

such information to the Owner in writing. The contract price shall include all royalties or cost arising

from the use of any or all of the above which are, in any way, involved in the contract.

1.17 Damage or Loss

A. Responsibility shall rest with the KEC for any damage and/or loss of goods incurred prior to Owner's

acceptance, except that it may pass liability to the GC through a separate instrument if approved by the

Owner.

In the absence thereof, such items that become lost, stolen, or damaged in transit or in any other way from

any cause, shall be immediately replaced by identical items of same source or manufacture, or repaired to

a condition that is accepted by the Owner, by the KEC at the KEC's expense.

B. The KEC shall hold the Owner harmless from loss of any funds disbursed for draws, down payments,

deposits, shipping, or other procurement expenses, as a result of or through deceit, fraud, theft,






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

embezzlement, insolvency, or bankruptcy, regardless of bonding. Stockholders of the KEC firm shall be

individually liable to the Owner for any and all specific losses.

1.18 Use of Premises and Removal of Debris

A. The KEC undertakes at its own expense:

1. To avoid damage to all persons and property, and conduct its business activities in a workman-

like manner, with due diligence.

2. To store its apparatus, equipment, materials, and supplies in an orderly manner upon the site, not

to unduly interfere with the progress of work by others;

3. To place on the worksite only materials and equipment as may be adequately accommodated for

security, fastening, erection, fire safety, or hook-up in a reasonable working period;

4. To frequently clean up debris resulting from its work, to present a neat, safe, and workmanlike

site condition, and to remove its debris, leaving the worksite broom clean at the end of every

workday. No flammable or combustible materials shall be allowed to accumulate on the jobsite.

5. To determine and conform to the jobsite access, parking, and vehicle restrictions specified for the

Project.

6. To effect the cutting, patching, fitting, and trimming of all KEC equipment and work as required

to make it acceptable and to conform to site conditions, plans, and specifications, and without the

consent of the Owner, not to cut into or remove any work by others. Any field cutting, joining, or

patching shall be shop quality, and fully finished, regrained, and made acceptable to the Owner at

no additional expense to the Owner;

7. To perform and coordinate its work with the other trades on the site to maintain the Project

Schedule, promote an orderly work flow, and minimize lost time for any trade due to misdirected

or uncoordinated work.

8. To determine and adhere to all work safety and personnel conduct standards established for the

project.

1.19 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors

A. All trades, contractors, and subcontractors shall work together on the worksite. If, through lack of due

diligence or negligent acts by the KEC, or any other subcontractor to the KEC, any other contractor shall

suffer loss or incur damages on the worksite, the KEC agrees to settle mutual obligations with any such

other contractor or subcontractor by agreement through binding arbitration as its first course of

adjustment.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. The KEC shall maintain timely, complete and accurate provision and exchange of information with all

parties to the project.

1.20 Extra Work May Be Ordered

A. The Owner may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deleting from, the Work,

with the Contract Sum being adjusted accordingly on a pro-rata basis. All work of the nature bid upon

shall be paid for at the price stipulated in the Contract, and no claims for extra cost shall be allowed

unless the work changes are in writing, evidencing supplier price increases, or by a Change Order

Proposal, accepted by the Owner.

B. The Schedule of Values required of the KEC shall be the basis for extra compensation as well as for any

deletions.

1.21 Claims for Extra Cost

A. Written orders for extra work, or a Change Order, shall be required to substantiate all claims for extra

compensation. Any work attempted or accomplished without prior authorization shall be considered as

having been done under the original or existing contract documents, at no added cost to the Owner. Extra

work shall be paid for as agreed between the Owner and KEC per the Schedule of Values or subsequent,

duly prepared and executed change orders.

B. Where applicable, the KEC shall furnish bills, time records, invoices, vouchers, or other certified

documents, to evidence claims for extra costs and expenses and to validate the basis for compensation.

1.22 Consultant Authority

A. The Consultant as an Owner's Agent shall determine the value, amount, quality, and fitness of equipment,

materials, or features provided or work proposed or performed under this section. Wherever a

discrepancy occurs, the KEC shall provide the greater of quantity, quality, or value.

B. The estimations and decisions of the Consultant shall be final and conclusive. Should any dispute arise

from interpretation of the documents, the Consultant's decision shall be a precedent to the KEC's

receiving any contract price adjustment for work performed.

C. The Consultant shall decide the meaning, intent, or definition of any portion of the plans as it affects the

Foodservice Equipment Contract.

D. The Owner has the ultimate right to gauge acceptability of the work.

1.23 Right of the Owner to Terminate the KEC

A. The Owner, upon violation of any part of the KEC by the KEC, may order the GC to terminate the KEC

with ten (10) calendar days written notice to the KEC, containing specific reasons for termination and

directives to effect required cures for deficiencies. If at the expiration of twenty (20) calendar days after






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

notice of the violations, acceptable cures have not been achieved, the Owner may at its option terminate

the KEC.

B. The Owner shall serve any notices to the last known address of the GC. Unfinished work of the KEC

may be affected and the cost thereof charged back against any funds due to the GC.

1.24 Site Coordination

A. The KEC shall provide an experienced representative on the site during any periods of KEC activity, to

coordinate with other trades and assist in proper access, handling, trim, roughing-in, or hook-up of the

equipment.

B. The KEC shall make available to the trades all installation manuals, wiring diagrams, schematic

diagrams, typical parts lists, or other data commonly packed or crated with shipped items, by collecting

such, item number marking same, and giving same to the GC site superintendent for record and holding;

this activity being separate and apart from Submittal requirements.

C. The KEC shall provide the consultant no less than ten days' written notice of commencement of any

scheduled installation, start-up, or demonstration activities.

1.25 Field Dimensions and Conditions

A. All sizes and dimensions given or derived on drawings are as accurate as can be determined prior to

construction. The KEC shall field check all dimensions that affect the work.

B. The KEC shall not order large items, such as walk-in coolers and freezers, hoods, etc., before verifying

field dimensions and access.

C. The KEC shall verify all provisions for remote system component installation, utility services, and

interconnection routing, including waste handling, refrigeration, water, and ventilation systems. Source

water quality, pressure, and temperature, gas service nature, steam pressure and condensate provisions,

and site electrical characteristics shall all be verified by the KEC prior to the commencement of any work

on the project.

D. Where obstructions or variance is discovered, the KEC shall exercise due diligence and give timely

written notice to the GC, and proceed to facilitate completion of the work by provision of equipment that

accommodates the field conditions.

E. The KEC shall coordinate any headers or wall blocking required for the installation of kitchen equipment.

Wall or ceiling mounted shelves and racks shall be capable of supporting not less than 50 lbs./LF.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1.26 Changes in Work in Progress

A. The Owner may issue a Change Order to require the KEC to modify the nature of the work; its size,

shape, quantity, features, phasing, and timing. The KEC shall receive no additional compensation where

a change does not affect the delivery schedule/price, quantity, quality, or features of the work.

B. Any changes affecting the contract sum must be agreed upon in writing prior to the commencement of

any work or such will be deemed to have been done under the tenets of the existing contract.

1.27 Start-up Regulation, Testing, Demonstration, and Approval

A. The KEC shall start-up all equipment, regulate, calibrate, and test all items and systems, and generally

evidence to the Owner's satisfaction that all items are sound, operational, and provided as specified.

B. The KEC shall order and pay for all inspections or tests by regulatory authorities who challenge the

suitability of equipment provided under their jurisdiction.

C. The KEC shall leave in place protective covering on exposed stainless steel, glass, or other surfaces until

immediately prior to removal by the KEC for final inspection and general cleaning.

D. Final cleaning and sterilizing prior to use of equipment in food production shall be by the Owner;

NIKEC.

E. The Owner shall grant final approval of all equipment after all deficiencies on the final punch list

prepared by the Consultant have been satisfactorily cured or remedies opted.

F. The KEC shall schedule demonstrations of all Class 2, 3 and 4 equipment by Factory Authorized

Demonstrators, at times convenient to the Owner. Notice shall be given to the Foodservice Consultant of

the demonstration schedule. Demonstration shall include competent instruction in the use, cleaning,

repair, and maintenance of the equipment.

1. Class l - Equipment that requires no demonstration. Written instructions will suffice (i.e., roll

warmers, toasters, racks, refrigerators, etc.).

2. Class 2 - Equipment that is easy to understand and quickly demonstrated by a Factory

Authorized Demonstrator (i.e., ranges, slicers, disposers, etc.)

3. Class 3 - Complex equipment which requires more in-depth knowledge of assembly, operation,

maintenance or cleaning. (i.e., steam equipment, multi-tank dish washers, fryer batteries, etc.).

4. Class 4 - High technology equipment or systems that require extensive training, or for which

demonstrations are factory-required. (i.e., cook-chill systems, conveyor ovens, etc.)

G. The KEC shall not demonstrate any existing or vendor-furnished equipment.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

H. The costs of start-up and Factory Authorized Demonstration shall be included in the cost of each item of

equipment.

I. Re-demonstration of any equipment during the warranty period shall be charged to the Owner at cost.

High-quality video taped demonstrations will be acceptable as Factory Authorized Demonstrations if the

media is provided to and remains with the Owner indefinitely.

1.28 Overtime Work

A. The cost of all overtime work required by the KEC to meet the Owner's schedule due to KEC negligence

shall be borne by the KEC.

B. Overtime work required by no fault of the KEC, authorized by a properly executed Change Order with

records for extra time charges, shall be reimbursed without mark-up to the contractor.

Part 2 - General Specifications

2.1 Utility Service Requirements - Electrical

A. The KEC shall furnish all self-contained equipment completely interwired to a single point of connection

near the rough-in point indicated on the rough-in plan. Fabricated items shall have service extended to

junction boxes mounted on equipment where accessible and non-obstructive. Electrical receptacles

mounted on fabricated equipment shall be provided mounted and pre-wired to a junction box by the KEC.

All pre-wiring in custom-fabricated equipment shall be tagged for easy identification on the site,

including equipment item number, rough-in stub number, and power characteristics.

B. Manufactured components mounting into assemblies may require the GC to connect directly from field

stubs to wiring or terminal blocks provided by the manufacturer. GC shall provide all required conduit,

wiring, fittings, and any quick-disconnects.

C. KEC shall confirm the power characteristics of all equipment designated as “Existing.”

D. Final connection of all equipment to field stubs shall be by the GC; NIKEC, including all non-scheduled

materials to do so. Interwiring of components for systems, such as waste disposers or systems, walk-in

refrigeration units, ice making, fire suppression, and ventilation systems, shall be by GC; NIKEC. The

KEC shall provide complete factory schematic wiring diagrams for any such systems and provide field

assistance in interconnecting multiple components.

E. The GC shall provide 3-wire, grounded electrical circuits and common wall and floor mounted outlets for

single phase equipment. The GC shall hold floor receptacles to a maximum +5-3/4" AFF clear overhead

dimension to avoid equipment base structures, unless specified otherwise. The KEC shall provide to the

GC a NEMA schedule of all plugs and receptacles for equipment to coordinate cords and caps for plug-

connected devices.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

F. The KEC shall install or mount, and wire all controls and heating elements shipped loose with equipment.

GC shall make final connection of the completed equipment to the utility rough-ins providing all non-

scheduled materials required. Final assemblies shall conform to all aspects of the project standards for

quality and workmanship.

G. All electrically heated equipment shall be provided with pilot lights, thermostats, and junction boxes for

final connection. Heating elements and controls shall be accessible for connection and replacement, and

shall be of such manufacture as to be readily available in the jobsite locality.

H. All wiring shall be concealed and conducted in only rigid or armored conduit. Visible conduit shall be

chrome plated, steel, or SS tubing. Conduit shall be secured at points of connection and intermediate

points to prevent loosening with use of the equipment. Hollow steel structures may be used as conduit if

wiring is provided in NEC armored cable, with proper fittings, grommets, and connectors. All wiring

shall be accessible for replacement.

I. The KEC shall furnish the initial switch on each motor-driven or heated appliance, and any other switch,

relay, starter, or disconnect shall be by the GC.

J. All equipment shall be new, of manufacturer's most current model and production, and furnished with all

standard motors, timers, cut-outs, fuses, switches, and components.

K. Wiring diagrams shall be applied to motor covers or other accessible locations for reference. Motors and

appliance data plates shall be legible and located where visible and accessible.

L. The KEC shall remove and repair or replace any device or assembly that exhibits excessive noise,

vibration, wobble, or relay noise, static, or inconsistency that may indicate a possible manufacturing or

assembly defect.

M. All electrical components shall be UL Listed and all wiring shall meet NEC and applicable project

standards. Enclosures, wiring, and controls shall be consistent with the use zones in which operation is

intended, such as wet working or cleaning areas, explosive atmospheres, or corrosive chemical, grease, or

food exposure areas. The finish and composition of any materials used shall be resistant to normal

industry, heavy duty abrasion, impact, chemicals, and moisture, for the full warranty period.

N. Any cover plate shall match the material and finish to which it is applied.

O. All switches and controls shall be easily identified as to equipment controlled, and multiple switch

assemblies shall have deeply engraved phenolic label nameplates permanently adhesive-applied adjacent

thereto, for identification. Controls and calibrations shall be identified by molded, or abrasive or

chemical-engraved area on the body metal of the equipment. The KEC shall submit a sample of the

proposed identification system for Owner's approval.

P. All fire suppression systems shall be provided with microswitches to be used by the GC to shut down the

power supply or combustible fuels to cooking equipment located under the ventilators, to connect to a fire

alert system, or to control fans, blowers, or dampers, per the A/E design and specifications. The GC shall






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

mount and wire any electrical gas line solenoid valves and electrical remote fire system manual release

stations.

Q. Switches and controls shall be recessed or provided with a SS guard to prevent damage to bodies, knobs,

stems, switches, lights, or labels, by carts or other traffic. Show locations on all shop drawings. All drop-

in or slide-in mounted equipment components with loose controls shall be provided with NEC-Approved

millwork or casework mounting bezels and wiring kits.

R. Mounting and final connection of vendor-furnished equipment shall be by Vendor.

2.2 Utility Service Requirements - Plumbing

A. Water inlets shall be located above the positive water level in all areas. Wherever a submerged inlet can

occur, the GC shall provide and mount an approved vacuum breaker, bleeder valve, or backflow

preventer.

B. All water or drain lines and fittings that are subject to freezing conditions shall be heat-traced and

insulated.

C. Wherever the work is visible, the GC shall use SS tubing or chromed piping and fittings, free of tool

scars, exhibiting no more than two exposed pipe threads. Any damaged materials shall be replaced by the

respective contractor.

D. Waste drain lines from fabricated equipment shall be conducted to drains by the GC, from drain tailpieces

and wastes, or common drain manifolds with accessible hand valves on fabricated equipment, provided

by the KEC.

E. All faucets, pre-rinses, and drain fittings shall be furnished by the KEC, with mounting and hook-up by

the GC. Fixtures shall be manufacturer's or fabricator’s shop standard where not specified or clarified by

standard details; submit for approval by Owner. Fixtures delivered for installation which are not

approved or are deemed unacceptable by the Owner shall be replaced with units of acceptable durability,

features, and parts availability.

F. Fixtures shall meet or exceed the standards of T&S Brass and Bronze Corp., Chicago Faucet Co.,

Standard-Keil Hardware Manufacturing Co., or Component Hardware Group. All fittings and

components are subject to all provisions of the contractor's warranty.

G. The KEC shall provide suitable, accessible pipe slots and chases through equipment for placement and

conducting of utility services by the GC without cutting of the equipment. Any sitework performed shall

be shop quality.

H. Final connection and interconnection of all equipment and components not so specified, and provision of

non-scheduled materials shall be by the GC; NIKEC. GC shall provide any conduit for the installation of

beverage systems.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

I. All horizontal piping shall be kept at the highest level to facilitate cleaning. The GC shall extend utilities

from rough-ins to points of connection after equipment is set in place. KEC shall seal equipment after

final connection.

J. The GC shall provide the first 15'-0" of drain lines for steamers of metal composition to withstand high-

temperature water or condensate discharge of boilers or cabinets.

K. All wall hung hand lavatories, soap and towel units, janitorial sinks, floor sinks, floor trench drains, and

service bibbs shall be by GC, unless specified otherwise (verify item specifications).

L. The GC shall not locate any floor sink or funnel floor drain in the footprint of any steamer or tight-

connect the drain line of any steamer compartment, steam generator, or manifold drain.

M. A beverage system conduit shall be a continuous shaft, provided by the GC in a continuous run from

source to stub out, using radius bends of not less than 12". Conduit material shall be PVC for non-rated

spaces, and cast iron pipe (CIP), pneumatic tubing or EMT where rated plenums are traversed. Rated

slabs may be penetrated using fire stop devices or installation methods, with or without conduit. Short

runs in non-rated spaces may be made without conduit.

N. The GC shall provide pull boxes or conduit/CIP fittings and plugs every 50'-0" of run, after two 90-degree

elbows, and at each tee, or severe direction change. Provide with pull lines. Beverage system providers

shall install all beverage (beer, soda, juice, glycol, chilled water) line bundles, and run all gas (CO2,

nitrogen, compressed air) lines and wire all valves, soda guns, and beer towers and run all related drains

to suitable drain fixtures.

2.3 Utility Service - Kitchen Ventilation and Fire Suppression

A. The GC shall provide and install all equipment and components to all exhaust and make-up air hoods and

canopies, starting from the outlet/inlet collar to the point of discharge/inlet, including all fans, ducts,

curbs, disconnects, starters, heaters, thermostats, cutting-in and welding. GC shall schedule all work.

B. The KEC shall provide and hang each hood or canopy in place, providing all hanging materials, level,

secure, and ready for final connection by the GC. Flue risers/duct extensions by the KEC shall be fully

welded 18 gauge Type 304, #4 finish stainless steel extended to 6" above the ceiling line and provided

with a 2" stand-off stainless steel trim collar.

C. Indirect/direct flue risers for equipment not requiring mechanical exhaust fans shall be provided with an

air-gap or draft induction connection where necessary for proper function. Vents or self-exhausting units

shall be provided with a tight duct connection. Procurement Contractor shall verify requirements with

specific manufacturers.

D. Dryers or self-exhausting equipment shall be provided with an all-metallic, non-flexible, tight duct

connection leading to the exterior of the building or approved duct space. Excessive duct runs or multiple

elbows in ducts shall be avoided; verify with equipment manufacturers.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

E. The KEC shall provide all ventilator light fixtures mounted and pre-wired to top-mounted junction boxes

for final connection or interconnection by the GC. Exposed conduit in canopies will be rejected. The

KEC shall furnish each fixture with appropriate bulbs.

F. Static pressures indicated are as measured at fixture collars and do not allow for added duct resistance.

G. All ventilation assemblies shall conform to all current requirements of NFPA Bulletin 96, standards 13 or

17A where applicable; Uniform Mechanical Code, BOCA, and shall be UL Listed as grease extraction

devices where applicable. All exhaust assemblies shall be fully welded, liquid tight, slope back to the

fixture served. Condensate hoods shall have a rigid drain line to an open site drain.

H. Ventilation assemblies furnished in sections shall not have interior bulkheads between sections in the

exposed capture plenum.

I. Fire suppression systems shall be factory-installed in all ventilators with ignition hazards, providing duct,

plenum, and surface protection, where required. Every system shall be certified to the State Fire

Marshall's Office, Bureau of Insurance Services. KEC shall provide to the GC gas shut-off valves for

installation on gas drops. GC shall extend service through the valve(s) to served equipment. KEC shall

connect valve(s) to the fire suppression system to shut-off gas upon fire suppression system discharge.

All exposed piping shall be chrome-plated, not sleeved or enameled.

J. Where a water mist fire protection system is required, provide a Grinnell patented nozzle fire suppression

system, UL-Listed category VNSY, with SS Control Cabinet, surface-mounted, pre-piped, containing all

valves and fittings, solenoid valves, pressure gauge, pressure switch, battery back-up system, and status

lights. Piping between the control cabinet and hood nozzles shall be by fire system installer. The fire

suppression system shall include nozzles in the proper heat range for the appliances and areas protected.

A basket type coarse line strainer shall be provided by the system installer in an easily accessible location

on the inlet piping ahead of the control cabinet. The system shall be sized by the approved manufacturer,

using a supply line providing up to the specified total nozzles, with a minimum pressure of 40 PsiG (175

PsiG maximum) at the control cabinet. Connection of a 120V 20A separately-fused service and wiring

between the control cabinet terminal block, NO/NC microswitch, and shunt trip panel(s), hood fan and

blower control panel, duct collar dampers, local or remote alarm systems, or building monitors shall be by

the respective trade, not by the fire system installer, who shall provide technical assistance to the

electrician.

K. Activation of any fire protection system shall automatically shut off all required energy sources.

2.4 General and Utility Requirements - Refrigeration

A. The KEC shall provide in all bids and performance of work the furnishing of complete refrigeration

systems, capable of performing at the specified temperatures under heavy duty usage conditions.

B. The KEC shall furnish a functioning refrigeration system to provide and maintain the following

temperatures:






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. Walk-in Freezer -10°F

2. Walk-in Lo-Temp Freezer -25°F

3. Walk-in Cooler +35°F

4. Prepared Inventory Refrigerator +30°F

5. Undercounter Refrigerator +38°F

6. Undercounter Freezer - 0°F

7. Reach-in Manufactured Refrigerator +35°F

8. Reach-in Manufactured freezer - 0°F

9. Salad Bar or Sandwich Unit +40°F

I. After the GC has completed electrical connections in the walk-in coolers and freezers, the KEC shall fill

the interior voids of junction boxes, conduits, and other panel penetrations with non-conductive

expanding foam sealant insulation to completely block all air movement through all such spaces.

J. The KEC shall verify refrigeration system sizing and assure adequate air movement or coolant provisions,

drainage, and access for maintenance and repair. All built-in condensing units shall be mounted on slide-

out supports.

K. The KEC shall run, insulate, and heat trace (freezers only), all drain lines, using enameled, rigid copper

pipe, forming traps/air gaps over accessible open site drains.

L. The KEC shall erect all pre-fabricated walk-in cooler and freezer cabinets, install floor panels or

insulation, and provide technical assistance to the GC for utility connections.

M. Cooler/freezer floors of pre-fabricated cabinets shall be NSF-approved and provided with adhesive-

applied non-slip aggregate coated strips, 2" wide on 6" centers, spanning each walk way, including any

ramps. Where specified, floors for heavy traffic shall be capped with 1/8" diamond tread aluminum plate,

over plywood-reinforced SS floor panels. Where cabinets are erected over insulated slabs provided by the

GC, the GC shall install a floor surface as specified by the A/E; NIKEC. KEC shall verify and coordinate

to deliver a level, flush threshold, regardless of floor system.

N. Pre-fabricated cabinets shall be 4" foamed-in-place polyurethane insulated, with metal interior and

exterior panel surfaces as specified. Structures shall include no wood. Panel seams shall be self-

gasketing, and further sealed by the KEC to eliminate all air leaks. Doors shall be self-closing, and fully

gasketed. Insulation values shall be (cured) U .0295 and R 34 for 4" panels. Flame spread rating shall be

NTE 25 and smoke development NTE 500.

O. General specifications for prefabricated walk-in panel and built-up refrigeration systems also apply to all

factory and custom-fabricated refrigeration units.

2.5 Millwork

A. All millwork items in the foodservice work zone area shall be fabricated and installed by the GC, who

shall coordinate all work, field dimensions, and setting in of KEC-furnished items. The Owner and KEC

shall approve all shop drawings.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Millwork shall be fully laminated 3/4" thick, A/B exterior glue, softwood plywood. Dimension lumber

framing is not acceptable. Drawer liners and backs shall be 5/8" kiln dried hardwood. All units shall have

finished backs and shall be mounted without exposed fasteners.

C. Plastic laminate shall be 1/16" thick, high-pressure phenolic resin with pattern selected by Owner. Only

1/16" horizontal grade shall be used where exposed to view or wear. All exposed surfaces shall be

laminated, including shelf bottoms and ends. Unexposed surfaces may be laminated with a neutral color

cabinet liner. Adhesives shall be non-flammable solvent contact cement. Fasteners, splines, and

alignment pins shall be minimized and not visible.

D. Fasteners used in field joints shall not be exposed, and be of non-corroding, metallic composition. All

field joints shall be splined, drawn tight, and sealed with clear silicon rubber (GE 801 Hi-Heat Range).

All plastic laminate patterns shall applied to run parallel to the longest dimension of the panel. All

intersecting patterns shall be mitered. Glue lines shall be trimmed and cleaned. Edges shall be beveled,

and overlapped to prevent seepage of liquids between laminates and backing material.

E. All contractors shall cut all of their own utility routes through millwork, leaving no penetration burrs or

splintering, and providing grommets. All top cutouts for installation of drop-in components shall be by

the KEC. Cut-outs for removable components shall be self-edged to match the panel penetrated.

Fabricate all units with scribe panels for an acceptable, close fit-up.

F. KEC shall provide all NEC Millwork Approved, recessed control mounting bezels appropriate for the

locations of the switches, thermostatic controls, and pilot lights of all foodservice equipment.

G. Millwork drawings by the Architect or Consultant are for guide purposes. The Fabricator shall submit

shop drawings for approval by the Owner.

2.6 Materials

A. Stainless steel (termed SS) shall be Type 304, 18-8, chrome-nickel, extra low non-magnetic, austenitic,

corrosion-resisting, alloy steel. Sheets shall be all new material, flat, and free from all warps, buckles,

and surface flaws and imperfections.

B. Galvanized iron (GI) shall be ARMCO or USRM iron or an approved grade of copper-bearing steel, hot-

dip coated in pure zinc. Sheets shall be fully galvanized, and free of warps, buckles, surface blemishes,

runs, checks, or oxidation. Sprayed-on coatings will be rejected (see 2.8.B Finishes).

C. All metal shall be true US Standard gauge after working. Unless specifically approved in writing, no

gauge less than 20 shall be incorporated into any fabrication:

10 GAUGE 0.1406" 16 GAUGE 0.0625"

12 GAUGE 0.1094" 18 GAUGE 0.0500"

14 GAUGE 0.0781" 20 GAUGE 0.0375"






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

D. Metals and other material found to be not in compliance with specifications or manufacturer's details shall

be rejected and removed from the jobsite and replaced by approved materials meeting the General

Specifications.

E. Structural steel shall consist of angles, channels, straps, bars or other shapes, galvanized, ductile in

quality, and free of surface imperfections and corrosion.

F. All tubing shall be seamless, true gauge, and uncrimped, whether used for structure, support, or conduit.

G. Black iron (BI) or ferrous metal used in canopy ducting shall be minimum 16 GAUGE, fully welded at all

joints and seams, and properly insulated as required by applicable code, and meet the requirements of

NFPA Bulletin 96, current issue. Ductwork and insulation is NIKEC, except where noted.

H. White metal (castings and components) shall consist of corrosion-resistant alloy containing not less than

30% nickel. All castings shall be rough ground, polished, and buffed to a bright lustre, free from all pits,

burrs, or imperfections. Aluminum and plastic castings will be rejected.

2.7 Fabrication

A. Standard Details provided by the Consultant shall be followed closely in bidding and preparation of

fabrication shop drawings. Detail plates commonly refer to other detail plates, and if the KEC discovers

the absence of or conflict with any other detail plate, it shall assume to correct or clarify any missing

information before progressing with any of the work.

B. All items of custom fabricated equipment shall be constructed in the same factory and shall be similar in

construction details, materials, methods, and appearance to similar types of items so fabricated under this

contract.

C. Each item of fabricated equipment shall include all customary reinforcing, bracing, and welding with the

proper number and spacing of uprights and cross members for strength, per Standard Details,

Supplementary Details, or Custom Details. Where standard sheet sizes will permit, the tops of all tables,

shelves, exterior panels of cabinet type fixtures, and all doors and drainboards shall be constructed of a

single sheet of metal. Except where required to be removable, all flat surfaces shall be secured to vertical

and horizontal bracing members by welding or other approved means to eliminate all buckle, warp, rattle,

and wobble.

D. Suitable pipe slots shall be provided on fabricated equipment, as required, to accommodate service and

utility lines and mechanical connections. These slots shall be of adequate size and shall be neatly made

with turned up edges all around to eliminate cutting or defacing of equipment on the job. Cabinet bases

shall be provided with an inner panel duct at the ends or rear of the cabinet allowing adequate space to

conceal vertical piping. Such work, when performed at the job site, shall be of the same quality as similar

work performed in the shop.

E. All exposed surfaces shall be free from bolt and screw heads. When bolts are required, they shall be

machine thread of concealed type and be of similar composition as the metal to which they are applied.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

Where bolt or screw threads on the interior of fixtures are visible or may come into contact with hands or

wiping cloths, they shall be capped with a stainless steel acorn nut and stainless steel lock washer.

F. Where screw threads are not visible or readily accessible, they shall be assembled with stainless steel lock

washers and nuts. Wherever bolts or screws are welded to the underside of trim or tops, the reverse side

of the weld shall be finished uniformly with the adjoining surfaces. Depressions at these points shall not

be acceptable.

G. Rivets shall not be permitted in any location.

H. All welding shall be the heliarc method with welding rod of the same composition as the sheets or parts

welded. Welds shall be complete, strong, and ductile with excess metal ground off and joints finished

smooth to matching adjoining surfaces. Welds shall be free of mechanical imperfections such as gas

holes, pits, cracks, etc. and shall be continuously welded so that the fixtures shall appear as one piece

construction. Butt welds made by spot solder and finished by grinding shall not be acceptable.

1. Spot welds shall have a maximum spacing of 3". Tack welds shall be of at least 1/4" length of

welding material at a maximum space of 4" from center to center. Weld spacing at the ends of

the channel battens shall not exceed 2" centers. All pan corners shall be fully welded.

2. In no case shall soldering be considered as a replacement for welding, nor shall any soldering

operation be done where dependence is placed on stability and strength of the joint or the joint is

exposed to foods or moisture.

3. Fixtures shall be shop fabricated in one piece and shipped to the job completely assembled

wherever possible. Equipment too large to transport or enter the building as one piece shall be

constructed so that the field joints can be welded at the job site.

4. All exposed joints shall be ground flush with adjoining material and finished to harmonize

therewith. Whenever material has sunk or been depressed by welding operation, such depression

shall be suitably hammered and peened flush with the adjoining surface and finished. The grain

of rough grinding shall be removed by successive fine polishing operations.

5. All unexposed welded joints on galvanized steel undershelves of tables or counters in stainless

steel construction shall be suitably coated at the factory with an approved cold galvanizing

coating.

6. After galvanized steel members have been welded, all welds and areas where galvanizing has

been damaged shall have a zinc dust coating applied in conformance with U.S. Government

Military Specification Number MILP-26915.

I. Butt joints and contact joints, wherever they occur, shall be drawn tight and secured and shall not require

a filler. Wherever breaks occur, they shall be free of undue extrudence and shall not be flaky, scaly, or

cracked. Where such breaks do not mar the uniform surface appearance of the material, all such marks

shall be removed by suitable grinding, polishing, and finishing. Wherever sheared edges occur, they shall






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

be free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections and shall be finished to obviate all danger of cutting or

laceration.

J. The grain of polishing shall run in the same direction on all horizontal and on all vertical surfaces of each

item of fabricated equipment except in the case where the finish of the horizontal sections of each shall

terminate in a mitered edge. Where sinks and adjacent drainboards are equipped with backsplashes, the

grain of polishing shall be consistent in direction throughout the length of the backsplash and sink

compartment.

K. Component parts, whether fabricated by KEC or purchased for building into the fabricated equipment,

shall conform to the following:

Bolts, screws, nuts and washers shall be of steel with machine thread, except where brass or stainless steel

is fastened, in which case they shall be of brass or stainless steel respectively. Where dissimilar metals are

fastened, bolts, screws, nuts and washers shall be of the higher grade metal. The spacing and extent of

bolts and screws shall be such as to ensure suitable fastening and prevent buckling of the metals fastened.

Such fasteners shall be minimized in use and concealed wherever possible.

2.8 Finishes (Finishing)

A. Stainless steel shall be polished and uniformly grained to a #4 commercial finish. Polishing grain shall

run in the same direction on equipment, wherever possible, with the longer direction. All metal sheets

and cutouts shall be deburred before working, and all equipment shall have no burrs after installation.

Overground, hollow ground, or scored surfaces, seams, corners, or other features will be rejected.

B. Exposed galvanized surfaces shall not be painted. Any areas where galvanizing has been lost or damaged

in working shall be recoated with ARMCO Zinc-Grip or Rust-Oleum 2185 zinc rich, self-priming, cold

galvanizing coating. Remove all machine oils or foreign material before recoating or final painting if

specified.

C. All equipment bodies shall be free of debris, dust, grit, oil, wraps, burrs, spelter, burns, autographs, and

all shop markings to be accepted.

2.9 Workmanship

A. Each item of equipment shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner including all reinforcing, bracing,

and welding or fastening, grinding, polishing, and final finishing. All work shall be of highest standards

to the industry.

B. Pipe slots and chases shall be provided where needed in all fabricated equipment for use by the GC in

connecting utilities. Access shall be cut by KEC and all work shall be shop quality, ground, deburred,

and restored.

C. Exposed fasteners shall be minimized, used only when necessary and where approved, and shall only be

type 300 SS, tight-fitting, oval head, machine thread screws or bolts, drilled and tapped, into metal of






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

suitable gauge. Self-tapping or plated fasteners, open or aluminum rivets, or other light gauge fastening,

or without proper backup support or fishplates, will be rejected.

D. Knuckle joints will be accepted where approved, in writing, but minimized, drawn tight, fastened, silicone

sealed, and NSF-approved.

E. Solder, lead, Bondo, resin, or any other material except sound deadening or insulating, will be rejected.

F. All equipment shall be sealed to permanently placed adjacent equipment and dissimilar construction.

Provide and install such equipment using concealed “Z-clips” or stabilizing angle attachments whether

the equipment is custom fabricated or manufacturer’s standard models, and seal with clear silicone

sealant. Patching of any nature will be rejected. The KEC shall provide and install equipment and

assemblies with a minimum-tolerance, close, tight fit-up, per field conditions. Silicone sealed joints

exceeding 1/4" at any point will be rejected. Trim is not an acceptable substitute for accuracy in sizing

custom-fabricated equipment or assemblies.

G. All SS work surfaces of all equipment shall be provided with sound-deadening complete fillet or coating

with an NSF-approved mastic to a minimum thickness not less than 1/8" as measured at any point.

Deadening tape alone is insufficient.

H. All lenses used in fabrication shall be plate glass with SS or metal guarded or protected edges. No Lexan,

acrylic plastic, or other such products shall be accepted, even if components of commercially-

manufactured systems.

2.10 Welding

A. All welding shall join similar metals with rods of the same metal content. Welding shall be electric arc

type with argon or inert gas shielding to prevent oxidation of the welds. All exposed welds shall be

ground flat and regrained to match adjacent areas.

B. Worked surfaces that are distorted shall be peened to the original level, ground, and regrained,

maintaining true gauge.

C. Joints of dissimilar metals shall be termed brazed and such joints shall be by a high-heat process using

copper-bearing or brass composition rods in unexposed and non-food contact areas.

D. Soldering and filleting will be rejected.

E. Ductwork shall be fully welded 16 GA ferrous metal or 18 GA SS, by GC except where specified

otherwise.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

Part 3 - Directives and Requirements

3.1 Coordination Directives

A. The KEC shall review all drawings pertaining to the project regarding condition and equipment to be

furnished under this section, including access, construction, electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and

control systems, and details as prepared by the Consultant and all other parties to the project. The

KEC shall not order any equipment until it has obtained exact dimensions for all work. The cost of

correcting an oversight or premature commencement of any work shall not be charged to the Owner.

The KEC shall verify, furnish and install all equipment in accordance with the site conditions and all

aspects of utilities roughed-in to the foodservice areas.

B. The KEC shall not attach any nameplates of any nature to any equipment, except as may be provided

on factory-made equipment by manufacturers. If inventory tags are made available to the KEC by the

Owner for application, the KEC shall so tag equipment in places requested by the Owner, and an

accurate record of serial and/or model numbers matching the equipment shall be provided to the

Owner, coordinated with the purchase specifications and schedule of values.

C. The KEC shall attend construction and progress meetings and conferences on a regular basis when

requested to so do, and maintain a correspondence record of all matters and contacts pertaining to the

project, and tender such data and documents available to the Owner upon request.

D. The KEC shall make the GC aware of the exact scope of work stated herein and proposed by the KEC

in its bid, and fully list any and all exceptions to the Bidding Documents in its tender. Failure to

submit in writing at the time of bidding any exceptions to the bidding documents will block any

remedy at any time after acceptance of the Kitchen Equipment Contract.

E. The KEC shall establish and confirm the rigging, hoisting, or access schedule with the GC, for any

components too large to fit through the available doors, corridors, angled passageways, elevators,

landings, or stairwells.

F. The GC and KEC shall coordinate, work out, agree to, and execute all work required to complete the

section work, without omission of any activities necessary for timely, accurate, and complete

performance.

G. The GC shall be ultimately responsible for the performance of the KEC and for the execution all work

specified under Section 114000 - Foodservice Equipment.

3.2 Special Directives

A. Channel bases for equipment shall be set in place on the structural slab for imbedded installations, or on

the finished floor for equipment setting by the KEC, then sealed if the face of the base is to be the final

finish or if a finish is specified to be applied thereto.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Pigmented sealant will be rejected and all metals and finishes shall be cleaned with solvent before any

sealants are applied to assure bonding. Extruded sealant shall be cut away and cleaned with solvent.

Sealing shall be done after equipment has been connected and started up. Installation and silicone bonds

are subject to all tenets of the warranty.

C. Mounting and final connection of vendor-furnished equipment is NIKEC.

D. Unless specified otherwise, GC shall furr-in hoods, coolers, or chases to the ceiling.

E. KEC shall coordinate with other trades on the site to assure that equipment, finishes, aluminum, stainless

steel, decorative finishes, and electrical components are not damaged by acid or harsh chemical floor or

tile treatment.

Part 4 - Item Specifications

4.1 Inclusive Terms

A. All items of equipment listed in the contract documents shall be furnished in strict accordance therewith,

which shall indicate options and accessories, in addition to all standard parts, fittings, inserts, and

features, that are commonly furnished by the manufacturer with each item without need of mention.

B. The KEC shall provide all parts, components, or accessories normally required for equipment to function

properly or be operated by the User.

C. All references expressed on Standard Details, Special Details, Elevations, or Item Specifications shall be

followed by the KEC.

4.2 Exclusive Terms

A. Features, finishes, accessories, or parts standardly provided with items of equipment may be deleted by

the KEC only if expressly deducted, deleted, or excluded in the item specifications.

B. The KEC shall not provide pots, pans, hand tools, can openers, utensils, loose cutting boards, s/s steam

table or sandwich unit inserts, salad bar vessels, bowls, covers, dish racks, or flatware

containers/cylinders, except where directed to do so in the item specifications.

C. The KEC shall not provide menu, poster, pricing, or directive system components, removable floor mats,

floor maintenance equipment, hoses, garbage cans, or utility carts, except where directed to do so in the

item specifications.

4.3 General Terms

A. All work shall conform to the General Conditions and Specifications of the Contract.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. The bidding documents and the General Conditions and Specifications of the Contract, are job-specific.

The Owner shall not consider the GC/KEC's failure to read, question, or understand Parts 1 through 4 and

any other bidding document as a defense or mitigating justification for non-compliance with the contract

documents.

C. Language, terms, and references used in the contract documents shall be interpreted as being construed in

jargon commonly used in the foodservice industry. It is incumbent on the bidder/KEC to base its work on

verified project data. Any information referred or inferred in the documents, but as may be missing,

unclear or not fully understood by the bidder, must be questioned, qualified, or challenged in writing prior

to the bid agreement, or the KEC shall be bound by the interpretation of the partial information by the

Owner.

4.4 Kitchen Equipment

A. The following item specifications are only a part of the Section 114000 - Foodservice Equipment bidding

documents, and each proposal shall incorporate all parts of the whole of the bidding documents. No other

agreements, understandings, or conditions are imposed or are in effect regarding the obligations of any

party to the resultant contract between the Owner and any Offeror.

B. GC/Foodservice equipment provider shall review the architectural finish schedules, elevations, and plans,

to determine the nature, manufacturer, color, and surface style of all finishes on Foodservice Equipment.

ITEM 01 Griddle

MANUFACTURER MagiKitch'n

MODEL MKE36

FEATURES - Solid state thermostat.

- Quick disconnect.

ALTERNATES Keating

Vulcan

Garland

ITEM 02 Refrigerated Base

MANUFACTURER Beverage-Air

MODEL WTRCS-36-1

FEATURES - Manufacturer’s standard unit.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 03 Fryer Battery

MANUFACTURER Frymaster

MODEL RE14-2

FEATURES - (2) fryers with split frypots.

- Spreader cabinet.

- Frypot cover.

- Casters with quick disconnect.

- Sediment tray.

- Filter.

ALTERNATES Pitco

Vulcan

ITEM 04 Exhaust Hood

MANUFACTURER Captive Aire

MODEL ND-2-PSP-F

FEATURES - Exhaust hood with front mounted perforated supply plenum, size and depth as

indicated on the plan, mounted +7'-0" AFF extending up to +9'-0" AFF plus

duct collars (KEC provide shop drawings for confirmation).

- All SS type 304 construction, conforming to NFPA Bulletin 96, UL, and NSF,

and local code.

- Heating equipment to provide tempering to a minimum +55°F in winter season

by GC; NIKEC.

- Incandescent light fixtures with bulbs prewired to mounted, labeled light switch

in the end enclosure fascia of the hood, and concealed junction box.

- Mounted, labeled fan and control relay switch in fascia of the hood, and

concealed junction box.

- All SS UL-Listed grease extractors.

- Closure panels to ceiling, if required.

- Provide and install per General Specifications.

ALTERNATES Greenheck

Halton

ITEM 05 Ducts, Fans, Controls

MANUFACTURER Generic

MODEL Generic

FEATURES - Item by G.C.; NIKEC.

- Size and locate by A/E.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 06 Fire Suppression System

MANUFACTURER Ansul

MODEL R-102

FEATURES - Automatic fire suppression system using wet chemical agent for grease related

fires.

- U.L. listed fire suppression system to provide duct, plenum, and surface

coverage.

- Certify to local Fire Marshall's office.

- Provide remote pull stations as required by code; locate by G.C.

- Connection of a 120V 20A separately-fused service and wiring between the

control cabinet terminal block and shunt trip panel(s), hood fan and blower

control panel, duct collar dampers, local or remote alarm systems, or building

monitors shall be by the respective trade, not by the fire system installer

(NIKEC), who shall provide technical assistance to the proper trades.

- Provide mechanical gas shut-off valve.

- Provide and install per General Specifications.

ALTERNATES Captive Aire

Guardian

ITEM 07 Undercounter Freezer

MANUFACTURER Beverage Aire

MODEL UCF27AHC

FEATURES - Door hinged as shown on plan.

- Exterior thermometer.

- Coordinate height with counter, Item 12.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 08 Pizza Oven

MANUFACTURER Lincoln

MODEL 1132-xxx-V

FEATURES - Ventless operation.

- With stand.

- FASTBAKE option, left to right.

ALTERNATES Middleby-Marshall

Vollrath






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 09 Sandwich Make Refrigerator


MODEL SPE48HC-12

FEATURES - Single overshelf.

- Stainless steel back.

- Digital thermometer.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 10 Reach-In Freezer


MODEL HFP2HC-1S

FEATURES - Manufacturer's standard unit.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 11 Pass-Thru Window

MANUFACTURER Fabricator/Hatco

MODEL Custom/GRAH-48

FEATURES - 16 ga. SS wall panel attached with contact adhesive and oval head SS fasteners

into imbedded wall anchors.

- From +44" to +60" AFF; verify length.

- Stainless steel framing around opening.

- Bottom shelf 12" wide, evenly spaced to each side.

- Two levels.

- Hatco GRAH-48 heat lamp mounted above each level (total 2).

ALTERNATES APW Wyott

Avantco

Vollrath






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 12 Work Counter

MANUFACTURER Fabricator

MODEL Custom

FEATURES - Size and shape as shown on plan; field verify.

- Refer to Architectural Details.

- Open base.

- Sound deaden top per General Specifications; tacky tape alone is not acceptable.

- Legs spaced to provide support for countertop equipment and clear

undercounter equipment.

- Provide with Z-clip backsplash and mount to wall, then seal with clear silicone

sealant.

- 36" high work surface.

- Install hand sink, Item 13, where shown on plan.

- Provide shop drawing for review and approval.

ALTERNATES Advance/Tabco

John Boos

Aero

ITEM 13 Slide-In Hand Sink

MANUFACTURER Eagle Group

MODEL HWB-T

FEATURES - Manufacturer's standard unit with soap and towel dispensers.

- Mount in counters where shown on plan.


ITEM 14 Reach-In Refrigerator/Freezer


MODEL 2HRP2HC-1S

FEATURES - (1) extra shelf per section.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 15 Vertical Toaster

MANUFACTURER Hatco

MODEL TK72


ALTERNATES Star






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 16 Steam Wells

MANUFACTURER Hatco

MODEL CHW-FUL



Metal Masters

Advance/Tabco

ITEM 17 Fry Dump

MANUFACTURER Hatco

MODEL GRFHS-PTT16

FEATURES - Pass-thru model.


ITEM 18 Food Warmers

MANUFACTURER Hatco

MODEL UGFFBL



Vollrath

Carlisle

ITEM 19 Frozen Beverage Machine

MANUFACTURER Taylor

MODEL MagnaBlend

FEATURES - Item by Operator; NIC.

- With rinse station.

ITEM 20 Soda Dispenser

MANUFACTURER Lancer

MODEL ICD 2300 8vl

FEATURES - Item by Vendor; NIC.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 21 Beverage Refrigerator

MANUFACTURER True

MODEL GDM-33-HC-LD

FEATURES - (1) extra shelf per section.

ALTERNATES Randell

Delfield

ITEM 22 Undercounter Refrigerators


MODEL UCR27

FEATURES - Coordinate height with counter height.


- Door swing per plan.

ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 22A Two-Door Undercounter Refrigerator


MODEL UCR48

FEATURES - Coordinate height with counter height.


ALTERNATES Randell

True

Delfield

ITEM 23 Cup Dispensers


MODEL Generic

FEATURES - Item by Operator; NIC.

ITEM 24 Coffee Brewer

MANUFACTURER Bunn

MODEL Axiom DV-3

FEATURES - Product number 38700.0008.

- Provide (3) carafes, two for regular coffee and one for decaf.

ALTERNATES Fetco

Curtis

Avantco






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 25 Hot Chocolate Machine

MANUFACTURER Bunn

MODEL FMD-2 Black


ALTERNATES Cecilware

Grindmaster

ITEM 26 Back Counter


MODEL Custom



- Open base.

- Provide stainless steel strip length of counter to be used to clip vinyl curtains to

hide undercounter equipment/supplies.


- Provide with Z-clip backsplash and mount to wall, then seal with clear silicone

sealant.


- Legs spaced to provide support for countertop equipment and to clear


- Provide grommeted hole for electrical plug for Item 17.



John Boos

Aero






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 27 Front Counter


MODEL Custom



- Open base.


- Provide with 4" Z-clip backsplash and mount to wall, then seal with clear

silicone sealant.


- Legs spaced to provide support for countertop equipment and to clear


- Provide sealed cutouts in backsplash for countertop equipment and convenience

outlets as shown on electrical rough-in plan, Sheet 1K-102.

- Install hand sink, Item 13, where shown on plan.



John Boos

Aero

ITEM 28 POS System


MODEL Generic

FEATURES - Item by Operator.

- Dedicated 120 volt single phase 800 watt IGR-shielded CCT.

ITEM 29 Popcorn Machine

MANUFACTURER Gold Medal

MODEL Astro Pop 16

FEATURES - By Operator; NIC.

ITEM 30 Cheese Warmer

MANUFACTURER Gehl Foods

MODEL Hot Top 2.0 Single

FEATURES - Manufacturer's standard unit in black.


Star






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 31 Pretzel Display

MANUFACTURER J&J

MODEL 850


ALTERNATES Hatco

Gold Medal

Nemco

ITEM 32 Pizza Display

MANUFACTURER Hatco

MODEL FSDT-1

FEATURES - Manufacturer’s standard unit.

ALTERNATES Gold Medal

Nemco

ITEM 33 Wall Shelves

MANUFACTURER Metal Masters

MODEL WS1260-16/3, WS1224-16/3

FEATURES - Mount where shown on plan.

- Mount at +4'-6" AFF.

- Advise GC to provide wall blocking to support 50 lbs/LF.


John Boos

Aero

ITEM 34 Coffee Drainer

MANUFACTURER T&S Brass and Bronze

MODEL 006678-45

FEATURES - Install in Item 26 counter where shown on plan.

- With tail piece.

ALTERNATES Fisher

Nemco

ITEM 35 Soda System


MODEL Generic

FEATURES - Item by Vendor; NIC.






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 36 Storage Shelving

MANUFACTURER Metro

MODEL Super Erecta Brite

FEATURES - (1) unit of A2142BR shelving per location.

- (5) shelves per unit.

- 74P posts.

- Locate bottom shelf +10" AFF amd evenly space balance of shelves.

ALTERNATES Metal Masters

Advance/Tabco

Amco

ITEM 37 Dunnage Rack

MANUFACTURER Metro

MODEL HP31K3

FEATURES - Manufacturer's standard unit with mat.


Advance/Tabco

Amco

ITEM 38 Ice Maker and Bin

MANUFACTURER Manitowoc

MODEL IDT0500A

FEATURES - Mount on D-570 bin.

- Stainless steel ice scoop and holder.

- Interconnect with water filter, Item 39.

ALTERNATES Hoshizaki

Ice-O-Matic

Scotsman

ITEM 39 Water Filter

MANUFACTURER Pentair/Everpure

MODEL EV9330-42

FEATURES - Connect to ice maker, Item 38, and soda system, Item 35.

- Provide (1) extra set of filters per unit.

ALTERNATES Cuno

3M






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 40 Clean Shelving

MANUFACTURER Metro

MODEL MetroSeal 3

FEATURES - (1) unit of 2142NK3 shelves.

- (5) shelves per unit.

- 74PK3 posts.

- Locate bottom shelf +10" AFF and evenly space balance of shelves.


Advance/Tabco

Amco

ITEM 41 Three-Compartment Sink


MODEL FN2060-3-18

FEATURES - Three 20"x20" sink bowls.

- 14 ga. Type 300 SS.

- (2) Model 301002 faucets, one with pre-rinse spray.

- (3) Model 300722 lever wastes with overflows.

- SS gussets and feet.

- Provide with “Z” clip backsplash and secure to wall, then seal with clear

silicone sealant.


John Boos

Aero

ITEM 42 Hand Sink


MODEL HSA-10-FDP


- Soap and towel dispensers are included.


John Boos

Aero

ITEM 43 Mop Sink


MODEL F1916

FEATURES - Service faucet, hose and bracket, and mop rack.


John Boos

Aero






FOODSERVICE

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

ITEM 44 Splash Shield


MODEL Custom

FEATURES - Refer to Standard Detail 1.31.

- Stainless steel.

- Locate where shown on plan.


Advance/Tabco

Brass Smith

ITEM 45 Wall Shelf

MANUFACTURER Metal Masters

MODEL WS12102-16/3

FEATURES - Full length of three compartment sink, Item 41.

- Mount at +5'-6" AFF.

- Advise GC to provide wall blocking to support 50 lbs/LF.


John Boos

Aero

ITEM 46 Hose Reel


MODEL Generic

FEATURES - Item by GC; NIKEC.

ITEM 47+ Spare Numbers

County of Loudoun, Virginia





ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 1 of 7 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated roller shades with double rollers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller

shades and accessories.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for

light-blocking shades with a sealant.

3. Section 034100 “Precast Structural Concrete” for coordination and integration with

precast openings and fastener attachment.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband

materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal,

and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches (250

mm) long.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.







07/13/2021

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches (250 mm) square. Mark interior face of

material if applicable.

2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 36

inches (900 mm) long for each type of roller shade indicated.

3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches (250 mm) long.

F. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color,

and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.







07/13/2021

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and

location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in

spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed

units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from

Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MechoShade

Systems, Inc; Mecho/5 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Draper Inc.

2. Hunter Douglas Contract.

B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that

stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade

b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.

c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade

weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=12336

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457025562










07/13/2021

a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses

required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands

indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and

idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller

3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel in tube.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller

assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions

indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to

three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Exposed with endcaps and integral light seal at bottom where it meets the

sill.

b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped

b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 2-1/2 inches.

2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top

and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.

a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 2-1/2 inches.

3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as

shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of

aligning shadebands with channels at tops.







07/13/2021

5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at

bottoms of shades when shades are closed.

6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. BOD series: Chealsea Blackout 0250 Series.

2. Type: Polyester with foamed-acrylic backing.

3. Thickness: 0.018 inches.

4. Weight: 11.50 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m).

5. Roll Width: as indicated on interior elevations window width.

6. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.

7. Features: Washable.

8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including

requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74

deg F (23 deg C):

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening

in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus

or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening

in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between

shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical

separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible,

except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,

provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure

shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion

of the material.

2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as

required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement

without distortion or sag of material.







07/13/2021

3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required

width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by

railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required,

one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, ]and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) o interior

face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or

malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,

before time of Substantial Completion.







07/13/2021

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.

END OF SECTION 122413






METAL COUNTERTOPS 123616 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Stainless-steel countertops.

2. Stainless-steel wall-mounted shelves.

3. Stainless-steel sinks.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded

wall-mounted shelves.



B. Shop Drawings: For metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and

installation, including field joints.

2. For countertops, show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in metal

countertops.

3. For wall-mounted shelves, indicate requirements for blocking or reinforcements in

supporting construction.


A. Deliver products only after casework and supports on which they will be installed has been

completed in installation areas.







07/13/2021

B. Keep finished surfaces of products covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering

during handling and installation.


A. Field Measurements: Where products are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to

avoid delaying the Work.

B. Established Dimensions: Where products are indicated to fit to other construction, establish

dimensions for areas where products are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STAINLESS-STEEL FABRICATIONS

A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide

smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end

overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over the base cabinets.

1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints.

2. Weld shop-made joints.

3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.

4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick edge with a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm)

return flange, or as indicated on drawings.

B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)

nominal thickness. Weld shop-made joints. Fold front edge up a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm);

fold back edge up a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed

by folding up ends a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) and by welding to upturned edges.

C. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)

nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch (16-mm)

radius. Slope the sink bottoms to outlet without channeling or grooving. Provide continuous

butt-welded joints.

1. Provide sizes indicated or manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume,

as approved by Architect.

2. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-

inch (13-mm) diameter.

3. Factory punch holes for fittings.

4. Provide sinks with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces.

5. Factory weld sinks to stainless-steel countertops to provide one, integral unit.







07/13/2021

6. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to

undersink surfaces.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304, 18-8, chrome-nickel, extra low non-

magnetic, austenitic, corrosion-resisting, alloy steel. Sheets shall be all new material, flat, and

free from all warps, buckles, and surface flaws and imperfections.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant that complies with applicable

requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and the following:

1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral

curing, silicone.

2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish,

with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each

piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of products.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. All

exposed surfaces shall be free from bolt and screw heads. When bolts are required, they shall

be machine thread of concealed type and be of similar composition as the metal to which they

are applied. Where bolt or screw threads on the interior of fixtures are visible or may come into

contact with hands or wiping cloths, they shall be capped with a stainless steel acorn nut and

stainless steel lock washer.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use

fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site







07/13/2021

processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop

Drawings.

C. Secure countertops to cabinets or substrate as indicated on drawings with Z- or L-type fasteners

or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.

D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent

deflection.

E. Seal junctures of countertops, splashes, and walls with sealant for countertops.

F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to supporting construction through upturned back edge at not

less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

1. For framed construction, fasten through wall or partition finishes directly to framing,

blocking, or reinforcements.


A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces. Remove and replace damaged products or touch up and refinish

damaged areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over

countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c.

Remove protection at Substantial Completion.


Country of Loudon, Virginia

Philip A. Bolen Memorial Park-




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.

3. Sleeve-seal systems.

4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.

6. Silicone sealants.




A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.










SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or

galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

2.2 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or

floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

b. Permathane®/Acryl-R®; ITW Polymers Sealants North America.

c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.

d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

e. The Dow Chemical Company.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.














SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP

sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without

sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.


2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping NPS 6 and smaller: Steel pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.







ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise

indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company.

2. Dearborn Brass.

3. Keeney Manufacturing Company (The).

4. Mid-America Fittings, Inc.











ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING


07/13/2021

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.







GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Two-piece ball valves with indicators.

2. Bronze butterfly valves with indicators.

3. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.

4. Check valves.

5. Bronze OS&Y gate valves.

6. Iron OS&Y gate valves.

7. NRS gate valves.

8. Indicator posts.

9. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

B. NRS: Nonrising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.






GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings

listed below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.

a. Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve.

b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.

1) Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control.

2) Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves.

3) Level 3: HMER - Check Valves.

4) Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.

2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.

a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim and Drain.

B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed

below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:






GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

a. Indicator posts.

b. Valves.

1) Gate valves.

2) Check valves.

a) Single check valves.

3) Miscellaneous valves.

C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.

D. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.

G. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as

required by system pressures.

H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain

valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.

2.2 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS


following:

1. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.

2. NIBCO INC.

3. Victaulic Company.

B. Description:










GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

1. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves

(butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Design: Two piece.

4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

5. Port Size: Full or standard.

6. Seats: PTFE.

7. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

9. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.

10. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.

11. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.

12. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

2.3 BRONZE BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS


following:

1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball

type), Class Number 1112.

2. Minimum: Pressure rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Material: Bronze.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

5. Stem Material: Bronze or stainless steel.

6. Disc: Bronze.



9. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.

10. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

2.4 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS


following:

1. Anvil International.













GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

3. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

4. NIBCO INC.

5. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.


7. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type),

Class Number 112.


3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Disc: Ductile iron, nickel plated.



9. Body Design: Lug or wafer or Grooved-end connections.

2.5 CHECK VALVES


following:

1. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.

2. Anvil International.

3. FEBCO; A WATTS Brand.

4. Fire Protection Products, Inc.


6. Mueller Co.

7. NIBCO INC.

8. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).


10. United Brass Works, Inc.


12. Viking Corporation.

13. WATTS.

14. Wilson & Cousins Inc.


B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210.



























GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

3. Type: Single swing check.

4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze.

5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal.

6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.

7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.

9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.6 BRONZE OS&Y GATE VALVES


following:

1. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. NIBCO INC.

3. United Brass Works, Inc.


B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y-

and NRS-type gate valves).


3. Body and Bonnet Material: Bronze or brass.

4. Wedge: One-piece bronze or brass.

5. Wedge Seat: Bronze.

6. Stem: Bronze or brass.

7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.

8. Supervisory Switch: External.

9. End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES


following:


2. Mueller Co.

3. NIBCO INC.


5. WATTS.



















GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Description:




3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.



9. End Connections: Flanged/ Grooved /Threaded.

2.8 NRS GATE VALVES


following:


2. Mueller Co.

3. NIBCO INC.



B. Description:




3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron with elastomeric coating.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.



9. End Connections: Flanged/ Grooved/ Threaded.

2.9 INDICATOR POSTS


following:

1. American Cast Iron Pipe Company.














GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021


3. Mueller Co.

4. NIBCO INC.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 789 and FM Global standard for indicator posts.

2. Type: Underground.

3. Base Barrel Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Extension Barrel: Cast or ductile iron.

5. Cap: Cast or ductile iron.

6. Operation: Wrench.

2.10 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves:


following:

a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems.

b. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

d. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International.

h. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

i. Victaulic Company.

j. WATTS.

k. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig /250 psig /300 psig.

b. Body Design: Two piece.

c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

d. Port size: Full or standard.

e. Seats: PTFE.

f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

h. Actuator: Hand lever.

i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends.

j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.





















GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Angle Valves:


following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig 250 psig /300 psig.

b. Body Material: Brass or bronze.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

C. Globe Valves:


following:

a. NIBCO INC.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig /250 psig /300 psig.

b. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc Holder and Nut: Bronze.

f. Disc Seat: Nitrile.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.













GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation requirements

and applications:

1. Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for application of

valves in fire-suppression water-service piping outside the building.

2. Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs

indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of

check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

D. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to

allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

Provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.






GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

PIPING


07/13/2021

G. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 210553 "Identification for Fire-

Suppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces

concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are

installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system controlled by

each valve.

H. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections.

I. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of








HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR FIRE SUPRESSION

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Equipment supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 210516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe

guides and anchors.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following:










FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.







FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved

for fire-suppression piping support.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot-dip galvanized.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: Copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL

listed, or FM approved for fire-suppression piping support.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from

structural-carbon-steel shapes, with NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved carbon-steel

hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


following:

a. ABB, Electrification Products Division.

b. B-line; Eaton, Electrical Sector.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. G-Strut.

e. Haydon Corporation.

f. Unistrut; Atkore International.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.















FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021


8. Metallic Coating: No coating Plain Pregalvanized G90.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


following:

a. Anvil International.

b. CADDY; nVent.

c. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

d. Empire Industries, Inc.

e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved threaded-steel stud,

for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Hilti, Inc.

b. MKT Fastening, LLC.

c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedge-

type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


following:

a. B-line; Eaton, Electrical Sector.



















FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

b. Hilti, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

d. MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel.

3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated

equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.










FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and

listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support

piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or

install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support

together on field-assembled metal strut systems.

D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install in accordance

with approvals and listings.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in

accordance with approvals and listings.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger







FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.







FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.







FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finishes.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile

environment applications.

G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise

indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no

insulation is required.

3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.







FOR FIRE SUPRESSION



07/13/2021

9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements.

K. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and

except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

L. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


O. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.







IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Carlton Industries, LP.

c. Champion America.

d. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

e. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

f. LEM Products Inc.

g. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch aluminum, 0.032 inch anodized aluminum,

0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White.

4. Background Color: Red.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Carlton Industries, LP.

c. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

d. emedco.

e. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

f. LEM Products Inc.

g. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


4. Background Color: Red.

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
























EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021



for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the




C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the specification

section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


following:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc.

2. Carlton Industries, LP.

3. Champion America.

4. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

5. emedco.

6. LEM Products Inc.

7. National Marker Company.

8. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

9. Stranco, Inc.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.


















EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


following:

1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.

2. Brady Corporation.


4. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

5. emedco.

6. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.



B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red.

















EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping: if pretensioned labels are not used.


following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

c. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.


3. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

4. Stencil Paint: Safety Red, exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized

spray-can form.

5. Identification Paint: White, exterior, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can

form.

2.5 VALVE TAGS


following:

1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.


3. Brimar Industries, Inc.


5. Champion America.

6. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.



B. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch stainless steel, 0.025 inch aluminum, 0.032 inch or

anodized aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain beaded chain or S-hook.

3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.






















EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surface of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well

as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification

devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe-Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with

painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 10 feet along each run.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves

in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar

to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: 4 inches.







FIRE DEPARTMENT

CONNECTIONS


07/13/2021

SECTION 211119 – FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Free-standing type fire-department connections.




and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FREE-STANDING TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION


following:

1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

3. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

4. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

5. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

6. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.

B. Standard: UL 405.

C. Type: Exposed, free-standing.













FIRE DEPARTMENT

CONNECTIONS


07/13/2021

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.

F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes

and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices

or clappers.

G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

H. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, free-standing type.

I. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.

J. Number of Inlets: One.

K. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR”.

L. Finish: Polished chrome plated.

M. Outlet Size: NPS 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-department connection installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install free-standing type fire-department connections.

B. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.







DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

SECTION 211316 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Specialty valves.

3. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings.

4. Sprinklers.

5. Alarm devices.

6. Manual control stations.

7. Control panels.

8. Pressure gages.


1. Section 211119 "Fire Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire

department connections.

2. Section 210523 "Fire Protection Piping" for ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator,

and trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175-psig maximum.








DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

B. Design Data:

1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,

that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic

calculations if applicable.

C. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

D. Field Test Reports:

1. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

2. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as

described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for

Aboveground Piping."

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.









DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering

responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed

air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe

valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with

the following:

1. NFPA 13.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. The margin-of-safety requirement may not be required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Retain "Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure" to require the

application of a margin of safety in the Contractor's design.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. See drawings for hazard classifications.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. See drawings for sprinkler density.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing and NFPA 13.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. See drawings for maximum protection area.

6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless

otherwise indicated:

a. See drawings for hose-stream demand.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may

be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M; ASTM A795/A795M, Type E; or

ASME B36.10M wrought steel, with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more

than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

E. Plain-End-Pipe Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter

turn or screwed retainer pin to secure pipe in fitting.


following:


b. Shurjoint; a part of Aalberts Integrated piping Systems.

F. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


following:


b. CPS Products, Inc.

c. Shurjoint; a part of Aalberts Integrated piping Systems.

d. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

e. Victaulic Company.















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig 250-psig 300-psig minimum.

3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,

EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L and ASTM B88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18 pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22 pressure fittings.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

F. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:


following:


b. Shurjoint; a part of Aalberts Integrated piping Systems.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B75, copper tube or ASTM B584 bronze castings.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot

and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."










DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Dry-Pipe Valves:


following:

a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

d. Victaulic Company.

e. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 260.

3. Design: Differential-pressure type.

4. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,

alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and

fill-line attachment.

5. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) General Air Products, Inc.

2) Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

3) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

4) Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

5) Victaulic Company.

6) Viking Corporation.


7. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.

8. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass

valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer,

pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 175-psig 300-psig outlet

pressure.

9. Air Compressor:



















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Gast Manufacturing Inc.

2) General Air Products, Inc.

3) Viking Corporation.

b. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global’ s "Approval

Guide."

c. Motor Horsepower: 1horse power or as required by shop drawing calculations.

d. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.

G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


following:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.

4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.


2.6 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

B. Branch Outlet Fittings:


following:


b. National Fittings, Inc.

c. Shurjoint; a part of Aalberts Integrated piping Systems.

d. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

e. Victaulic Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum /300 psig.

4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.



















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


following:




2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum 300 psig.

4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

D. Branch Line Testers:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

d. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

e. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International.



4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


following:

















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.



d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.


6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLERS


following:


2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).



5. Viking Corporation.

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.

D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by

application.

E. Sprinkler Finishes: bronze and painted.

F. Special Coatings: Wax and corrosion-resistant paint.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards:
















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021


following:




d. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Pressure Switches:


following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms; Honeywell International, Inc.

b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

d. System Sensor.


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

C. Valve Supervisory Switches:


following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms; Honeywell International, Inc.

b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

d. System Sensor.


3. Type: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.





















DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

2.9 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide" for

hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve.

B. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions

and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.10 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as indicated,

including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for

operation of deluge valves.

1. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide"

when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring.

2. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.


NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

B. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL

STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent

accidental opening.

C. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball

valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating

instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

D. Panels Components:

1. Power supply.

2. Battery charger.

3. Standby batteries.

4. Field-wiring terminal strip.

5. Electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell.

6. Lamp test facility.

7. Single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts.

8. Rectifier.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

2.11 PRESSURE GAGES

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig minimum/ 0 to 300 psig.

E. Label: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system

design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water-service piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from

approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates

ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1485&mf=04&src=wd






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,

and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when

sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire department connections

and check valves. Drain to floor drain or to outside building.

J. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

K. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.

3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.

L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

M. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements in NFPA 13.

N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal

seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit

removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

O. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

P. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices air

compressors.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings

that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for

aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer

lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and

grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

"Brazed Joints" Chapter.

K. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube

and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

L. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings with

tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

M. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,

and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs

indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of


D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.

2. Install dry-pipe valves with trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm

connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line

attachment.

a. Install air compressor and compressed-air-supply piping.

b. Install air-pressure maintenance device with shutoff valves to permit servicing

without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;

pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings

with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range; and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.

c. Install compressed-air-supply piping from building's compressed-air piping

system.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling

panels.

B. Install sprinklers with water supply from heated space.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.



1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Start and run air compressors.

6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any

sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.






DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER

SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with threaded ends, cast-iron threaded fittings, and threaded grooved ends, grooved-

end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified

fittings.

C. Copper-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper tubing instead of

specified copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be brazed.

D. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron

threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

E. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the

following:

1. Schedule 10, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. See drawings for types of sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate in finished

spaces.

2. Upright Sprinklers: rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated

where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.







COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current

power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.






COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.






COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)







SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.



4. Grout.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, with plain

ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING


07/13/2021

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof

floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or

floors.





PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Coordinate sleeve requirements with rated UL assemblies. Refer to Fire Rating Wall Legends

and UL details on plans.

B. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING


07/13/2021

C. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to



D. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.


sleeves.




3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal

system.

E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.




3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants


F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier



requirements for firestopping and fill materials ."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing.

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor

level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if

ring is specified.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING


07/13/2021

5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe

penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.









1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING


07/13/2021



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.




a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system .



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6e>: Steel pipe sleeves or Stack-sleeve fittings for pipes

penetrating floors with membrane water proofing.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves or Stack-sleeve fittings for pipes

penetrating floors with membrane water proofing.


a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6Steel pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.







ESCUTCHEONS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise

indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished, chrome-plated

finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.






ESCUTCHEONS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping

and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece stamped steel with spring clips and polished, chrome-

plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stainless

steel with polished stainless-steel finish.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-

plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate.

2.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.







METERS AND GAGES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

2. Thermowells.

3. Dial-type pressure gages.

4. Gage attachments.

5. Test plugs.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size.

3. Case Form: Straight unless otherwise indicated.

4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C.

6. Window: Glass or plastic.

7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.







PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

8. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNRor CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


2. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; [4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

4. Pressure Connection: Brass, with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type

unless back-outlet type is indicated.

5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

8. Window: Glass or plastic.

9. Ring: Stainless steel.

10. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.







PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type

surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

B. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended

stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Thread Size: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

E. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.







PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Metal case, compact-style, liquid-in-glass type.

2.

3. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be[ one of] the following:

1. [Liquid-filled Open-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case.

2.







PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021


B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be[ one of] the

following:

1. [Liquid-filleddirect-mounted, metal case.

2.


3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.







BALL VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING

220523.12 - Page 1 of 5 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Steel ball valves.

4. Iron ball valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.


operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.






BALL VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.


3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.

4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with

copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.






BALL VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Forged brass.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered

Ends:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145.


c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Bronze or brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

2.4 STEEL BALL VALVES

A. Steel Ball Valves with Full Port, Class 150:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-72.


c. Body Design: Split body.

d. Body Material: Carbon steel, ASTM A216, Type WCB.

e. Ends: Flanged or threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Stainless steel.

h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

i. Port: Full.






BALL VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

2.5 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Iron Ball Valves, Class 125:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-72.


c. Body Design: Split body.

d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron.

e. Ends: Flanged or threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Stainless steel.

h. Ball: Stainless steel.

i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.








3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.






BALL VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP

ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. Provide with threaded or

solder -joint ends.

2. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with

threaded or solder-joint ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Steel and Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead

of flanged ends.

2. Steel ball valves, Class 150 with full port.

3. Iron ball valves, Class 150.

END OF SECTION 220523.12






CHECK VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.

2. Iron swing check valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set check valves in either closed or open position.






handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.






CHECK VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:




4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.


C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components

- Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.






G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.


c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.

f. Disc: Bronze.






CHECK VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.


c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.



















CHECK VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

E. Check Valves: Install check valves for proper direction of flow.

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with metal-

seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP


C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.



1. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end

connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with metal seats, Class 125 , with threaded or flanged end

connections.






CHECK VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021







GATE VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves.

2. Iron gate valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. NRS: Nonrising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. RS: Rising stem.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.






handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.






GATE VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:




4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSP 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.






G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, RS, Class 125:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.


c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.






GATE VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.


c. Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge.

g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.



















GATE VALVES FOR

PLUMBING PIPING


07/13/2021

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP




1. Bronze gate valves, RS, Class 125 with soldered or threaded ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, NRS , Class 125 with flanged ends.








FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY




3. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.


5. Pipe-positioning systems.






AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.










EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021





1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.


B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .


A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from

structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.4 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psigor

ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength

and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium

silicate with 100-psig or ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psigor ASTM C591,

Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel.


2.6 PIPE-POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system composed of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-carbon-

steel shapes.

2.8 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through

fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength











EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or

install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,


G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,

expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional



inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses


L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed









EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

M. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield



piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is




3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields








5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.




B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.




supports.








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021





following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so


3.5 ADJUSTING




3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-

painted areas on miscellaneous metals.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply




equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


not have field-applied finishes.



E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for

general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:



J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.



K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.








EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

5. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

6. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

7. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system






3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


P. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.

Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.







VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 220548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

3. Resilient pipe guides.

4. Elastomeric hangers.

5. Spring hangers.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for

plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including

other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.







PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:

1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

4. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.

5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.

b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

2.2 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a

minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene .

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psigon isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions.

2.3 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene .

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable

to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet

location requirements.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: .







PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-

rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel

contact.

2.5 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.








PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.







IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY




3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the




B. Label Content: Include equipment's unique equipment number,.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where







IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


maintenance data.


A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2


viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.






IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping:

1. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

2. Stencil Material: Aluminum.

3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can

form.

4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.






IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.



surfaces where devices are to be applied.





B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with

painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:






IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green.

b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety white.

b. Letter Color: Black

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged

valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inchesround.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inchesround.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:






IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

a. Cold Water: Natural.

b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: Black.

b. Hot Water: Black.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.







PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

SECTION 220716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment that is not factory insulated:

1. Domestic water, hot-water pumps.

2. Domestic hot water storage tanks.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application.






PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

1.5 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Indoor Equipment Insulation Schedule" article for where

insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of

less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in

accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with

ASTM C553, Type II, and ASTM C1290, Type I.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with

ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. Provide insulation without factory-applied jacket.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C1393.

1. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket.

2. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more.

3. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.






PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

C. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap

seams and joints.

2.3 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Joint Sealants:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: [Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F] [Minus 100 to plus 300

deg F].

4. Color: White or gray.

5. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealant.>

6. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

4. Color: Aluminum.

5. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for aealants for FSK and metal jacket

flashing VOC content.>

6. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>

D. ASJ Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: White.

2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.


http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=301











PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

2.5 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch

wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inchdiameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.






PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of equipment, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation

materials that get wet.

E. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

F. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

G. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

H. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.

I. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal

thickness.

J. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.






PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

K. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in

similar fashion to butt joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation

with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit

area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including

contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end

joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides

of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end

joints and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks

and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins, and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band

material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and

where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing

insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut

with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around

equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two

circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer

periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire

ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the

body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for

securing insulation with tie wire or bands.






PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

INSULATION


07/13/2021

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box

joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt

flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inchdiameter fasteners with

wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a field-adjustable

latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or stainless steel, at least 0.060 inch thick.

3. For below-ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal

between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5 INDOOR EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

B. Domestic hot-water pump insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Domestic hot-water heater storage tank insulation shall be one of the following, of thickness to

provide an R-value of [12.5] <Insert value>:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3. Mineral-fiber pipe and tank.







PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.

2. Domestic hot-water piping.

3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

4. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.

5. Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions.

6. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.

7. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance

thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

1.








identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities








PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed


C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground

Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of

less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in

accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C547.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ.

2. 850 deg F.

3. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.

4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.

2.3 ADHESIVES



B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.

1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.

3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F.

4. Color: Black.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.


3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements.

4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient

services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's

recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with


1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with


B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


3. Color: White or gray.

C. FSK Jacket Flashing Sealants:






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021



3. Color: Aluminum.

D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: White.





complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch

wide with wing seal or closed seal.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.13 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021



free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.



dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation

materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet


L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021



jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of


3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking


O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in

similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions,

and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted

tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour

that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit.

Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,

whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-

box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,

whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced

without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation

cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the

thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label

the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color

of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

that of pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and comply with the requirements for interior and exterior painting.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.


A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by

Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three

locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded

strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:



B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:



2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:



C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing

Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

D. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate

and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:






PLUMBING PIPING

INSULATION


07/13/2021

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:



E. Hot Service Drains:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

F. Hot Service Vents:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.







DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - Page 1 of 11 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Piping joining materials.

3. Transition fittings.

4. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data: Foreach type of product.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water

service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.


A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.







07/13/2021

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Standard: ASSE 1079.

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.







07/13/2021

2. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

3. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

5. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for

drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.







07/13/2021

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

O. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged

booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

Q. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with

requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.







07/13/2021


damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools

and procedure recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion marks on

pipe after assembly.

G. Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with

manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to

measured depth.

H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool

designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating

stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and

thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to

ASME B31.9.

J. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.







07/13/2021

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for copperpiping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

D. Support vertical runs of copperpiping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.







07/13/2021

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges

instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.







07/13/2021

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.







07/13/2021

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are

not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.







07/13/2021

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the

following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type Kwrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type Kwrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type Lwrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered

joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type Lwrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered

joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball, or gate

valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves with

flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.







DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Water pressure-reducing valves.

4. Balancing valves.

5. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

6. Strainers.

7. Outlet boxes.

8. Hose bibbs.

9. Wall hydrants.

10. Drain valves.

11. Water-hammer arresters.

12. Air vents.

13. Trap-seal primer valves.

14. Trap-seal primer systems.

15. Flexible connectors.


A. Product Data:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Balancing Valves

3. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

4. Hose bibbs.

5. Wall hydrants.

6. Water-hammer arresters.

7. Trap-seal primer.









SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14.

B. Comply with NSF 372 for low lead.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers :

1.


3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated or Rough bronze.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers(BFP-1):


2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

3. Pressure Loss: Refer to schedules.

4. Design Flow Rate: Refer to schedules.

5. Body: Bronze, lead free, cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or

that is FDA approved.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through> flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends

on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies <Insert drawing designation if any>:


2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged <Insert type> for NPS 2-1/2

and larger.

6. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

7. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends

on inlet and outlet.

C. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:



3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.

4. Body: Stainless steel.


D. Carbonated-Beverage-Dispenser, Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing

designation if any>:



3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.

4. Body: Stainless steel.


E. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:


2. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water back pressure.

3. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

4. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Capacity: At least 3-gpm flow.

F. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-

procedure instructions.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

2.5 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:


2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.

3. Design Inlet Pressure: 110 psig.

4. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 70 psig.


AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

2.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Port: Standard or full port.


7. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

8. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

9. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.7 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:



3. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

6. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

7. Tempered-Water Setting: 110 deg F.

8. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: Refer to drawings gpm.

9. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:

1.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Type: Exposed-mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature-control handle.


9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: Refer to drawings gpm.

10. Pressure Drop at Design Flow Rate: Refer to drawings psig.

11. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

12. Piping Finish: Copper.

C. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.


3. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

4. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

5. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

6. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.


2.8 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers <Insert drawing designation if any>:



AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.9 OUTLET BOXES

A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:

1. Mounting: Recessed.

2. Material and Finish: Plastic box and faceplate.

3. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller

copper tube outlet.

4. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

2.10 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs (H.B.):

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.


7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.

8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

9. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

10. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

11. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

12. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

13. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.11 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants (W.H.):

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.


3. Operation: Loose key.

4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 .

6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

8. Box and Cover Finish: Chrome plated.

9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

11. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.12 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021


6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: ASTM B62 bronze.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint.

6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.13 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:

1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

2. Type: Copper tube with piston.

3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.14 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.15 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

3. Body: Bronze.

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:

1. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.

2. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.

3. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Backflow Preventers: Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment

and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.

Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Water Regulators: Install with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and

outlet.

C. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

D. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on

inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

E. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each [water pressure-reducing

valve][and]pump.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

F. Outlet Boxes: Install boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch

fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with

requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking.

G. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

H. Air Vents: Install vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto

floor drain.

I. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain

trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve

for proper flow.

J. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched

down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet

fitting.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service

and maintenance.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on

or near each of the following:

1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.

2. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having

jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.







INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER

PUMPS


07/13/2021

SECTION 221123.21 - INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities, and

certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.







PUMPS


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components

- Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-

impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted

horizontal.

B. Capacities and Characteristics for CP-1 as scheduled on drawings.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing:

a. Built to permit servicing of pump internals without disturbing the casing or the

suction and discharge piping.

b. Gauge port tappings at suction and discharge nozzles.

2. Impeller: Bronze or brass, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to

shaft.

3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. Include

water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

4. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

5. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and

rubber bellows and gasket.

6. Bearings: permanently lubricated ball type.

7. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig.

8. Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; resiliently or rigidly mounted to

pump casing.







PUMPS


07/13/2021

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements

for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 50 to 125 deg F.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1X.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Transformer: Provide if required.

6. Power Requirement: 120 V ac.

7. Settings: Refer to drawings.

B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting.

3. Operation of Pump: On or off.

4. Transformer: Provide if required.

5. Power Requirement: 24 V ac.

6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Refer to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.







PUMPS


07/13/2021

B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Pump Mounting:

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump

weight.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified. Fabricate brackets or

supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

F. Install timers.

G. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.

b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping.

Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."







PUMPS


07/13/2021

2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping."

3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

4. Install pressure gauge at suction of each pump and pressure gauge at discharge of each

pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install pressure-

gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with

requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping."

3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.

C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and

time-delay relay.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of

pumps.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest


2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

C. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.








PUMPS


07/13/2021

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set thermostats, and timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

10. Adjust timer settings.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.







SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

3. PVC pipe and fittings.

4. Specialty pipe fittings.






A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary

waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written

permission.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Single-Stack Aerator Fittings: ASME B16.45, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage

fittings.

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

2. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.

2. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping

and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

E. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

F. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.

2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each

end.

c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric Unions:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F .

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

4. Dielectric Nipples:

a. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

2) Electroplated steel nipple.

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4) End Connections: Male threaded.

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to

back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place

hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

N. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

P. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

Q. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste

Piping Specialties."

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve

Seals for Plumbing Piping."






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813,

water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in

cross pattern.

F. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.

3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." and

Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for cast-ironand soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod



C. Install hangers for PVC piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters,

to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities

having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

E. Support vertical runs of cast ironand soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced

codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

F. Support vertical runs of PVC piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally

enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required

by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for







SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete

with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders

on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not

less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level

must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled

with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.

Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021

c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection.

d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.


A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.

3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.

3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.






SANITARY WASTE AND

VENT PIPING


07/13/2021







SANITARY WASTE PIPING

SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.

B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts (C.O.):

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure: Countersunk plug.

5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts (F.C.O.):

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing, cleanout.

2. Size: Same as connected branch.

3. Type: Adjustable housing.

4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

5. Clamping Device: Required.

6. Outlet Connection: Inside calk Spigot or Threaded.

7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads, setscrews or other device.

9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

12. Riser: ASTM A74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

13.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts (W.C.O.):

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

3. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee

as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure Plug:

a. Brass.

b. Countersunk or raised head.

c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw.

d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

5. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

6. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings :

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

B. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

C. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe

extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

D. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

E. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-

coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of

flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

F. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

E. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply

with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

G. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

H. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

I. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

J. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

M. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required.

C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."







SPECIALTIES


07/13/2021

G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.


A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.





equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.







SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13 - Page 1 of 5 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.

2. Floor sinks.

3. Trench drains.

4. Shower drains.

5. Hub drains.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.







07/13/2021

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains (FL.D.):


2. Pattern: Floor drain.

3. Body Material: Cast iron.

4. Seepage Flange: Required.

5. Anchor Flange: Required.


7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Backwater Valve: Not required.

9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.

10. Sediment Bucket: Removable.

11. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

13. Top Shape: Round.


15. Funnel: Not required.

16. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

17. Trap Material: Cast iron.

18. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

19. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection or trap-seal primer valve drain

connection.

B. Shower Drains

1. Pattern: Shower Drain

2. Body Material: Dura-coated cast iron body

3. Clamping Device: Required with weep holes.

4. Outlet: Bottom.

5. Strainer: Adjustable head assembly with Stainless Steel Strainer

6. Top Shape: Round



C. Cast Iron Hub Drains


2. Pattern: Funnel floor drain.


4. Collar: Adjustable








07/13/2021

6. Outlet: Bottom.

7. Backwater Valve: Not required.

8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

10. Top Shape: Round.

11. Funnel: Required, 4” Diameter.

12. Inlet Fitting: Not required.

13. Trap Material: Not required.

14. Trap Pattern: Not required

2.3 FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Sinks:



3. Anchor Flange: Required, with seepage holes.


5. Outlet: Bottom, connection.

6. Coating on Interior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel.

7. Sediment Bucket: Removable.

8. Top Grate Material: Cast iron, hinged.

9. Top of Body and Grate Finish: Nickel bronze.

10. Top Shape: Square.

11. Dimensions of Top Grate: Slotted, 1/2 grate.

12. Top Loading Classification: Medium duty.

13. Funnel: Not required.

14. Provide floor sinks with 1/2” trap seal primer connection where indicated.

2.4 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Material: Stainless steel.

3. Flange: Anchor.


5. Outlet: Bottom.

6. Grate Material: Stainless steel.

7. Grate Finish: Not required.

8. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: Prefabricated, stainless steel, 6-inch wide x various

lengths.









07/13/2021


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished

floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


B. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained.

1. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with ASME A112.3.1 for installation of stainless-steel channel drainage systems.

1. Install on support devices, so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.







07/13/2021

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors" for grease

interceptors.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.







SANITARY WASTE

INTERCEPTORS


07/13/2021

SECTION 221323 - SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Grease interceptors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

B. PP: Polypropylene plastic.


A. Product Data: For each type of interceptor. Include materials of fabrication, dimensions, rated

capacities, retention capacities, operating characteristics, size and location of each pipe

connection, furnished specialties, and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Interceptors, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Piping connections. Include size, location, and elevation of each.

2. Interface with underground structures and utility services.


A. Interruption of Existing Sewer Services: Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary sewer services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sewer services without Owner's written permission.






SANITARY WASTE

INTERCEPTORS


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GREASE INTERCEPTORS

A. Cast-Iron or Steel Grease Interceptors(GGI):


2. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI-G101, for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and

greases from food-preparation or -processing wastewater.

3. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.

4. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.

5. Interior Lining: Not required.

6. Exterior Coating:Not required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Set interceptors level and plumb.

B. Set metal interceptors level and plumb.

C. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to

authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout

on outlet.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Make piping connections between interceptors and piping systems.







SANITARY WASTE

INTERCEPTORS


07/13/2021

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Grease interceptors.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect sanitary waste interceptors from damage during construction period.

B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by sanitary waste interceptor installation.







ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.







B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include emergency,


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-

water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Five years.

b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label

commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Acceptable manufacturers are Rinnai or Navin

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single

manufacturer.


4. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel vertical arrangement.






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping

connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for

steel and stainless steel flanges, and in accordance with ASME B16.24 for

copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

5. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection.

c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish or high-impact composite material.

e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in

multiples of three.

f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving

capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than

working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with

sensing element that extends into storage tank.

6. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water expansion tanks from single source from

single manufacturer.

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-

installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating

pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and

outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of

domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement in accordance with

ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include

relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-

pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends

into storage tank.

F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

G. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code

construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.







ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric,

domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases

specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if

installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings,

original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on

domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified

in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water heater relief-

valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch,

and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end

drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing

Piping."






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

I. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The

wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25

percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections:




proper operation.






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-

WATER HEATERS


07/13/2021


equipment.

F. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, electric,

domestic-water heaters. Training shall be a minimum of one hour.







COMMERCIAL WATER

CLOSETS


07/13/2021

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves and tanks.

3. Toilet seats.

4. Supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.

B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet from other drain line connections or fixture

and where less than 1.5 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and



A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.






COMMERCIAL WATER

CLOSETS


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets (P-1 & P-1A): Wall mounted, top spud, accessible.

1. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Standard or accessible as required.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

2. Flushometer Valve: (P-1 & P-1A).

3. Toilet Seat: (P-1 & P-1A).

4. Support: Water closet carrier.

5. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard or Handicapped/elderly according to

ICC/ANSI A117.1.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves (P-1 & P-1A):

1.



4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats (P-1 & P-1A):






COMMERCIAL WATER

CLOSETS


07/13/2021

1. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

2. Material: Plastic.

3. Type: Commercial (Standard).

4. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

5. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check.

6. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

7. Seat Cover: Not required.

8. Color: White.

2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Water Closet Carrier:


2. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and

arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching

fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide

pipe space.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:






COMMERCIAL WATER

CLOSETS


07/13/2021

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water

closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto

waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.

4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet.

4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."






COMMERCIAL WATER

CLOSETS


07/13/2021

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







COMMERCIAL URINALS 224213.16 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Supports.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and



A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals (P_2 & P-2A): Wall hung, back outlet, siphon jet, accessible.

1. Fixture:







07/13/2021

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet with extended shields.

d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.

e. Water Consumption: Water saving.

f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4; top.

g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2; back.

h. Color: White.

2. Flushometer Valve: (P-2 & P-2A).

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.

b. Size: NPS 2.

4. Support: Type I Urinal Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and

fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture..

5. Urinal Mounting Height: Standard and Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves (P-2 & P-2A):



3. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

4. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

5. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

6. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

7. Style: Exposed.

8. Consumption: 0.5 gal. per flush.

9. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4.

10. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.3 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Urinal Carrier:








07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.

3. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

4. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.

4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."







07/13/2021

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required

to match urinals.



and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.



A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216.13 - Page 1 of 6 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall hung lavatory system.

2. Counter mounted lavatories.

3. Faucets.

4. Supply fittings.

5. Waste fittings.

6. Supports.







A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.







07/13/2021




1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST GFRC, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORY SYSTEM WITH INTEGRAL BASIN(S)

A. Lavatory System (P-3): Rectangular countertop deck with Integral Ramp Basin(s), precast

GFRC, wall mounted.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trueform

Concrete; R-2013 or a comparable product by one of the following:

2. Basin(s) and Countertop:

a. Standard: CSA B45.8/IAPMO Z403 – ICC A117.1.

b. Type: Straight front and side aprons with straight back.

c. Number of stations: Three.

d. Overall Countertop size: 30 (per station) by 90 by 18 inches overall

e. Basin I.D.: 20 by 13 by 5 inches.

f. Faucet-Hole Punching (per Station): Three holes, 2-inch centers.

g. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

h. Drain type: Slot drain

i. Color: Charcoal.

j. Mounting: Trueform Concrete wall brackets suitable for installation in concrete

substrate, or Rakks EH, or equal alternative manufacturer – Black Powder Coated

Finish.

3. Faucet: P-3.

4. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

b. Connection: 1-1/4 inch fine thread tailpiece.

c. Finish: Oil-rubbed bronze.







07/13/2021

5. Support: Trueform Concrete FSB-L. suitable for installation in concrete substrate, or

equal alternative manufacturer

6. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly in accordance with ICC A117.1.

2.2 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory (P-3A): Oval, self-rimming, vitreous china, counter mounted.

1. Fixture:


b. Type: Self-rimming for above-counter mounting.

c. Nominal Size: Oval, 20 by 17 inches.

d. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.

e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

f. Color: White.

g. Mounting Material: Sealant.

2. Faucet: (P-3).

2.3 SOLID-BRASS, AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable

water.

B. Lavatory Faucets (P-3): Automatic-type, battery-powered, electronic-sensor-operated, mixing,

solid-brass valve.

1. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.


NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

4. Body Type: Single hole.

5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

6. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

8. Mounting Type: Back/wall, concealed.

9. Spout: Rigid type.

10. Spout Outlet: Aerator.

11. Drain: Not part of faucet.







07/13/2021

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with

potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8.

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper-pipe and brass straight or offset tailpieces, Chrome-plated,

soft-copper flexible tube, ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel,

flexible hose riser.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with

0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-thick

stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.







07/13/2021

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, in accordance with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.







07/13/2021



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







COMMERCIAL SINKS 224216.16 - Page 1 of 8 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Utility sinks.

2. Handwash sinks.

3. Scullery sinks.Sink faucets.

4. Supports.

5. Supply fittings.

6. Waste fittings.






A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.





installed.


installed.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTILITY SINKS

A. Utility Sinks (P-8): Stainless steel, floor mounted.

1. Fixture:


b. Type: One piece seamless floor sink.

c. Number of Compartments: One.

d. Overall Dimensions: 22 x 25 x 16 inches.

e. Metal Thickness: 0.050 inch.

f. Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 16 x 19 x 8 inches.

2) Drain: NPS 2IPS cast brass.

3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.

2. Faucet(s): P-8.

a. Number Required: One.

b. Mounting: On wall.

3. Supply Fittings:


b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key.

2) Risers: NPS 1/2ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel

flexible hose.

4. Waste Fittings:


b. Trap(s):

1) Size: NPS 2.

2) Material: Cast Brass.

B. Utility Sinks (P-4): freestanding.

1. Fixture:







07/13/2021


b. Type: With backsplash.

c. Number of Compartments: One.

d. Overall Dimensions: 24” x 24” x 32”.

e. Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 24” x 24” x 14”.

2) Drain: Grid with NPS 2 tailpiece and twist drain.

3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.

2. Supports: Rigid plastic legs, floor mounted.

3. Faucet(s): (P-4).

a. Number Required: One.

b. Mounting: Deck mounted.

4. Supply Fittings:


b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key.

2) Risers: NPS 1/2ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel

flexible hose.

5. Waste Fittings:


b. Trap(s):

1) Size: NPS 2.

2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground-joint swivel

elbow with 0.032-inch- thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or

steel wall flange.

2.2 HANDWASH SINKS

A. Handwash Sinks (P-5): Stainless steel, wall mounted with backsplash, end splashes and built-in

C-fold towel dispenser.

1. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF/ANSI 2.







07/13/2021

b. Type: Basin with radius corners, back for faucet, and support brackets.

c. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 by 5 inches.

2. Faucet: (P-5) splash-mounted gooseneck faucet.

3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.

5. Support: Type II sink carrier.

6. Lavatory Mounting Height: Standard.

B. Handwash Sinks (P-6): Stainless steel, drop-in counter-mounted with backsplash, end splashes,

deck mounted soap dispenser, and built-in C-fold towel dispenser.

1. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF/ANSI 2.

b. Nominal Size: 12 by 9 by 6 inches

2. Faucet: (P-6) deck-mounted.



5. Support: Counter-mounted.

6. Mounting Height: Standard.

2.3 SCULLERY SINKS

A. Scullery Sinks (P-7): Stainless steel, three compartment, freestanding.

1.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: National Sanitation foundation Standard Number 2.

b. Type: Coved sink bowls with radiused construction.

c. Material: Stainless steel.

d. Nominal Bowl Size: Approximately 28 by 20 inches.

e. Overall Size: 35 by 114 inches

f. Drainboards: Two, integrally welded.

3. Faucet: (P-7).

a. Location: Two sets of faucet holes on 8 inch centers punched in backspash.









07/13/2021

2.4 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with

potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets (P-5 & P-6):

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.


and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

4. Body Type: Centerset.




8. Handle(s): Lever.

9. Mounting Type: P-6 Deck mounted, exposed and P-5 splahmount, exposed.

10. Spout Type: Rigid gooseneck.

11. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.


C. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets (P-7):




4. Body Type: Centerset.





9. Mounting Type: P-7 splahmount, exposed.

10. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck.

11. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.


D. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets (P-8):








07/13/2021



4. Body Type: 8” Centerset.





9. Mounting Type: P-7 splahmount, exposed.

10. Spout Type: 8” vacuum breaker spout with 3/4” threaded outlet.

11. Vacuum Breaker: Required for 3/4” hose connection.

12. Spout Outlet: Open.

2.5 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with

potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8.

2. ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.

2.6 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.







07/13/2021

3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick

stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.7 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,


B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing

Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.







07/13/2021

E. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.



F. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


G. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.



A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 224223 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Individual shower receptors.

2. Shower faucets.

3. Grout.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower faucets to include in maintenance manuals.





installed.


installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDIVIDUAL SHOWERS

A. Individual FRP Showers (P-9):







07/13/2021

1. General: FRP, accessible, shower enclosure with faucet and receptor and appurtenances.

2. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2.

3. Type: Sectional unit without top.

4. Style: Handicapped/wheelchair.

5. Faucet: (P-9).

6. Nominal Size and Shape: 36 by 36 inches square .

7. Color: White.

8. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F462.

9. Outlet: Drain with NPS 2 outlet.

10. Shower Rod and Curtain: Required.

11. Grab Bar: ASTM F446, mounted on support area back wall.

2.2 SHOWER FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects," for shower materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Shower Faucets (P-9):

1. Description: Single-handle, pressure-balance mixing valve with hot- and cold-water

indicators; check stops; and shower head.

2. Faucet:

a. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.

b. Body Material: Solid brass.

c. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

d. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: Not required.

e. EPA WaterSense: Required.

f. Mounting: Exposed.

g. Operation: Single-handle, push-pull or twist or rotate control.

h. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.

i. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and

cold-water supply connections.

3. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2.

4. Shower Head:


b. Type: Ball joint with arm and flange.

c. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.

d. Spray Pattern: Adjustable.

e. Integral Volume Control: Not required.

f. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: Not required.

g. Temperature Indicator: Not required.







07/13/2021

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,


B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before shower installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where showers will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with shower. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing

Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

E. Set shower receptors and shower basins in leveling bed of cement grout.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.


escutcheons requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."







07/13/2021

G. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316

"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers,

fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.


and profiles, and finishes.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 25 percent of quantity installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 4 of each.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A. Pressure Water Coolers: Wall mounted, wheelchair accessible, vandal resistant.

1. Standards:

a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant

unless otherwise indicated.

c. Comply with ICC A117.1.

2. Cabinet: Bi-level with two attached cabinets and with a bi-level skirt kit, all stainless

steel.

3. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.

4. Control: Push button or Push bar.

5. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.

6. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.

7. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap.

8. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead

reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.

9. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled

condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage

tank, and adjustable thermostat.

a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

10. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Cooled Water: 8 gph.

b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F.

c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F.

d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.

e. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: 120-V ac.

2) Phase: Single.

3) Hertz: 60.

11. Support: Type I Water Cooler Carrier or Type II Water Cooler Carrier.

12. Water Cooler Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.







07/13/2021

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:


B. Type II Water Cooler Carrier:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

C. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water

coolers, and in-wall bottle filling stations to mounting frames.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they

can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for

Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with








07/13/2021

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Install valve upstream from

filter for water cooler. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball

Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.







COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current

power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.






COMMON MOTOR


EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

A. Service Factor: 1.15.

C. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

D. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

E. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

F. Insulation: Class F .

G. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers:

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.






COMMON MOTOR


EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)







SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING


07/13/2021

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.






1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anti-corrosion coated

or zinc coated, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

D. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE



07/13/2021

E. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

G. Vertical: Terminate 2 inches above floor. Provide concrete curb around sleeve or masonry

support below pipe clamp to support pipe clamp.

H. Horizontal: Size to accommodate fire-stopping around pipe, length to match wall thickness.


A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size.

4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B 633

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description:

1. Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly, made for imbedding in concrete

slab or wall.

2. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.


A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE



07/13/2021

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to



C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.


sleeves.




3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without

sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.




3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use sealants


E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier



requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE



07/13/2021

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 3 inches above finished floor

level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if

ring is specified.

5. Using waterproof silicone sealant, seal space between top hub of stack-sleeve fitting and

pipe.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated, Horizontal Assembly, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain

indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and

smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413

"Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal-system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings as new walls and slabs are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.








SLEEVES AND SLEEVE



07/13/2021






1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Steel pipe sleeves .

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves .

2. Exterior Concrete Walls Below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system .



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system .




a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Sleeve-seal fittings .



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Sleeve-seal fittings .



4. Concrete Slabs Above Grade:


b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves .



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves .








FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Fiberglass pipe hangers.


5. Fiberglass strut systems.

6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.




1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors.

3. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation

devices.

4. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.





AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."







FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.







1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.



A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.


A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.







FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland

cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel.



A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.6 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT STANDS

A. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and

clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground or roof supported outdoor equipment components, without

roof membrane penetration, in a pre-fabricated system that can be modularly-assembled on site.

B. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene.

C. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel.

D. Wind/Sliding Load Resistance: Up to 100 mph minimum.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications

and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as

rods.

F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.









FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength





A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-58. Install

hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

D. Metal Fiberglass Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping,

and support together on field-assembled strut systems.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Pipe Stand Installation:







FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and

mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for

curbs.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,


I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional



inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses


N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed


O. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield



piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is


a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields


a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-








FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021





d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.




B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.




supports.





following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so


3.5 ADJUSTING









FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021


3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" Section 099123

"Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous

metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply




equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.


not have field-applied finish.



E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:









FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of


7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,


8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.







FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.



J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.







FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


07/13/2021

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system






3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


N. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


O. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.







VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:/

1. Housed-spring isolators.

2. Housed-restrained-spring isolators.

3. Spring hangers.

4. Concrete inserts.

5. Vibration isolation equipment bases.


1. Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and

Equipment" for devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems.

2. Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"

for devices for plumbing equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Designated Seismic System: An HVAC component that requires design in accordance with

ASCE/SEI 7, Ch. 13, and for which the Component Importance Factor is greater than 1.0.

B. IBC: International Building Code.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (for the State of California

owned and regulated medical facilities).









CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Include load rating for each wind-force-restraint fitting and assembly.

3. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component.

4. Annotate types and sizes of seismic restraints and accessories, complete with listing

markings or report numbers and load rating in tension and compression as evaluated by

UL product listing .

5. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

6. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-spring isolators and restrained-air-spring isolators to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Seismic-Restraint Device Load Ratings: Devices to be tested and rated in accordance with

applicable code requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Devices to be listed by a

nationally recognized third party that requires periodic follow-up inspections and has a listing

directory available to the public. Provide third-party listing by one or more of the following: .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Consequential Damage: Provide additional seismic restraints for suspended HVAC components

or anchorage of floor-, roof-, or wall-mounted HVAC components as indicated in so that failure

of a non-essential or essential HVAC component will not cause failure of any other essential

architectural, mechanical, or electrical building component.

B. Fire/Smoke Resistance: Seismic-restraint devices that are not constructed of ferrous metals must

have a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when

tested by an NRTL in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723, and be so labeled.

C. Component Supports:

1. Load ratings, features, and applications of all reinforcement components must be based

on testing standards of a nationally recognized testing agency.







CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

2. All component support attachments must comply with force and displacement resistance

requirements of .

2.2 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing.


at rated load.





5. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad

attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with threaded mounting holes and internal leveling device.

2.3 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part

Telescoping Housing: .

1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with

adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad

attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level

equipment.


at rated load.





2.4 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression: .







CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.


at rated load.





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

2.5 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Provide preset concrete inserts that are seismically prequalified in accordance with ICC-

ES AC466 testing.

B. Comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58.

2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Steel Rails: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M. Rails

shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

B. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.


clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases

or rails.


2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M. Bases








CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021



C. Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated or field-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and

rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.


clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases

or rails.


2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M. Bases




4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors

in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported

equipment manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and

where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within

specified loading limits.







CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Provide vibration-control devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment

Schedules or Vibration-Control Devices Schedules, where indicated on Drawings, or where

Specifications indicate they are to be installed on specific equipment and systems.

B. Provide seismic-restraint devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment

Schedules or Seismic-Restraint Devices Schedules, where indicated on Drawings, where

Specifications indicate they are to be installed on specific equipment and systems, and where

required by applicable codes.

C. Coordinate location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment

and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified

in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,

equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

F. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate

snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by that provides required

submittals for component.

G. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

H. Install seismic-restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or

building structure.

I. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by that provides required submittals

for component.

J. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.







CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

K. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

L. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

M. Mechanical Anchor Bolts:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered

during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications

conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge-Type Anchor Bolts: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.

Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural

element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive-Type Anchor Bolts: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust

prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of

the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of

air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Provide flexible connections in piping systems where they cross structural seismic joints and

other point where differential movement may occur. Provide adequate flexibility to

accommodate differential movement as determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. Comply

with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping

Specialties" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Coordinate location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment

and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified

in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate dimensions of steel equipment rails and bases, concrete inertia bases, and restrained

isolation roof-curb rails with requirements of isolated equipment specified in this and other







CONTROLS FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

Sections. Where dimensions of these bases are indicated on Drawings, dimensions may require

adjustment to accommodate actual isolated equipment.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.







IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC



07/13/2021

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Stencils.

6. Valve tags.

7. Warning tags.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch stainless steel, 0.025-inch aluminum, 0.032-

inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or

stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black .

3. Background Color: White .


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the












07/13/2021

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where



maintenance data.


A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2



lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 DUCT LABELS

Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having

predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

A. Letter Color: Black.

B. Background Color: Yellow.









07/13/2021

C. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

D. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2



lettering.

F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel or self-tapping screws.

G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping:



3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel in colors complying with recommendations in

ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

4. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

B. Stencils for Ducts:

1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for viewing distances up to 15 feet

and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.


3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

4. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.









07/13/2021

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire .

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.



surfaces where devices are to be applied.





A. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow For hot-air supply ducts.

3. Green For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be

provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option.









07/13/2021

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling

system.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.







TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

b. Condensing units.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.

4. Duct leakage tests.

5. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Philip A.Bolen

Memorial Park Facilities 42405 Claudia Drive Leesburg VA 20175 after approval of the

TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Provide a

minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Air-Balance Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE 62.1,

Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

2. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Qualification Data: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 60 <60> days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system

readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Sample report forms.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=347#http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=347







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

3. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB TAB Field Supervisor:

Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB TAB Technician:

Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air

Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.








BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to

verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum

walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with

indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting,

or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness

for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping

Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to any

outlets, to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from commissioning authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or

lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-

handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-

handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove

proper operation.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

3.8 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.9 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:

open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and

variations from indicated conditions.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and

determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment

manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5

percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or

decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent

2. Air Outlets and Inlets:Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent .

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent]

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified

above.

3.12 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures

in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in

systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building

floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

j. Return airflow in cfm.

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft..

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in

central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Coil identification.

d. Capacity in Btu/h.

e. Number of stages.

f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.

g. Rated amperage.

h. Airflow rate in cfm.

i. Face area in sq. ft..

j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.


a. Heat output in Btu/h.

b. Airflow rate in cfm.

c. Air velocity in fpm.

d. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

f. Voltage at each connection.

g. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft..

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final airflow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Owner’s representative.

B. Owner’s representativeshall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to

be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business

day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements

checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete

and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final

report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and

request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Ownermay contact AABC Headquarters regarding

the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.







BALANCING FOR HVAC


07/13/2021

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.







DUCT INSULATION 230713 - Page 1 of 14 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

3. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

4. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.

5. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).






identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities









07/13/2021

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed





1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.







07/13/2021

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK

jacket . Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

F. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified

in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,

Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal

density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h

x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.

2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested

and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.3 ADHESIVES



B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Verify adhesive complies with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Verify adhesive has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated in accordance with

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).












07/13/2021


Chambers."

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. VOC Content: 300g/L or less.

2. Low-Emitting Materials: Verify mastic coatings comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the

Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources

Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C 755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for

insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .

3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements with supplier

listing on DOD QPD - Qualified Products Database.

4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C 755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for

insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F .

3. Color: White

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with


1. Verify adhesives have a VOC content of 50g/L or less.




Chambers."

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F .

5. Color: White.











07/13/2021

2.6 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



4. Color: Aluminum.

5. Verify sealant has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

6. Verify sealant complies with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



4. Color: White.

5. Verify sealant has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

6. Verify sealant complies with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."





complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.











07/13/2021

2.9 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.





2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304orType 316; 0.015 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:







07/13/2021

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.

b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to

ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.



free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.







07/13/2021

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.



dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet


K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of


3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.







07/13/2021

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking


N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves

to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."







07/13/2021

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper

sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct

insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.







07/13/2021

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks

and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.







07/13/2021

3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and

supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified

in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

3. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

4. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.

5. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.

6. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.


5. Vibration-control devices.







07/13/2021

6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket:1-1/2 inches thick and0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. Ft nominal density.

D. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


E. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall bethe following:


F. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


G. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of

building exterior shall be one of the following:


H. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated

blanket ; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.

I. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


J. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


K. Concealed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:







07/13/2021


3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.







COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - Page 1 of 10 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Cx process requirements for the following HVAC systems, assemblies, and

equipment:

1. Cooling generation systems.

2. Central-station air-handling systems.

3. Air distribution systems.

4. Heating and cooling terminal and unitary equipment.

5. HVAC controls.

6. TAB verification.


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process

requirements and CxA responsibilities.

2. For construction checklists, comply with requirements in various Division 23 Sections

specifying HVAC systems, system components, equipment, and products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

C. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning

Requirements."

D. DDC: Direct digital controls.

E. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.







07/13/2021

F. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms

are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems,

equipment, and components.

G. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Qualification Data: For HVAC Testing Technician.

B. Construction Checklists: Draft construction checklists will be created by CxA for Contractor

review.

C. Construction Checklists: Material, installation, and performance test checklists for systems,

assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components to be part of the Cx process and according

to requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

1. Instrumentation and control for HVAC, including the following:

a. Control systems equipment.

b. Control valves.

c. Control dampers.

d. Flow instruments.

e. Level instruments.

f. Leak-detection instruments.

g. Moisture instruments.

h. Motion instruments.

i. Position instruments.

j. Pressure instruments.

k. Speed instruments.

l. Temperature instruments.

m. Vibration instruments.

n. Sequence of operations.

2. Refrigerant piping, including the following:

a. Refrigerant piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Refrigerant charge.

c. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

d. Meters and gages.

e. General-duty and specialty valves.

f. Hangers and supports.

g. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.

3. Air distribution systems, including the following:

a. Supply, return, and exhaust systems.

b. Metal ducts, liners, and fittings.

c. Nonmetal ducts and fittings.







07/13/2021

d. Hangers and supports.

e. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.

f. Flexible ducts and fittings.

g. Air-duct accessories, including volume dampers, fire and smoke dampers, turning

vanes, sound attenuators, and flexible connectors.

h. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.

4. Air-handling equipment, including the following:

a. Fans and motors.

b. Indoor air-handling units with and without coils, dampers, and filters.

c. Outdoor air-handling units with and without coils, dampers, and filters.

d. Motors.

e. Hangers and supports.

f. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.

5. Air-filtration equipment, including mounting and support and for the following:

a. Particulate air filters.

b. Gas-phase air filters.

c. Electronic air cleaners.

6. Mechanical insulation, including the following:

a. Duct and plenum insulation.

b. Fire-suppression, plumbing, and HVAC equipment insulation.

c. Plumbing and HVAC piping insulation.

D. Test equipment and instrumentation list, identifying the following:

1. Equipment/instrument identification number.

2. Planned Cx application or use.

3. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

4. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and

instrumentation.

5. Equipment manufacturers' proprietary instrumentation and tools. For each instrument or

tool, identify the following:

a. Instrument or tool identification number.

b. Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is

required.

c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

instrument or tool, where appropriate.


A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist

verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and Cx test

demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:







07/13/2021

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC, electrical

concepts, and building operations.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems

manufactured by approved manufacturer.

3. International Society of Automation (ISA)-Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST)

Level I.

B. HVAC Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC construction

checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and

Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level. Vocational school four-year-program graduate or

an Associate's degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree

may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC

industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC systems, electrical concepts,

building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure

performance of HVAC equipment, assemblies, and systems.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems

manufactured by approved manufacturer.

C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:

1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags

permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on

Project.

4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed

equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or

prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise

work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, shall comply

with the following:

a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and


c. HVAC proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of Owner at the

time of Substantial Completion.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Prepare detailed construction checklists for following HVAC systems, assemblies, subsystems,

equipment, and components:

1. Cooling generation systems, including the following:

a. Direct-expansion refrigeration systems.

2. Central-station air-handling systems.

3. Air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems, including the following:

a. Supply, return, outdoor-air, and exhaust-air distribution systems.

4. Heating and cooling terminal and unitary equipment, including the following:

a. Unit heaters.

b. Electric heating.

c. Unitary heating and cooling equipment..

5. Controls and instrumentation.

6. TAB verification.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST REVIEW

A. Review and provide written comments on draft construction checklists. CxA will create

required draft construction checklists and provide them to Contractor.

B. Return draft construction checklist review comments within 10 days of receipt.

C. When review comments have been resolved, the CxA will provide final construction checklists,

marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

D. Use only construction checklists, marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

3.3 Cx TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and

started and that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved

submittals.

B. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated,

that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that

pretest set points have been recorded.







07/13/2021

C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted,

discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved

test procedures (for example, normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position,

unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

3.4 Cx TEST CONDITIONS

A. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load

when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions,

calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated

conditions as directed by CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of

simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Cx test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is

impractical.

3. Cx test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when

design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

B. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC system,

document the deficiency and report it to Architect. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule

tests.

C. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and

documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.5 Cx TESTS COMMON TO HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and

components, including operational and control functions, to verify compliance with acceptance

criteria.

B. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks,

control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to

acceptance criteria.

C. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of, CxA.

D. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation

checks, startup, and performance tests requirements specified in Division 23 Sections specifying

HVAC systems and equipment.







07/13/2021

E. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to perform and document the

following:

1. Construction checklist verification tests.

2. Construction checklist verification test demonstrations.

3. Cx tests.

4. Cx test demonstrations.

F. Vibration Isolation in HVAC Systems:

1. Prerequisites: Acceptance of results of construction checklists for vibration control

devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping

and Equipment."

2. Components to Be Tested:

a. Vibration isolation and seismic control devices in HVAC systems.

b. Structural systems.

3. Test Purpose: Evaluate effectiveness of vibration isolationcontrol devices.

4. Test Conditions: Measure vibration of the facility structure at three locations designated

by Owner's witness while the isolated equipment operates.

5. Test Conditions: Measure vibration of the facility structure at three locations designated

by Owner's witness at the following operating conditions:

a. Maximum speed.

b. Minimum speed.

c. Critical speed.

6. Acceptance Criteria: Structure-borne vibration not to exceed specified performance.

G. Heat Tracing in HVAC Systems:

1. Prerequisites: Acceptance of results of construction checklists for heat tracing specified

in HVAC systems. Comply with requirements listed in Section 230533 "Heat Tracing for

HVAC Piping."

2. Equipment and Systems to Be Tested:

a. Self-regulating, parallel-resistance heating cables.

b. Heater trace circuit controller.

3. Test Purpose:

a. Evaluate response to ambient temperature below freeze-protection set point.

b. Evaluate heating cable fault alarm.

4. Test Conditions:

a. Subject temperature sensor to temperature approximately 3 deg F above freeze-

protection set point (initial set point 41 deg F). Monitor sensed temperature with a

calibration-grade thermometer. Gradually change set point or sensed temperature

until freeze-protection circuit is energized.

b. Subject temperature sensor to temperature approximately 3 deg F below freeze-

protection set point (initial set point 41 deg F). Monitor sensed temperature with a







07/13/2021

calibration-grade thermometer. Gradually change set point or sensed temperature

until freeze-protection circuit is de-energized.

c. Simulate an electrical fault on the heating cable.

5. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Freeze-protection circuit is energized at set-point temperature minus 2 deg F.

b. Freeze-protection circuit is de-energized at set-point temperature plus 2 deg F.

c. Heater trace circuit controller initiates an alarm of cable fault. Alarm is correctly

reported at the fire-alarm control panel.

3.6 TAB VERIFICATION

A. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies,

as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

B. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes

strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in

Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

C. Scope: HVAC air systems and hydronic piping systems.

D. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization differentials

between the various areas of Project.

E. Conditions of the Test:

1. Cx Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in


2. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.

3. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.

4. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems operating in

economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.

F. Acceptance Criteria:

1. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in


2. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in

the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.

2. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow

between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be

maintained.







07/13/2021

3.7 AIR-HANDLING SYSTEM Cx TESTS

A. Air-Handler Mixed-Air Control:

1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:

a. Minimum Position Input Device: [Time clock].

b. Output Device: Receiver controller to modulating damper actuator(s).

c. Heating Reset Input Device: Room thermostat.

d. Supply-Air Temperature Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat.

e. Cooling Reset Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted thermostats.

f. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Mixed-air-temperature indication.

2) Mixed-air-temperature set point.

3) Mixed-air damper position.

2. Scope: Air handler with mixed-air control and associated controls.

3. Purpose:

a. Occupied time control.

b. Minimum damper position control.

c. Heating reset control.

d. Supply-air temperature control.

e. Cooling reset control.

f. Unoccupied time control.

4. Conditions of the Test:

a. Occupied Time Control: Start in unoccupied schedule. Advance to occupied

schedule time.

b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Command system to mode in which

minimum damper position is required.

c. Heating Reset Control: Create a call for heating.

d. Supply-Air Temperature Control: Override [supply]-air temperature set point to a

value 2.0 deg F above current supply [-air temperature.

e. Cooling Reset Control: Override outdoor-air [temperature to a value that exceeds

return-air temperature].

f. Unoccupied Time Control: Advance to unoccupied schedule time.

g. Control Data Trend Log: Set up a data trend log of the following input device

values and output device commands. Record data at hourly intervals. Submit trend

data for 24-hour periods in which natural conditions require heating reset control,

supply-air temperature control, and cooling reset control.

1) Minimum position input device.

2) Heating reset input device.

3) Supply-air temperature input device.

4) Cooling reset input device.

5. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Occupied Time Control: Mixed-air control is active in occupied mode.

b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Controller [opens minimum outdoor-air

dampers].







07/13/2021

c. Heating Reset Control: Controller [closes minimum outdoor-air dampers].

d. Supply-Air Temperature Control: Controller modulates outdoor-, return-, and

relief-air dampers to maintain temporary supply-air temperature set point, plus or

minus 1.0 deg F.

e. Cooling Reset Control: Controller sets outdoor-air dampers to minimum position

when outdoor-air temperature exceeds return-air temperature.

f. Unoccupied Time Control: Controller positions outdoor- and relief-air dampers

closed and return-air dampers open.

g. Control Data Trend Log: Data verify control according to sequence of control.







REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - Page 1 of 14 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings.

2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties.

3. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves.

b. Solenoid valves.

c. Hot-gas bypass valves.

d. Filter dryers.

e. Strainers.

f. Pressure-regulating valves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."







07/13/2021

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 115 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 225 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 225 psig.

B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:




C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:





A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.







07/13/2021

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.

4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings for Refrigerant Piping:

1. Standard: UL 207; certified by UL for field installation. Certification as a UL-recognized

component alone is unacceptable.

2. Housing: Copper.

3. O-Rings: HNBR or compatible with specific refrigerant.

4. Tools: Manufacturer's approved special tools.

5. Minimum Rated Pressure: 700 psig.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.









07/13/2021

C. Check Valves:

1.

2. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

3. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

4. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

5. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

6. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

7. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

8. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.



5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24V ac coil.



F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and

labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.





G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.







07/13/2021

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F .

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.

9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig .

H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


6. Equalizer: Internal.

7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter and 24-V ac coil.

8. End Connections: Socket.

9. Set Pressure: <Insert psig>.

10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.



I. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



J. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.

3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.




K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:







07/13/2021

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm).

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.




L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump

applications).


5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated [alumina].

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig .



N. Receivers: Comply with AHRI 495.

1. Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an

NRTL.

2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.


4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.

5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.








07/13/2021


O. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with AHRI 495.


2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,

Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines , and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR,

annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type K,

annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

D. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR ,

drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.

E. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR,

drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with Alloy HB soldered joints.

F. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications:

1. NPS 5/8 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and


3. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.

4. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with Alloy HB soldered joints.

G. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Schedule 40, black-

steel and wrought-steel fittings with welded joints.







07/13/2021

H. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing

and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

I. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and


J. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-

copper fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.

K. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-

copper fittings with Alloy HB soldered joints.

L. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping:

1. NPS 5/8 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and


2. [NPS 3/4 to NPS 1 and Smaller]: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing

and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.

4. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with Alloy HB soldered joints.

M. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping NPS 2 to NPS 4 : Schedule 40, black-steel and wrought-

steel fittings with welded joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.

E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.







07/13/2021

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in

the suction line at the compressor.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.







07/13/2021

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following

procedures:

1. Shot blast the interior of piping.

2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing

by means of a wire or electrician's tape.

3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.

Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.

4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube

or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.







07/13/2021

6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be

open to allow unrestricted flow.

Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding,

to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and to restore


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal

threading is specified.







07/13/2021


damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod



E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.







07/13/2021

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.







07/13/2021

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.







METAL DUCTS 233113 - Page 1 of 10 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."







07/13/2021

D. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are

inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by

manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise

specified for specific application.

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated

static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by

manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the

round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).







07/13/2021

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 .

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for

exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated; cold

rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 4 unless otherwise indicated.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.







07/13/2021

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods

with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.







07/13/2021

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal







07/13/2021

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

J. Install fire , combination fire/smoke, and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as

required by code, and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation

requirements of the damper UL listing.

K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in

air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials

both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied

Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction

Guidelines."

M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.

2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and

smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.

N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and

treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.







07/13/2021

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE 1 COMMERCIAL

KITCHEN GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. Install ducts in accordance with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operation"; SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; and SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment

Fabrication and Installation Guidelines" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install all ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent

to drain grease back to the hood.

C. All ducts exposed to view shall be constructed of stainless steel as per "Duct Schedule" Article.

All ducts concealed from view shall be stainless steel as per "Duct Schedule" Article.

D. All joints shall be welded and shall be telescoping, bell, or flange joint as per NFPA 96.

E. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals

of 12 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings.

F. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and


3.4 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EXHAUST DUCTS SERVING

COMMERCIAL DISHWASHERS AND OTHER HIGH-HUMIDITY LOCATIONS

A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts and other exhaust ducts from wet, high-humidity locations

without dips and traps that may hold water. Slope ducts a minimum of 2 percent back to

dishwasher or toward drain.

B. Provide a drain pocket at each low point and at the base of each riser with a 1-inchtrapped

copper drain from each drain pocket to open site floor drain.

C. Minimize number of transverse seams.

D. Do not locate longitudinal seams on bottom of duct.

3.5 DUCT SEALING

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." and seal

all ducts to Seal Class A unless otherwise indicated"i







07/13/2021


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."







07/13/2021

3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage

class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and

cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and

liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:







07/13/2021

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as

indicated on the drawings.

B. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel .

2. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

C. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam .

D. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.







AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - Page 1 of 9 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Fire dampers.

3. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Duct-mounted access doors.


7. Duct security bars.

8. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Section 233346 "Flexible Ducts" for insulated and non-insulated flexible ducts.

2. Section 233723 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.

3. Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.

4. Section 284621.13 "Conventional Fire-Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and











07/13/2021

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."


acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 .

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish

for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts. unless otherwise indicated

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

3. Frames:







07/13/2021

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel .

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel .

6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze .

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,

and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Type: Static ; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

B. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream Curtain type with blades outside airstream ;

fabricated with roll-formed galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in

accordance with UL listing.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with

UL listing.







07/13/2021

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

B. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

D. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded or mechanically attached corners and

mounting flange; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links .

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.

G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking , galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with

UL listing.

I. Leakage: Class I .

J. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor

application with factory-furnished silicone caulking; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

L. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.

M. Damper Motors: two-position action.

N. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."







07/13/2021

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support

with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

C. Vane Construction: Double wall.

D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger

dimensions.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches

with outside and inside handles.

2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.







07/13/2021

D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches] [5-3/4 inches]

wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or

0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in

compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan

discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of

30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.





6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at

start and stop.







07/13/2021

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan


D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch steel sleeve,

continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inchdiameter steel bars, 6 inches o.c. in each

direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar. Weld 2-1/2-

by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of sleeve. Connect duct security bars

to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch hinged access panel with cam lock in

duct in each side of sleeve.







07/13/2021

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

8. Upstream from turning vanes.

9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.

10. Control devices requiring inspection.

11. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

L. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

P. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust

limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and

stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.







07/13/2021

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.







FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulated flexible ducts.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."


acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."

D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."







07/13/2021

2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.





C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by

helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.





D. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex

adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene

vapor-barrier film.





E. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass

insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative.










07/13/2021

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear

action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

B. Non-Clamp Connectors: .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct

Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.

C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible

duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of

flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

E. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands .

F. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

G. Installation:

1. Install ducts fully extended.

2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners.

3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter.

4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits.

5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns.

H. Supporting Flexible Ducts:

1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of

48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per

12 inches.

2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of

the bend.

3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not

exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.







07/13/2021

4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches

o.c.







HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal ventilators - roof downblast.

2. Centrifugal ventilators - roof upblast

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Prefabricated roof curbs.

9. Fan speed controllers.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and

emergency operation, and maintenance manuals.






HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021




1. Belts: two set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST

A. Housing: Downblast; removable galvanized-steel mushroom-domed top ; square, one-piece

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

B. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

C. Direct or Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch

adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

D. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid,

fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit

roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Manufactured to accommodate roof slope.

2. Overall Height: 16 inches .

3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF UPBLAST

A. Configuration: Centrifugal roof upblast, grease hood kitchen ventilator.

B. Housing: Removable galvanized-steel, mushroom-domed top ; square, one-piece aluminum base

with venturi inlet cone.






HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains.

2. Provide grease collector.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades; sparkproof construction.

D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings;

minimum ABMA9, L(10) of 100,000 hours .

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch

adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan

housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction.

3. Restaurant Kitchen Exhaust: UL 762 listed for grease-laden air exhaust.

F. Prefabricated Kitchen Exhaust Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners;

ventilation openings on all sides to ventilate curb interstitial space. Size as required to suit roof

opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: manufactured to accommodate roof slope.

2. Overall Height: 16” or as required to meet NFPA 96, whichever is higher

3. Hinged sub-base to provide access to damper or as cleanout for grease applications.

4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

5. NFPA 96 code requirements for commercial cooking operations.

6. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: UL 762 listed for grease-laden air.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements

for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will

not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.






HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal.

C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to

AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating

Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency,

air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. See Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."






HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to

NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background

and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and



1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected

ductwork systems are in fully open position.






HVAC POWER

VENTILATORS


07/13/2021

10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they

do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for

testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.







AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 - Page 1 of 3 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers.

2. Section 233713.23 "Air Registers and Grilles" for adjustable-bar register and grilles,

fixed-face registers and grilles, and linear bar grilles.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number,

size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS CD-1

A. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

B. Material: Aluminum.







07/13/2021

C. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

D. Face Style: Three cone .

E. Mounting: T-bar .

F. Pattern: Fixed .

G. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.

H. Accessories:

1. Equalizing grid.

2.2 PERFORATED DIFFUSERS R-1

A. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

B. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel face.

C. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

D. Duct Inlet: Round.

E. Face Style: Flush.

F. Pattern Controller: Four louvered deflector patches.

G. Dampers: Opposed blade.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for

Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.







07/13/2021


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of

dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air

balancing.







REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - Page 1 of 3 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 233713.23 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to registers and grilles.

2. Section 233713.13 "Air Diffusers" for various types of air diffusers.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS

A. Fixed Face Register S-1, S-2

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.







07/13/2021

4. Face Arrangement: Perforated core.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

7. Mounting Frame: Filter.

8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.

2.2 GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Grille CG-1, CG-2:

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal; spaced 3/4 inch apart.

4. Face Arrangement: Perforated core.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

7. Mounting: Concealed.

2.3 .SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of

Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and

accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements

for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations

where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in







07/13/2021

the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify

Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before

starting air balancing.







INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

SECTION 237313.13 - INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory-assembled, indoor air-handling units with limited features, including

the following components and accessories:

1. Casings.

2. Fans, drives, and motors.

3. Coils.

4. Air filtration.

5. Dampers.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit.





3. Include unit dimensions and weight.

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Include fan construction and accessories.

d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021


A. Source quality-control reports.

B. Startup service reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.

3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indoor, basic, air-handling

units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year(s) from date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings;

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

2. Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. Hermetically seal at each corner and

around entire perimeter.

4. Base Rail:

a. Material: Galvanized steel.

b. Height: 4 inches.

B. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick, with manufacturer's

standard finish.

2. Inside Casing Wall: G90 galvanized steel , solid, minimum 18 gauge thick.

3. Floor Plate: G90 galvanized steel ,minimum 18 gauge thick.

4. Casing Insulation:

a. Materials: Glass-fiber blanket or board insulation, Type I or Type II

ASTM C1071.

b.

c. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch.

d. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in

casing walls, floors, or roofs of air-handling unit.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Panels and Doors:

1. Panels:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness

as casing.

b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against airflow.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

d. Size: Large enough to allow unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of

air-handling unit's internal components. At least 18 inches wide by full height of

unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches.

2. Doors:


as casing.

b. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against airflow. Provide safety latch retainers on doors so that doors do

not open uncontrollably.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of frame.

d. Size: Large enough to allow for unobstructed access for inspection and

maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components. At least 18 inches wide by

full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches .

3. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors.

b. Coil Section: Panels.

c. Access Section: Doors.

d. Access Sections Immediately Upstream and Downstream of Coil Sections: Doors.

e. Damper Section: Doors.

f. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.

g. Mixing Section: Doors.

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel

shaft.

1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:

a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum

100,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with

shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll,

wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Housings, Plenum Fans: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute

housing. Provide inlet screens for Type SWSI fans.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

5. Forward-Curved, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades

with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to

flange and backplate; steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

6. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels (Plenum Fan Wheels): Smooth-curved inlet flange,

backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange

and backplate; steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

7. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation and seismic control. Factory-mount fans with

manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

8. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

9. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide,

attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch- wide by 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized-

steel sheet.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics,

coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Drive, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Drive, Belt: Factory-mounted, V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and

with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the

factory.

2. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.

3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146-inch- thick, 3/4-inch diamond-

mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

E. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."



3. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.

4. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron .

5. Motor Bearings: <Minimum L10 Life>.

6. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.

7. NEMA Design: <B>.

8. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use

with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of

adjustment range at fan design conditions.

9. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

2.4 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with AHRI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Heating Coils:

1. Electrical Coils: Comply with UL 1995.

a. Casing Assembly: Slip-in type with galvanized-steel frame.

b. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent

chromium supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into

casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel

frame.

c. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout,

safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil

section.

d. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable,

thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

e. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection.

1) Magnetic contactor.

2) Solid-state, stepless pulse controller.

3) Toggle switches, one per step.

4) Step controller.

5) Time-delay relay.

6) Pilot lights, one per step.

7) Airflow proving switch.

2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. Particulate air filtration is specified in Section 234100 "Particulate Air Filtration."

B. Panel Filters:

1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported disposable air filters with holding

frames.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic, or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive

and antimicrobial coating.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

4. Filter-Media Frame: High wet-strength beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or

metal grid, on outlet side.

C. Adhesive, Sustainability Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and with a VOC

content of 80 g/L or less.

D. Adhesive, LEED for Schools Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and that

complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public

Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical

Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

E. Side-Access Filter Mounting Frames:

1. Particulate Air Filter Frames: Match inner casing and outer casing material, and

insulation thickness. Galvanized steel track.

a. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing device to ensure seal between gasketed

material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent

bypass of unfiltered air.

2.6 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: Comply with requirements in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel

dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade

arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings

mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common

linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

C. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

D. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

3. Operator Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action

or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of

limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of

150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000


7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators.

10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 V dc.

11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 V ac or 8 W at 24 V dc.

12. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.

13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

14. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

E. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing

section.

F. Combination Filter and Mixing Section:

1. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch- thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway

filters.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or

moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209.

E. Comply with Section 230546 "Coatings for HVAC" for corrosion-resistant coating.

F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a

3000-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.

1. Standards:

a. ASTM B117 for salt spray.

b. ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb

c. ASTM B3359 for cross hatch adhesion of 5B.

2. Application: Immersion.

3. Thickness: 1 mil.

4. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60-degree meter.


A. AHRI 430 Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested

according to AHRI 430 and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.

B. AMCA 300 and AMCA 301, or AHRI 260 Certification: Air-handling unit fan sound ratings

shall comply with AMCA 300, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data" and AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test

Data," or with AHRI 260, "Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

D. Steam Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig, and to 200 psig underwater, according to AHRI 410

and ASHRAE 33.

E. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum 450-psig internal pressure, and to minimum 300-

psig internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.

Replace with new insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and

electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Coordinate sizes and

locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Comply with requirements

for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

B. Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural-steel support frame using threaded

steel rods and spring hangers. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support

members with actual equipment provided. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation

devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and

maintenance.

D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

E. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021


A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


Systems."


NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background

and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing

operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-

recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain

minimum outdoor-air setting.

7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.

8. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

9. Install new, clean filters.

10. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust

fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

conditions.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING


B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling unit

and air-distribution systems, and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units

internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets,

dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.






D. Perform the following tests and inspections:






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-

HANDLING UNITS


07/13/2021

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and

connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm


E. Air-handling unit and components will be considered defective if unit or components do not

pass tests and inspections.


3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.







PACKAGED, SMALL-

CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-

CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

SECTION 237416.11 - PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the

following components:

1. Casings.

2. Fans, drives, and motors.

3. Coils.

4. Refrigerant circuit components.

5. Air filtration.

6. Dampers.

7. Electrical power connections.

8. Controls.

9. Roof curbs.

10. Accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, small-capacity,

rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is

mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.


A. Product Data: For each RTU.



2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, and furnished


3. Include unit dimensions and weight.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Include fan construction and accessories.

d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Filters: One set(s) of filters for each unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.

3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven fan.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of outdoor, semi-custom, air-

handling unit that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five

years from date of Substantial Completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of RTUs

and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE 15 Compliance: For refrigeration system safety.

E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated

panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints

between sections sealed.

B. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel , minimum 18 gauge thick with manufacturer's

standard finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical

and piping connections and lifting lugs.

2. Inside Casing Wall: G90-coated galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick, perforated 40 percent

free area.

3. Floor Plate: G90 galvanized steel , treadplate, minimum 18 gauge thick.

4. Casing Insulation:

a. Materials: Injected polyurethane foam insulation.

b. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch.

c. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in

casing walls, floors, or roof of unit.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Panels and Doors:

1. Panels:


as casing.

b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

d. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

2. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

d. Include sight glass and limit switch to disable UV filter when open.

3. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Inspection and access panels.

b. Access Section: Doors.

c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels.

d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels.

e. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels large enough to allow periodic

removal and installation of filters.

f. Mixing Section: Doors.

2.3 FANS, DRIVES, AND MOTORS

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Supply-Air Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized or painted steel;

mounted on solid-steel shaft.

1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:

a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum

100,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with

shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll,

wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip

curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to flange and backplate;

steel or aluminum hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

5. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation and seismic control. Factory-mount fans with

manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

6. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

7. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide,

attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized-steel

sheet.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics,

coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Drives, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Drives, Belt: Factory-mounted, V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and

with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the

factory.

2. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.

3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146-inch- thick, 3/4-inch diamond-

mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

E. Condenser-Coil Fan: Variable-speed propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated

multispeed motors.

F. Relief-Air Fan: Propeller, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

G. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."



3. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.

4. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

5. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.

6. NEMA Design: <B>.

7. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use

with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of

adjustment range at fan design conditions.

8. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

2.4 COILS

A. General Requirements for Coils:






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

1. Comply with AHRI 410.

2. Fabricate coils section to allow for removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and

to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Tubes: Copper .

2. Fins:

a. Material: Aluminum .

b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 12 fins per inch.

3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

5. Frames: Galvanized steel.

6. Coatings: Corrosion-resistant coating.

7. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig.

C. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Comply with UL 1995.

1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in type with galvanized-steel frame.

2. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium

supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings,

fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame.

3. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, safety

device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil section.

4. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable,

thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

5. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection.

a. Magnetic contactor.

b. Solid-state, stepless pulse controller.

c. Toggle switches, one per step.

d. Step controller.

e. Time-delay relay.

f. Pilot lights, one per step.

g. Airflow proving switch.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Compressor: Hermetic, variable-speed scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal

overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

B. Refrigeration Specialties:






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

1. Refrigerant: R-410A.

2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.

3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.

4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.

5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.

6. Minimum off-time relay.

7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.

8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.

10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve single stage with a replaceable magnetic coil.

11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.

12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion

valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Panel Filters:

1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported, disposable air filters with holding

frames.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive

and antimicrobial coating.

4. Filter-Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on

outlet side.

B. Adhesive, Sustainability Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and with a VOC

content of 80 g/L or less.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel

dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade

arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings

mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common

linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

B. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

3. Operator Motors:






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021


type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513


b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action

or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring

mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of

limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of

150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500


c. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000


7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators.

10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 V dc.

11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 V ac or 8 W at 24 V dc.

12. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.

13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

14. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

2.8 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch

accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.9 CONTROLS

A. Electronic Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.

2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg F enters

unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire-alarm control panel.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

b. Fire-Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with

operating sequence described in Section 284621.13 "Conventional Fire-Alarm

Systems."

c. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply-air

temperature is less than 40 deg F.

d. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost

sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a

minimum of two programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:

a. Heating Setback: 10 deg F.

b. Cooling Setback: System off.

c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot-gas bypass to

match compressor output to cooling load to maintain room temperature and

humidity. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate

low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to

maintain setback temperature.

c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.

7. Hot-Gas Reheat-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Humidistat opens hot-gas valve to provide hot-gas reheat, and

cycles the compressor.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Reheat not required.

8. Electric-Heating-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle coil to maintain room temperature.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Energize coil to maintain setback temperature.

c. Operate supplemental electric heating coil with compressor for heating with

outdoor temperature below 25 deg F.

9. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Open to 25 percent.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.

10. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Morning warm-up cycles.

b. Occupied Periods: Open to 10 percent fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100

percent of the fan capacity. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation

when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F. Use outdoor-air temperature to adjust

mixing dampers. Start relief-air fan with end switch on outdoor-air damper. During

economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

c. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

d. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15

and 100 percent of total outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for

temperature, and output shall range from 2- to 10-V dc.

11. Terminal-Unit Relays:

a. Provide heating- and cooling-mode changeover relays.

2.10 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in


B. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-

installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C1071, Type I or II.

b. Thickness: 2 inches.

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal

surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric

depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.

C. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches .

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner

compartment.

B. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include

transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

C. Low-ambient kit using staged condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F Insert

temperature.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

D. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter

pressure loss.

E. Remote potentiometer to adjust minimum economizer damper position.

F. Return-air bypass damper.

G. Factory- or field-installed, demand-controlled ventilation.

H. Safeties:

1. Smoke detector.

2. Condensate overflow switch.

3. Phase-loss reversal protection.

4. High and low pressure control.

5. Electric coil airflow-proving switch.

I. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

J. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

K. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser

box with mounting flanges, and interior transition.

L. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.

M. Outdoor-air intake weather hood.

N. Oil separator.

O. Service Lights and Switch: Factory installed in fan section with weatherproof cover. Factory

wire lights to a single-point field connection.

2.12 MATERIALS

A. Steel:


2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or

moisture.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209.

E. Comply with Section 230546 "Coatings for HVAC" for corrosion-resistant coating.

F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a

3000-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.

1. Standards:

a. ASTM B117 for salt spray.

b. ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb.

c. ASTM B3359 for cross-hatch adhesion of 5B.

2. Application: Immersion.

3. Thickness: 1 mil.

4. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60-degree meter.


A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.

B. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound

performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311.

2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D.

3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before

equipment installation.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's

"NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof

penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete

base with anchor bolts. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs with actual equipment

provided.

1. Install normal-weight, 3000-psi, compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof

curb, 4 inches thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified with concrete.

B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing

with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install RTUs on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for

equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in





A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to RTU, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to unit mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant

Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

3.4 DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.

2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."

4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Connect electrical wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."


Systems."


NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as specified in Section

260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as layers of black with

engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

3. Locate nameplate where easily visible.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and







PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.




equipment.

D. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.


2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.

5. Inspect internal insulation.

6. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

7. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

9. Verify that filters are installed.

10. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.

11. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.

12. Connect and purge gas line.

13. Remove packing from vibration isolators.

14. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.

15. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.

16. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding.

17. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

18. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system.

b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.

c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

19. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

20. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

21. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner

for peak efficiency:

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

b. Inspect operation of power vents.

c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.

d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.

e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen

concentration.

f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing

rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

22. Calibrate thermostats.

23. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

24. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

25. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.

d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

26. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and

normal and emergency shutdown.

27. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on

fan curve.

a. Supply-air volume.

b. Return-air volume.

c. Relief-air volume.

d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

28. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

29. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes.

Inspect the following:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger.

b. Low-temperature safety operation.

c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.

d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.

e. Relief-air fan operation.

f. Smoke and firestat alarms.

30. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace

existing filters with new filters.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

3.9 ADJUSTING


B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.10 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTUs and air-

distribution systems, clean RTUs internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and

dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean

filters.






D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for


2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.




equipment.

F. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.






PACKAGED, SMALL-


CONDITIONING UNITS


07/13/2021

3.12 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.







SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of

capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,

and electrical characteristics.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in





B. ASHRAE Compliance:






SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard

for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor

Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and

Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)

A. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by

Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-

expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.






SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

4. Fan Motors:


type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent

lubrication.

c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.

e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for

electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

f. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.

g. .

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

6. Condensate Drain Pans:

a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends)

and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with

ASHRAE 62.1 .

2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep.

b. Single-wall, galvanized -steel sheet.

c. Double-wall, -steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation and

moisture-tight seal.

d. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

e. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

7. Air Filtration Section:

a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1) Comply with NFPA 90A.

2) Minimum MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access

doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted

out from access plenum.

b. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:

1) Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.

2) Thickness: 1 inch .

3) MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2: 8.

4) Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats held by self-

supporting wire grid.

5) Media-Grid Frame: Galvanized steel.

6) Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners;

suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.






SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable

panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.

Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration

isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload

devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll.

b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

c. Refrigerant: R-410A .

d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid

subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.

6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,

with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.

5. Provide tamper proof cover.

B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.






SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated

fasteners.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on cast-in-place concrete

equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations

specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting

base.

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in




E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 232113

"Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Connect hydronic

piping to supply and return coil connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange

on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return

connection.

2. Remote, Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties."

Connect hydronic piping to supply and return connections with shutoff-duty valve and

union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or

flange on the return connection.






SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONERS


07/13/2021

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal

Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to

split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are

specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."









equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.4 STARTUP SERVICE



2. .

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.







PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 238239.16 - Page 1 of 5 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 238239.16 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

C. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

7. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.

8. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical and horizontal discharge

configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with UL 2021.

D. Comply with UL 823.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.3 HOUSINGS

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested

propeller unit heaters before shipping.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical

units.

2.4 COILS

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant

metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal

box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.

1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit

controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.







07/13/2021

2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.

2.5 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed . Comply with requirements in Section 230513


2.6 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:

1. Unit mounted, thermostat and variable fan-speed switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric

hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Section 230548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."







07/13/2021

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Piping installation

requirements are specified in the following Sections:

1. Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

2. Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

3. Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."

4. Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping Specialties."

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to propeller unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping

package if shipped loose.

D. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and

union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of propeller unit heater.

Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116

"Hydronic Piping Specialties."

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on steam-supply connection and

union, strainer, steam trap, and gate or ball valve on condensate-return connection of propeller

unit heater. Steam specialties are specified in Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping

Specialties."

G. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

H. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:



2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.







07/13/2021

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.







WALL AND CEILING UNIT

HEATERS


07/13/2021

SECTION 238239.19 - WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating

coils.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wall and ceiling unit heaters to include in emergency,


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with

UL 2021.









HEATERS


07/13/2021

2.2 CABINET

A. Front Panel: Stamped-steel louver , with removable panels fastened with tamperproof fasteners.

B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by

Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.

2.3 COIL

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic

sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-

steel hardware, and limit controls for high-temperature protection.

2.4 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor.

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.5 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat.

B. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with

disconnect switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive wall and ceiling unit heaters for compliance with requirements for








HEATERS


07/13/2021

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to

match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with

Drawings and room details before installation.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."







LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


07/13/2021

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

3. Fire-alarm wire and cable.

4. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling

used for data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

C. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.








LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8

for stranded conductors.

D. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an

overall metallic sheath.

B. Standards:


intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. RoHS compliant.

4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Circuits:

1. Single circuit and multicircuit with color-coded conductors.

2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8

for stranded conductors.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

E. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

F. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

3. .

G. Armor: Steel, interlocked.

H. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,

Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI,

for power-limited fire-alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as

complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded

insulation, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, in pathway.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, in pathway.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,

Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with red

identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire-alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set

screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

2. Type: Two hole with standard barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Feeders: Copper for all. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for

No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

D. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger.

E. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRING

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal pathway according to Section 270528.29 "Hangers and

Supports for Communications Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Fire-alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system shall

be installed in a dedicated pathway system. This system shall not be used for any other

wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and pathways used for fire-alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring

associated with fire-alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of two-hour, fire-rated fire-alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and

CI, is permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire-alarm cables shall not be installed in the same

cable or pathway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and

back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with

fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring

diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type

terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or

equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire-alarm conductors differently from the normal building power

wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-

code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different

colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire-alarm system junction boxes and covers

red.

G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire-alarm control

panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting

wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 9 inches of slack.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for

connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

3.7 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.8 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct

connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.

2) Calibrated torque wrench.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

d. Inspect for correct identification.

e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.

Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V

rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.






LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER



07/13/2021

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve








GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special

applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.

3. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.









07/13/2021

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless

otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,

with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply

with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at

5000 V.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals.

E. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

F. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

G. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.









07/13/2021

H. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

J. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

K. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud

lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

L. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

M. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct

burial.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.

C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.









07/13/2021

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole

floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary,

install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper

conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect

ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive

insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete.

Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to

ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,

hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and

fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written

instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.









07/13/2021

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct

and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections.

3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are

specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and

shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the

ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished

grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.









07/13/2021

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond

across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure

ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.

I. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct

contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.









07/13/2021

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.




1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual

ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.










07/13/2021

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Conduit and cable support devices.

3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and

hanger rods.

5. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-

diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.

3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.









07/13/2021

4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

4.

5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for

types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.









07/13/2021

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers

and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA 101

3. NECA 102.

4. NECA 105.

5. NECA 111.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that

are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above

suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength










07/13/2021



C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than

4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

edge of the base.









07/13/2021

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and

touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on

miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.







RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances.

2. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

3. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and

handholes serving communications systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.


A. Coordinated Layout Drawings: Conduit routing and back box location on no more than quarter

scale plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each

other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. Precast panels including joints and seams.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

3. Kitchen equipment and supporting back boxes and outlets.

4. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

4. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and

NFPA 70.

5. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel .

b. Type: Setscrew for conduit 2-1/2” and larger or compression for conduit 2” and

smaller.

6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

7. .

C. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction

for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit

joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Nonmetallic Conduit:






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

2. Fiberglass:

a. Comply with NEMA TC 14.

b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways.

c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

3. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

4. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

5. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

6. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

7. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with

ASTM D3485.

8. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

B. Nonmetallic Fittings:

1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

D. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-

hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed] bottom unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." <Insert legend>.

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long or as noted and Larger: Have inserts for

cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

a. Plumbing chase.

b. Underside of roof overhangs.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression], steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any rotating equipment.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.

E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to

NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material

and size involved.

J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

Q. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

R. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

S. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

T. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter

or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

U. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

V. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.

Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue

are not acceptable support methods.

W. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

X. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

4. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Y. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

Z. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches of

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

center of box unless otherwise indicated.

BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

CC. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

DD. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

EE. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

FF. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

GG. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

HH. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in

nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried

conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of

conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 24” below grade.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES



07/13/2021

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.







UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings, including GRC and PVC-coated steel conduit.

2. Rigid nonmetallic duct.

3. Flexible nonmetallic duct.

4. Duct accessories.

5. Polymer concrete handholes and boxes with polymer concrete cover.

6. Fiberglass handholes and boxes with polymer concrete cover.

7. Utility structure accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Direct Buried: Duct or a duct bank that is buried in the ground, without any additional casing

materials such as concrete.

B. Duct: A single duct or multiple ducts. Duct may be either installed singly or as component of a

duct bank.

C. Duct Bank:

1. Two or more ducts installed in parallel, with or without additional casing materials.

2. Multiple duct banks.

D. GRC: Galvanized rigid (steel) conduit.

E. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021



1. Include duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.

2. Include duct, conduits, and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings,

and solvent cement.

3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, and boxes.

4. Include underground-line warning tape.

5. Include warning planks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and

marked for intended location and application.

2.2 RIGID NONMETALLIC DUCT

A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and

UL 651, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as duct.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and

marked for intended location and application.

C. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Duct Spacers: Factory-fabricated, rigid, PVC interlocking spacers; sized for type and size of

duct with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting

duct during concreting or backfilling.

B. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Comply with requirements for underground-line warning

tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 6000-psi

concrete.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching.

2. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- high, 3/8-inch- deep letters.

2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom

unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and

shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

B. Comply with ASTM C858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook

eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

D. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with steel cover with recessed cover hook eyes

and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

E. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with hinged steel access door assembly with

tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

1. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly.

2. Cover Handle: Recessed.

F. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof aluminum frame with hinged aluminum access door assembly

with tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

1. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly.

2. Cover Handle: Recessed.

G. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

H. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.

I. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom unless otherwise

indicated.

J. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability

properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location

with the ground-water level at grade.

K. Knockout Panels: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of

approaching duct, plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate

alignment variations.

1. [Splayed] [Center window] location.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

2. Knockout panels shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls,

floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate

racking of cables on walls.

3. Knockout panel opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for

field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct.

4. Knockout panels shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars

in concrete around each opening.

5. Knockout panels shall be 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick.

L. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each

entering duct.

1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct to be terminated.

2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching duct and be located near interior

corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

M. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and

pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.5 POLYMER CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES WITH POLYMER CONCRETE

COVER

A. Description: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and

reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

B. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure

Application" Article.

C. Color: Green.

D. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have [integral closed] bottom unless


E. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load

rating consistent with enclosure.

F. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

G. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.

H. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-

bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure,

fixed installation in enclosure wall.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

I. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering duct for secure,


J. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for

cable racks and pulling-in irons.

2.6 FIBERGLASS HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Description: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers made of polymer

concrete.



C. Color: Green.

D. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom unless otherwise

indicated.












2.7 HIGH-DENSITY PLASTIC BOXES

A. Description: Injection molded of HDPE or copolymer-polypropylene. Cover shall be made of

plastic.








UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

C. Color: Green.

D. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom unless otherwise

indicated.













A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for

compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by an independent testing agency or

manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by

manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification, complying

with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final

arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

Notify Architect if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or

archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes

with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with

other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations

as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to manholes

and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to

Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to

Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Duct for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, concrete-encased unless


B. Duct for Electrical Branch Circuits: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, direct-buried unless otherwise

indicated.

C.

D. Stub-ups: Concrete-encased RNC.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,

Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Fiberglass enclosures with polymer concrete

frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

2. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate

Loading by Vehicles: [Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10] [Polymer concrete

units, SCTE 77, Tier 8] [Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer concrete frame

and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8] [High-density plastic, SCTE 77, Tier 8] structural load

rating.

3. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: High-density plastic, structurally

tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

4. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3.4 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-

duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restoration: Replace area immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless

otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore

vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and

mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Plants."

E. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground duct, duct bank, and underground

structures according to "Cutting and Patching" Article in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.5 DUCT AND DUCT-BANK INSTALLATION

A. Where indicated on Drawings, install duct, spacers, and accessories into the duct-bank

configuration shown. Duct installation requirements in this Section also apply to duct bank.

B. Install duct according to NEMA TCB 2.

C. Slope: Pitch duct a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away

from buildings and equipment. Slope duct from a high point between two manholes, to drain in

both directions.

D. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use

manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and

vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

1. Duct shall have maximum of two 90 degree bends or the total of all bends shall be no

more 180 degrees between pull points.

E. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in duct and fittings and make watertight according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent duct do not lie in

same plane.

F. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct is installed parallel to

underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct will not be subject to

environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated

to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct crosses above an underground steam line, install

insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

G. End Bell Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells,

spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch duct, and vary proportionately for other duct

sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell, without

reducing duct slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each duct

in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting

near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct with calculated expansion of more

than 3/4 inch.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

H. Terminator Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use

manufactured, cast-in-place duct terminators, with entrances into structure spaced

approximately 6 inches o.c. for 4-inch duct, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to terminator spacing 10 feet from the terminator,

without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each duct

in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting

near the center of all straight line duct with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch.

I. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to GRC at least 10 feet

outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building and without

forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for RNC-to-GRC transition. Install GRC

penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

J. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of duct with pulled cables. Seal spare duct at

terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic

pressure.

K. Pulling Cord: Install 200-lbf- test nylon cord in empty ducts.

L. Concrete-Encased Ducts and Duct Bank:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Prepare trench

bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in

nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches wider than duct on each side.


4. Depth: Install so top of duct envelope is at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas

not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate

traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

5. Support duct on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor

temperature.

6. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct,

with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct

ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and

to duct to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together using fabric

straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic

loops around ducts or duct groups.

7. Minimum Space between Duct: 3 inches between edge of duct and exterior envelope

wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and

communications ducts.

8. Elbows: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at

changes of direction in duct unless otherwise indicated. Extend encasement throughout

length of elbow.

9. Elbows: Use manufactured GRC elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at

changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple RNC duct to GRC with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. Stub-ups to Outdoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on

terminations at equipment.

1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and minimum 3

inchesfrom conduit side to edge of slab

c. Stub-ups to Indoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches from edge of wall. Install insulated grounding bushings on


1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and no less than 3


10. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct where crossing disturbed earth and

where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or

magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

11. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting

and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

12. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover between edge of duct to

exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between duct of like services, and 4 inches between

power and communications ducts.

13. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations

in one continuous operation.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of

duct as its temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings

installed according to manufacturer's written instructions, or use other specific

measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and

install 3/4-inch reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches into

concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

14. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to

prevent voids under and between duct and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a

heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow around duct

and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven

agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-installation application.

M. Direct-Buried Duct and Duct Bank:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Comply with

requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for

pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.



4. Depth: Install top of duct at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise

indicated.

5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line.

6. Support ducts on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor

temperature.

7. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct,

with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct

ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and

to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together using fabric

straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic

loops around ducts or duct groups.

8. Install duct with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches

between power and communications duct.

9. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at

changes of direction in duct direction unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-

up ducts throughout length of elbow.

10. Install manufactured GRC elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at changes of

direction in duct.

a. Couple RNC duct to GRC with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

b. Stub-ups to Outdoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on


1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and minimum 3


c. Stub-ups to Indoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches from edge of wall. Install insulated grounding bushings on


1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches above finished floor and no less than 3


11. After installing first tier of duct, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work

toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and

contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing

each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over duct and hand tamp.

Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand

tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections

at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with

requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct. Place sand to a minimum of 6

inches above top level of duct.

b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct.

N. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried duct,

placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct or

duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a

nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.

O. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Bury conducting underground line specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" no less than 12 inches above all

concrete-encased duct and duct banks and approximately 12 inches below grade. Align tape

parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for

each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12

inches apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation:

1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

2. Knockouts for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2

to 2 inches thick, arranged as indicated.

3. Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place

concrete, formwork, and reinforcement.

B. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C891 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

duct, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent

undisturbed earth.

C. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade.

2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set

other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade.

3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and

trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch

above finished grade.

4. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

D. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage

provisions indicated.

E. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than

3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use

a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting duct, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box

extension if required to match depths of duct, and seal joint between box and extension as


B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.






UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,

as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm

lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve

adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for duct according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall

of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be

used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-

vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and

with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted

earth.

1. Concrete: 3500 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."



1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation

of underground duct, duct bank, and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and

adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 12-inch- long

mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch. If obstructions are indicated, remove

obstructions and retest.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.







UNDERGROUND DUCTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of duct

until duct cleaner indicates that duct is clear of dirt and debris. Follow with rubber duct swab for

final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.







SLEEVES AND SLEEVE

SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL

RACEWAYS AND CABLING


07/13/2021

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.



4. Grout.



1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain

ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE




07/13/2021

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with

tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side

larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more

sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.









SLEEVES AND SLEEVE




07/13/2021



A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE




07/13/2021

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing

sleeve-seal system.


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.







LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

2. Switchbox mounted occupancy and vacancy sensors

3. Digital timer light switches.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch

occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show installation details for the following:

a. Occupancy sensors.

b. Digital timer light switches

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control

devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.






LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRONIC TIME SWITCHES

A. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying

with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Contact Configuration: [SPST] [DPST] [DPDT] <Insert configuration>.

3. Contact Rating: [30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac] [20-A ballast load, 120-/240-

V ac] <Insert rating>.

4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule[ and an annual holiday

schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays].

5. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for

each day of the week[ and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly

operation on holidays].

6. Programs: <Insert number> channels; each channel is individually programmable with

eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule.


two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule with a skip-a-day weekly schedule.


two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of

the week.


40 on-off operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly

operation on holidays.


40 on-off operations per week, plus four seasonal schedules that modify the basic

program and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.

11. Programs: <Insert configuration>[ and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the

weekly operation on holidays].

12. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a

program[ on selected channels].

13. Astronomic Time: [All] [Selected] channels.

14. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.






LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

15. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors.

2. Dual technology.

3. Separate power pack.


intended location and application.

5. Operation:

a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area

is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and

sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

c. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to

turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied,

or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for

turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

6. Sensor Output: Sensor is powered from the power pack.

7. Power: Line voltage.

8. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2

power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

9. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

10. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal

operation of sensor.

11. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

12. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.






LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

B. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and

ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that

control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of

average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical

manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area

of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage: Coordinated with space dimensions to achieve required coverage..

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-

off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


intended location and application.

2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage

area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights

off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.

4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA LED load at 277 V,

and 800-W incandescent.

B. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a

minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

2. Sensing Technology: PIR.

3. Switch Type: Single pole, field-selectable automatic "on," or manual "on," automatic

"off."

4. Capable of controlling load in three-way application.

5. Voltage: Dual voltage - 120 and 277 V.

6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150

fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the

set point of the sensor.

7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.

8. Concealed, "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.

9. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

10. Color: Selected from manufacturers standard offerings by Architect.






LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

11. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

2.4 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY

A. Description: NC, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or

automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 277 V.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power


B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not

smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are

wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be

installed.


3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION







LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021

B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION


B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-

borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration

isolators.

3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION


B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless


E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.






LIGHTING CONTROL

DEVICES


07/13/2021



1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry

has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


equipment.

3. Adjust occupancy sensor range and sensitivity to achieve proper coverage over installed

space.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.








LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

SECTION 262213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary

rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.




and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.


A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging and transformer.

1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after

inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that

provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging.

B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging.

C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control

of temperature and humidity.

D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers.






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.

2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.

D. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color-code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints

that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are

easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

1. One leg per phase.

2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent above the nominal

tap voltage.

3. Grounded to enclosure.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Coil Material: Copper.

2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

3. Terminal Connections: Bolted.

D. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin

encapsulated.






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

E. Enclosure: Ventilated .

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound using a

vacuum-pressure impregnation process to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.

F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps

below normal full capacity.

G. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation

system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

H. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system

with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer

enclosure.

J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561

requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by

designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion

corresponding to designated K-factor, without exceeding the indicated insulation class in

a 40 deg C maximum ambient and a 24-hour average ambient of 30 deg C.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

3. Unit shall comply with requirements of DOE 2016 efficiency levels when tested

according to NEMA TP 2 with a K-factor equal to one.

K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.

L. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor-rated transformers.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic or melamine plastic signs for each distribution

transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are

specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Nameplates: Self-adhesive label for each distribution transformer. Self-adhesive labels are

specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections and at all tap

connections.

2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections.

4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage connections.

5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated voltage

connections.

6. Applied and induced tensile tests.

7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.

8. Insulation-Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.

b. Low-voltage to ground.

c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding

and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5

ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers

for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer

manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual

transformer provided.

2. Brace wall-mounted transformers as specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls

for Electrical Systems."

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.

Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor

floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements

in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce

noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate

sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.



B. Dry-Type Transformer Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been

removed.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.

f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.

g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-

ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence

of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate

polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.

c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more

than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test

fails, replace the transformer.

d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after

energization and prior to loading.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.






LOW-VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS


07/13/2021

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than

nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap

settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.







PANELBOARDS 262416 - Page 1 of 12 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Load centers.

4. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

F. SPD: Surge protective device.

G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and

components indicated.







07/13/2021

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

5. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

6. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an

Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.







07/13/2021


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 certified.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.







07/13/2021

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in

Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts

and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

5. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

6. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

7. Finishes:







07/13/2021

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after

cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

G. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.

H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective

devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance

applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in

gutter.

5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.

6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

J. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting

and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,







07/13/2021

wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company

for exact requirements.

K. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,

filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

L. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or

manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an

NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.

1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings,

but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as

shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.

M. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting

capacity.

1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-

circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V

shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms

symmetrical.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 at service entrance panel for Buildings A-2 and A-4.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.







07/13/2021

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: Circuit breaker.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with

tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door

shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and

bus shall remain concealed.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.

c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.

d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.

e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip.

f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.

g. Field-Adjustable Settings:







07/13/2021

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-

pole configuration.

8. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.

c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.

d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

e. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent

of rated voltage.

g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.

h. Rating Plugs: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater than 150 amperes

shall have interchangeable rating plugs or electronic adjustable trip units.

i. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit

breaker trips.

j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key

shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

k. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle.

l. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.

m. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.

B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813

"Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories:

a. Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.







07/13/2021

b. Mechanical cover interlock with a manual interlock override, to prevent the

opening of the cover when the switch is in the on position. The interlock shall

prevent the switch from being turned on with the cover open. The operating handle

shall have lock-off means with provisions for three padlocks.

c. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that

operate with switch handle operation.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it

from all other circuits.

D. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with

transparent plastic protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it

from all other circuits.

2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that

equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified

in NFPA 70.







07/13/2021

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have

been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install panelboards on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

2. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."

G. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

I. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.

J. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient steel

slotted supports vertically.







07/13/2021

K. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque

wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

M. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

N. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

O. Mount spare fuse cabinet in accessible location.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room

designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.

Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate

complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for


E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:







07/13/2021

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air

circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6

Circuit Breakers and Paragraph 7.19.1 Surge Arrestors, Low-Voltage. Do not perform

optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include

notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain

temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.







WIRING DEVICES 262726 - Page 1 of 7 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

2. USB receptacles.

3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

4. Twist-locking receptacles.

5. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.

6. Occupancy sensors.

7. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. SPD: Surge protective device.









07/13/2021


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. RoHS compliant.

D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.

F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

G. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.







07/13/2021

2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.

3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.

B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only

when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.


3. Standards: Comply with UL 498.

4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet

Locations" Article.

5.

2.3 USB RECEPTACLES

A. Combination Duplex and USB Charging Receptacles:

1. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-

plated, brass mounting strap.

2. USB Receptacles: Dual, (1)USB Type A and (), 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle

(minimum).

3. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two

pole, three wire, and self-grounding.


3. Type: Non-feed through.

4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A

A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

B. Two-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.







07/13/2021

D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Description: For use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

2. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology:

1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional

switch lighting-control unit using dual (ultrasonic and passive infrared) technology.


3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for

fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac.

4. Adjustable time delay of 20 minutes.

5. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode.

2.7 TIMER LIGHT SWITCH

A. Digital Timer Light Switch:

1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination digital timer and conventional switch

lighting-control unit, with backlit digital display, with selectable time interval in [10]

[20]-minute increments.


3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for

fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac.

4. Integral relay for connection to BAS.

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.

B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.







07/13/2021

D. Antimicrobial Cover Plates:

1. Contact surfaces treated with a coating that kills 99.9 percent of certain common bacteria

within two hours when regularly and properly cleaned.

2. Tarnish resistant.

3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against

outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.







07/13/2021

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device, listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not

required.







07/13/2021

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use machine printed

self-adhesive label on faceplate and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated

digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Tests for Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

5. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.








MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

SECTION 262913.03 - MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual motor controllers.

2. Enclosed full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

3. Combination full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

4. Enclosures.

5. Accessories.

6. Identification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. NC: Normally closed.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SCPD: Short-circuit protective device.








MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of magnetic controller.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for signal, and control

wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate

installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and

circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

C. Product Schedule: List the following for each enclosed controller:

1. Each installed magnetic controller type.

2. NRTL listing.

3. Factory-installed accessories.

4. Nameplate legends.

5. SCCR of integrated unit.

6. For each combination magnetic controller include features, characteristics, ratings, and

factory setting of the SCPD and OCPD.

a. Listing document proving Type 2 coordination.

7. For each series-rated combination state the listed integrated short-circuit current

(withstand) rating of SCPD and OCPDs by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For magnetic controllers to include in operation and









MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

a. Routine maintenance requirements for magnetic controllers and installed

components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and

MCP trip settings.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

d. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been

installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor

nameplate full-load currents.

e. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after

motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for

motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed.

5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed..


A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical

damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust,

corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials

from inside controllers.


A. Ambient Environment Ratings: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than23 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet for electromagnetic and manual devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and

UL 60947-4-1.

C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Motor-Starting Switches (MSS): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action;

marked to show whether unit is off or on.

1. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing.

3. Surface mounting.

4. Green pilot light.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers (FHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or

push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

3. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2, bimetallic class as schedule on Drawings.

4. Pilot Light: Red.

C. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers (IHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-

button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


2. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

3. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2, bimetallic class as scheduled on Drawings.






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

2.3 ENCLOSED FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Across-the-line start, electrically held, for nominal system voltage of 600-V ac and

less.

B. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

C. Configuration: Nonreversing.

D. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

E. Control Power:

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

F. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

2.4 COMBINATION FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. Description: Factory-assembled, combination full-voltage magnetic motor controller consisting

of the controller described in this article, indicated disconnecting means, SCPD and OCPD, in a

single enclosure.

B. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

C. Configuration: Nonreversing.

D. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

E. Control Power:






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

F. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

G. Class II ground-fault protection shall comply with UL 1053 to interrupt low-level ground faults.

The ground-fault detection system shall include circuitry that will prevent the motor controller

from tripping when the fault current exceeds the interrupting capacity of the controller. Equip

with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting, and a trip indicator.

H. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate indicated fuses.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

I. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

3.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with

environmental conditions at installed location.

B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6.

C. Controllers in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with UL 1203.






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, except as needed to

match enclosure type. Heavy-duty or oil-tight where indicated in the controller schedule.

a. Push Buttons: As indicated in the controller schedule.

b. Pilot Lights: As indicated in the controller schedule.

2.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Controller Nameplates: Baked enamel signs, as described in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for motor controllers,

their relationship with the motors, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels

bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

E. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as

shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for

motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation.

2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to

manufacturer's published data.

f. Motor-Running Protection:

1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.

2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance

values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate

from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.

3. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Insulation-

resistance values shall be according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.1. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use

Table 100.5. Values of insulation resistance less than those of this table or

manufacturer's recommendations shall be investigated and corrected.

b. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each

other by more than 15 percent.

c. Test motor protection devices according to manufacturer's published data.

d. Test circuit breakers as follows:

1) Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

2) For adjustable circuit breakers, adjust protective device settings according to

the coordination study. Comply with coordination study recommendations.

e. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

4. Infrared Inspection: Perform the survey during periods of maximum possible loading.

Remove all necessary covers prior to the inspection.

a. Comply with the recommendations of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods"

Chapter, "Infrared Inspection" Article.

b. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,

perform infrared inspection of the electrical power connections of each motor

controller.

c. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each motor controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

d. Report of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies the testing

technician and equipment used, and lists the following results:

1) Description of equipment to be tested.

2) Discrepancies.

3) Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.

4) Probable cause of temperature difference.

5) Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and

equipment.

6) Load conditions at time of inspection.






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC

MOTOR CONTROLLERS


07/13/2021

7) Photographs and thermograms of the deficient area.

8) Recommended action.

e. Equipment: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of

detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 deg C at 30 deg C. The

equipment shall detect emitted radiation and convert detected radiation to a visual

signal.

f. Act on inspection results and recommended action, and considering the

recommendations of NETA ATS, Table 100.18. Correct possible and probable

deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations permit. Retest until deficiencies are

corrected.

C. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS

A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action

devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed and

all components have passed specified tests.

1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance of

integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements

and manufacturer's published data.

2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition

to design function.

3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass the system function tests and

inspections.








LIGHTNING PROTECTION

FOR STRUCTURES


07/13/2021

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection system for ordinary structures.

B. Scope of work for this project includes the removal of existing terminals and conductors,

provision of new terminals and conductors, and testing and certification of the system to

achieve UL listing and to meet requirements listed within this section.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layouts of the lightning protection system, with details of the components to be

used in the installation.

2. Include raceway locations needed for the installation of conductors.

3. Details of air terminals, conductor supports, splices, and terminations, including

concealment requirements.

4. Include roof attachment details, coordinated with roof installation.

5. Calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of metal bodies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Lightning protection system Shop Drawings, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of

the items involved:

1. Lightning protection cabling attachments to roofing systems and accessories.

2. Lightning protection strike termination device attachment to roofing systems, coordinated

with the roofing system manufacturer.

3. Lightning protection system components penetrating roofing and moisture protection

systems and system components, coordinated with the roofing system manufacturer.







FOR STRUCTURES


07/13/2021

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of roof adhesive for attaching the roof-mounted air terminal

assemblies, approved by the roofing-material manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For lightning protection system to include in maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

the following:

a. A system testing and inspection record, listing the results of inspections and

ground resistance tests, as recommended by NFPA 780, Annex D.

B. Completion Certificate:

1. UL Master Label Certificate.


A. Installer Qualifications: UL-listed installer, category OWAY.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and

components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal

bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and

Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Lightning Protection Standard: Comply with NFPA 780 requirements for Class II

buildings.

B. UL Lightning Protection Standard: Comply with UL 96A requirements for Class II buildings.







FOR STRUCTURES


07/13/2021

C. Lightning Protection Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency as complying with UL 96, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Air Terminals:

1. Copper or unless otherwise indicated.

2. 5/8-inch diameter by minimum of 18 inches long.

B. Air Terminal more than 24 inches long shall be braced at not less than half the height of the

terminal with copper brace.

C. Class II Main Conductors:

1. Stranded Copper: 115,000 circular mils in diameter.

D. Secondary Conductors:

1. Stranded Copper: 26,240 circular mils in diameter.

E. Conductor Splices and Connectors: Compression fittings that are installed with hydraulically

operated tools, or exothermic welds, approved for use with the class type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780. Use

the more stringent of conflicting requirements.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid bends less

than 90 degrees and 8 inches in radius and narrow loops.

C. Conceal conductors routed interior to the building.

1. Roof penetrations required for down conductors and connections to structural-steel

framework shall be made using listed through-roof fitting and connector assemblies with

solid rods and appropriate roof flashings. Use materials approved by the roofing

manufacturer for the purpose. Conform to the methods and materials required at roofing

penetrations of the lightning protection components to ensure compatibility with the

roofing specifications and warranty.

2. Install conduit where necessary to comply with conductor concealment requirements.

3. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's








FOR STRUCTURES


07/13/2021

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Aboveground concealed connections, and connections in earth or concrete, shall be done by

exothermic welds or by high-compression fittings listed for the purpose.

B. Aboveground exposed connections shall be done using the following types of connectors, listed

and labeled for the purpose: high compression crimp.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in

the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such

materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or

corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning

protection components.

1. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system and submit

application to UL for Master Label. Coordinate site investigation and testing with UL

Field Agent to certify system. Prepare test and inspection reports and certificates.







LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - Page 1 of 8 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and

contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.







07/13/2021

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.

5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

"Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each luminaire type. The

adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the

luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 andIES LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining

luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-applied finish.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.

1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.

F. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Luminaires.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires.







07/13/2021

4. Structural members to which equipment and luminaires will be attached.

5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Other luminaires.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation

and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.







07/13/2021

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F.

1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.

B. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels

where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles

when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.

c. CCT and CRI.

C. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated

class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

D. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

E. California Title 24 compliant.

F. Nominal Operating Voltage: As-indicated.







07/13/2021

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are

designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

I. Standards:

1. ENERGY STAR certified.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location when installation location requires.

2.3 Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Steel:


2. ASTM A568/A568M for sheet steel.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. 1. Manufacturer's standard grade.

2. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/240M.

D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

E. Aluminum: ASTM B209.

2.4 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining

components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.







07/13/2021

2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT


for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish

same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install

new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:







07/13/2021

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Mount:

a. Two 5/32-inchdiameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 5 feet in length.

b. Pendant mount with 5/32-inchdiameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 105

feet in length.

c. Hook mount.

2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four

locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.







07/13/2021

3.4 IDENTIFICATION





1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.








EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

SECTION 265213 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units.

2. Exit signs.

3. Luminaire supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered

supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting

support.

1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions.

3. Battery and charger for light units.






EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency,


1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twoyear(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING



B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to

comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.

F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61.

G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.






EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory

mounted within luminaire body.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens

each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and

switched circuit to luminaire ballast.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average

value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period.

b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140

deg F.

c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing).

d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet.

4. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp continuously at 40 percent of rated light output.

5. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire

or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

7. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

I. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more

lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.






EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one LED lamp continuously. Connect unswitched

circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp in a remote luminaire continuously.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

6. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote

from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance

recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

7. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

8. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

9. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

10. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.2 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions.

2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools.






EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

2.4 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS


for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Support Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting

luminaires will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:






EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.

3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent

of luminaire weight.

E. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

F. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,

spaced near corners of emergency power unit.

3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION





1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.







EMERGENCY AND EXIT

LIGHTING


07/13/2021

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service:

1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour

discharge test.







COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.

2. Unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cabling.

3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

5. Wireless Device cabling specifications

6. Cabling system identification products.

7. Cable management system.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice

and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. LAN: Local area network.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates.

G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between

the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the

communications equipment room. This cable and its connecting hardware are called

"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. Category 6 unshielded twisted-pair cabling is used to provide connection to work area for

both voice and data. Category 6A unshielded twisted-pair cabling is to be used for

connection to wireless device locations. Category 6 shielded twisted-pair cabling can be

used to provide connection for AV applications, where specified. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1

requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for

each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point

between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Specification for each type of product is required.

1. For cables, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD.

b. Minimum bending radius.

c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and

format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the

cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

c. Patch cords.

d. Devices and cover plate

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and

physical relationship between the installed components.

6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray

and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's

rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Samples: For wall or workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for

each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical

features.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021


A. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of an

RCDD.

B. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered

Technician who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project

site.

C. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Commercial Installer, Level 2 to perform the

on-site inspection.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces shall comply with ANSI/TIA-569-C as well as all

ANSI/TIA standards where applicable and all other related Codes.

F. Grounding and bonding shall comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B and NEC where required.

G. Telecommunications Contractor qualifications: Comply with Project general requirements and

additional requirements specified in this section or other sections. Prior to bidding, obtain and

maintain all licenses required for system installation work required by Loudoun County (AHJ).

Additional installer/provider qualifications are indicated on telecommunications drawings and/or

listed below:

1. System installer must have on staff a Registered Communications Distribution

Designer (RCDD®) certified by Building Industry Consulting Service

International (BICSI).

2. Telecommunications Contractor selected must be an Authorized SYSTIMAX®

Solutions Business Partner in good standing capable of providing the 20-Year

Extended Product Warranty and Applications Assurance and provide a resume of

SYSTIMAX® SCS qualifications for the Telecommunications Contractor’s

Project Manager and on-site supervisors and technicians that will be assigned to

the Project.

3. Telecommunications Contractor selected must provide a list of SYSTIMAX®

SCS training and certifications for the Telecommunications Contractor’s

personnel that will install any SYSTIMAX® materials for the Project. List will be

subject to review and approval by the Owner’s Representative.

4. Telecommunications Contractor shall have at least 5 years’ experience installing

and servicing telecommunications systems of similar scope.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

5. Product listing: Systems and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally

recognized testing laboratory (ETL, UL and/or NTRL) for compliance with

referenced standards. All items of telecommunications system shall be listed as a

product of a telecommunications system manufacturer under appropriate category

by NRTL and shall bear appropriate label.

6. Materials and equipment: Materials and equipment shall be latest cataloged

products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of

telecommunications systems. Materials and equipment shall be manufacturer’s

latest standard design and comply with specification requirements.

1.8 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. During the installation process all cables must be tested for accuracy and performance, and results

documented.

B. Copper

1. Cabling Testing Requirement

Testing should be done according to ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 and Category 5e, us-

ing an appropriate Level testing instrument, to verify both the integrity of all conductors and

correctness of the termination sequence.

2. Documentation

Documentation of cable testing shall be required and the engineer shall be present during all

tests. The SCS contractor shall provide a table of test results submitted with the as-built draw-

ings. The table shall include:

i. All copper backbone terminated cables shall be tested for MHz sweep tests, continui-

ty, Near End Cross Talk, and attenuation and the installed length.

ii. The report shall indicate all defective pairs and test results of all pairs listed above.

Cables not complying with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 shall be identified to the Project

Manager for corrective action which may include replacement at no additional ex-

pense to the Owner.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021


A. Store materials maintaining an orderly, clean appearance. If stored on site in open or

unprotected areas, all equipment and material shall be kept off ground by means of pallets or

racks, and covered with tarpaulins.

B. Store cable trays and accessories in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from

weather and construction traffic. Wet materials will be unpacked and dried before storage.

C. Any material or workmanship found by the Owner or their Representative to be defective,

inoperable, damaged or the like, the Vendor will replace at their own expense. According to

BICSI ITSIM, cables should be tested upon receipt.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining

ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

B. All work put into place prior to Substantial completion shall be the responsibility of the Vendor

to protect all equipment, racks, panels, cabling, terminations, etc. from damage, dust, dirt and

debris, by an approved means.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at

each work area.

C. Provide all Project coordination, communication, change directives shall be coordinated by the

A/E and passed through the General Contractor and and/or the Owner’s representative in the

Dept. of Construction and Waste Management (DCWM).

D. Coordinate cabling installation (especially cable tray location) with all other trades to avoid

conflicts with other trades above the ceiling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways shall comply with ANSI/TIA-569-C.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

B. Cable Support shall be NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 4-pair UTP cables, designed to

prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

3. Straps and other devices.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for


1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 4 inches, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2. Refer to the electrical drawings for Tele/Data outlet locations including J-Boxes and

conduit with pull string for all Tele/Data outlets.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used

2.2 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR (UTP) CABLE


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work:

1. SYSTIMAX; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

B. Description: Category 6, 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP cable, blue.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2 for performance specifications (Category 6).

3. Shall meet the following specifications:

a. Maximum diameter of 5.740 mm (0.226 in)

b. Maximum DC Resistance of 7.61 Ohms/100m

c. Mutual Capacitance of 5.6 nF/100m @ 1 kHz

d. Nominal velocity of propagation (NVP) of 71%

e. Maximum operating voltage of 80V

f. Conductor gauge of 23 AWG






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

g. Construction consisting of a pair separation tape

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or

b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR

2.3 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR (UTP) CABLE TERMINATION HARDWARE




B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.

Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Patch Panel: 48-ports Modular panels

1. Electrical Performance guaranteed to meet or exceed ANSI/TIA- 568-C.2 Category 6 and

ISO/IEC Category 6/Class E specifications

2. Available in 24- and 48-port configurations (angled and straight) featuring universal A/B

labeling

3. 110 connector terminations on rear of panel allow quick and easy installation of 22 to 24

AWG cable

4. Uses the Termination Manager for easier, faster, more reliable terminations and reduced

variability in the placement and termination of cables to the panel.

5. Black powder covered high-strength steel panel comes equipped with a removable rear

mounted cable management bar

6. Each panel comes ready to install, including front and rear labels

7. Intelligent Patch-Ready - field upgradable without the need to remove patch cords, mean-

ing no network downtime

8. Can support network line speeds in excess of 1 Gb/s

D. Number of jacks per field: one for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

E. Patch Cords: Provided and installed by the Department of Information & Technology (DIT) of

Loudoun County.

2.4 CONSOLIDATION POINTS


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include:

1. SYSTIMAX; a CommScope, Inc. brand

B. Consolidation points shall comply with requirements for cable connecting hardware as specified

in 2.3.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One (1) for each conductor in assigned cables.

2. Consolidation point shall be located in fully accessible, permanent location such as Re-

cessed in ceiling or wall.

3. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunica-

tions outlet/connectors:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or

for direct connection to workstation equipment.

b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications

equipment room.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include:


B. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply

with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.

C. Jacks and Jack Assemblies shall be modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle

units with integral IDC-type terminals. Provide the telephone jack on top of the device and the

Data jack on the bottom.

1. Unless otherwise specified by the customer, in the office environment, the voice jack

shall be grey or white and the data jack shall be orange.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

D. Workstation outlets: two (2) port-connector in a single faceplate

1. Plastic Faceplate in common areas, and offices and most public places: High-impact

plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."

2. Metal Faceplate in mechanical, community, electrical and high use areas: Stainless steel

complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and

coaxial work area cords.

4. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

5. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

E. Wireless Access Cabling Specifications

1. Internal Wireless Access Points (devices provided by Loudoun County but needs to be

installed by GC/cabling contractor) cabling locations are to be above ceiling grid and

placed every 50’ throughout the building. The horizontal cabling shall consist of two,

four-pair cables of CAT6A for each device location (two cables times 4 pair times two

RJ45 jacks on surface mount boxes). Horizontal cables shall be terminated at both ends.

On closet side, a separate patch panel will be required for these terminations.

Terminations in the ceiling will be on a surface mount box.

2. External Wireless Access Points and Antenna (devices provided by Loudoun County but

needs to be installed by GC) cabling locations will be identified on the plans. See

presentation addendum for detailed installation guidelines. Models may change based on

newest standards.

2.6 SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE (For AV technologies)




B. Description: Category 6, 100-ohm, 4-pair, shielded twisted-pair cable, blue.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2 for performance specifications (Category 6).

3. Shall meet the following specifications:

a. Maximum diameter of 7.239 mm (0.285 in)






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

b. Maximum DC Resistance of 9.38 Ohms/100m

c. Mutual Capacitance of 5.6 nF/100m @ 1 kHz

d. Nominal velocity of propagation (NVP) of 68%

e. Maximum operating voltage of 80V

f. Conductor gauge of 23 AWG

g. FTP construction consisting of a pair isolator, a core wrap, a shields and a drain

wire.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or

b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR

2.7 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR (UTP) CABLE TERMINATION HARDWARE(For AV

technologies)




B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.

Cables shall be terminated with shielded connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Patch Panel: 48-ports Modular panels

1. Electrical Performance guaranteed to meet or exceed ANSI/TIA- 568-C.2 Category 6 and

ISO/IEC Category 6/Class E specifications

2. Available in 24- and 48-port configurations (angled and straight) featuring universal A/B

labeling

3. Simple-to-use grounding solution

4. Intelligent Patch-Ready - field upgradable without the need to remove patch cords, mean-

ing no network downtime

5. High-strength steel panel comes equipped with a removable rear mounted cable man-

agement bar






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

6. Each panel comes ready to install, including front and rear labels

7. Can support network line speeds in excess of 1 Gb/s

D. Number of jacks per field: one for each four-pair cable indicated.

E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Shielded modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle

units with integral IDC-type terminals.

1. Allows for multiple size cable terminations 0.270 inches up to 0.300 in. diameter over

jacket and flame ratings: F/UTP and S/FTP

2. Universal design and label supports both T568 A & B wiring

3. Trade Agreements Act (TAA) compliant

4. Rugged, full-metal construction

5. IDC connector terminations on rear of base allow quick and easy installation of 22 to 24

AWG cable

6. Bonding and grounding at the jack located at the communications equipment room and at

the work area shall be compliant with ANSI/TIA-607-B.

F. Shielded Patch Cords: Provided and installed by the Department of Information & Technology

(DIT) of Loudoun County. See document 27 16 00.

2.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B.

C. Comply with NEC Article 250, where required.

2.9 LABELING

A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

C. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMs

A. Coordinate horizontal cabling installation with the General Contractor.

B. The General Contractor or Architect will provide a Communications Equipment Rooms layout.

C. Provide coordination directly with field technicians as required.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Install cables in raceways, cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and

except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed

wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. And non-

plenum cable where plenum-rated is not required.

2. The use of J-Hook is allowed if the ceiling spaces permits.

3. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and

without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and


D. The use of Velcro type tie is recommended for bundling cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. TELECOM OUTLETS (TO)

A. New construction TO consists of one (1) 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep flush

mounted box. Each outlet box shall have a EMT conduit stubbed above the drop ceil-

ing or extended into the hallway cable tray. Conduits size is as follows:






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

1. For Outlets with 3 or less cables, use a 1” EMT conduit

2. For Outlets with 3-6 cables, use a 1.25” EMT conduit

3. For all other sizes, calculate fill ratio at 40% for proper sized conduit

B. Existing surface-mounted construction TO typically consists of surface-mounted

raceway including base, cover, end fitting, entrance end fitting, and (2) 1" EMT con-

duits stubbed out top of entrance end fitting to above ceiling or out to nearest hallway

distribution system. Size of the raceway is site dependent based on number of con-

ductors to be installed.

C. The intent of the installation of the TOs which consist of the raceway is as follows:

1. Where ceilings are accessible, the raceway and entrance end fitting shall extend

above the ceiling and the conduits installed above the ceiling in the room to the

nearest hallway distribution system.

2. Where ceilings are partially accessible, or if the Drawings and/or Specifications

indicate installation of access panels, the raceway shall extend above the ceiling

and the conduits installed above the ceiling in the room to the nearest hallway

distribution system.

3. Where ceilings are inaccessible or no ceilings exist, the raceway shall extend up

as close to the ceiling as practical to allow installation of conduits as high as pos-

sible to the nearest hallway distribution system.

B. HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

A. Conduit System (Renovations only, where conduit exists)

1. Provide conduits secured to wall above corridor ceilings as shown on the Draw-

ings or as specified herein for installation of telecommunications cables. Any ex-

posed conduit

2. Corridor conduits shall be 4" EMT, furnished in 10 foot lengths wherever possi-

ble, with no sharp edges, reamed as necessary, evenly supported at two locations

per 10 foot section spacing. Conduits shall be sized and quantified to account for

handling cables in all TO conduits at 40% fill back to the TR and/or ER rooms.

Verify size prior to installation. Bushings and/or connectors on ends of EMT are

required.

3. All conduits shall be installed stacked and attached to walls unless conditions ex-

ist which prohibit this type of installation. When this condition exists, mount

conduits side-by-side supported with 3/8” rod attached to building structure uti-






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

lizing unistrut channel to form a trapeze. Double nut the top and bottom at the

unistrut. Utilize conduit clamp to secure conduits to unistrut.

4. Provide measured pull line in each conduit rated at 1200 lbs. minimum. Incre-

ments must be in 12” steps.

5. Grounding of conduits is not required per NEC #250-33, Exception No. 2. shall

be painted except conduit above suspended ceilings or in mechanical, electrical

or telecommunication rooms. Color to match that of surface installed upon or as

directed by Owner’s Representative. Coordinate with other trades prior to paint-

ing.

6. Provide restorable fire stops inside and around conduits as recommended by

UL1479 or ASTM E814 for all conduits penetrating fire-rated construction. Fire

rated construction to be verified with AHJ. See Section 27 05 32 for more fire-

stopping information.

A. All open pathway/trays shall be installed a minimum of six (6) inches away from any

light fixture or other source of EMI (Electromagnetic Interference).

B. All pathways shall be grounded per NEC Article 250.

C. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves and crossover and at

other locations where pathway/tray continuity is interrupted.

D. Support all pathways from building construction. Do not support pathways from

ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers.

E. Install cable tray level and straight unless noted on the construction drawings

A. STATION CONDUITS

Station conduit is defined as conduit that originates at the TO and rises within the walls

or is exposed from a raceway and extends up into the drop ceiling or over to the hallway

distribution system.

A. Provide station conduits from TOs to above the drop ceiling or extend over to the

hallway distribution systems consisting of 1” EMT minimum or appropriate size as

shown on the Drawings or as specified herein for installation of telecommunications

cables.

B. Provide an insulating press fit bushing on all telecommunications conduits including

interconnecting nipples and stub to distribution system. To prevent conflicts with

other cables or conduits to cable tray, the conduit shall be stubbed not less than 6"

above or below conduit/cable tray center line. Where space permits, every effort shall






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

be made to bend station conduits down such that the flow of installed cables pro-

motes the minimum length back to the TR and the least amount of bends in the ca-

bles. Bushings must be rated to be used in an environmental air handling space (Ple-

num).

C. Manufacturer of insulating bushing on all telecommunication conduits shall be Ar-

lington or approved alternate equal.

D. Provide measured pull line in 12” increments in each empty conduit to hallway dis-

tribution system.

E. Indelibly mark station conduit at hallway distribution end with Room # that conduit

serves.

F. The use of 90 degree electrical pulling elbows is prohibited.

G. Do not include more than two 90 degree bends between pulling points when in-

stalling station conduit runs. If the path of the station conduits requires more than 180

degrees of total bends, installation of an appropriate sized junction box is required.

See section 2.4 for junction box requirements.

H. Place an appropriate sized junction box in each individual station conduit run that ex-

ceeds 100 feet in length.

I. The use of a third bend in a conduit is only acceptable if:

1. The total conduit run is reduced by 15%.

2. The conduit size is increased to the next trade size.

3. One of the bends is located within 12” of the cable feed end.

A. JUNCTION BOX REQUIRMENTS FOR STATION CONDUITS

A. If the station conduit route exceeds the 180 degree of total bends limitation, an ap-

propriate sized junction box is required within a straight section of the conduit run.

B. Each station conduit run requires a separate junction box. The sharing of a junction

box by multiple conduits is prohibited.

C. A junction box shall not be used in place of a bend. All junction boxes in station con-

duit paths shall be installed within a straight section of the conduit run.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES







COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and ANSI/TIA-568-C.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM.

3. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

4. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in ANSI/TIA-568-C.0.

Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard

cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end

of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0. Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.

2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wire way or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings

by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

E. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only.

2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

3. Coil 6 feetlong of cable with a diameter coil of not less than 12 inches below each feed

point.

F. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-C and the BICSI TDMM for separating unshielded copper

voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical

power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

3. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. In all buildings, floor/ceiling assemblies, stairs, and elevator penetrations must be sealed with a

2-hour fire stop assembly at a minimum, unless otherwise noted.

B. Contact Owner’s Representative to identify walls which are fire-rated construction. Walls must

be sealed with a 2-hour fire stop assembly at a minimum.

C. Communication pathways requiring fire stopping shall utilize removable/re-usable fire stopping

putties for ease of Moves, Adds, and Changes.

D. All fire stopping penetrations shall conform to the recommended practices listed in UL1479 or

ASTM.

3.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall

allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar

with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable

electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 LABELING

A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. For new installations with one TR per floor, numbering shall be following 1000-series

numbering for 1st floor, 2000 series for 2nd floor, etc.

C. For wireless access points (WAP), cables shall be terminated on a separate panel and labeling

shall follow the WAP location i.e. if WAPs are located on the second floor, the cabling shall be

labeled WAP-201, WAP-202, etc.

D. For existing installation, labeling shall follow the existing scheme.

E. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B for

Class 2, level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard,

as approved by the County.

F. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with

rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive

schedules for Project.

G. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,

backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,

horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and

pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in

software and format selected by Owner.

H. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination, where it is accessible in a cabinet

or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at

device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at

intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify

each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-

mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as

shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label

each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.

Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,

use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

I. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that

contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA-606-B.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.

Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with

color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with

ANSI/TIA-568-C series.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Cabling shall be tested as per clause 1.8 of this document.

4. Test instruments shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C series. Use only test cords and

adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test

configuration for UTP cabling and links for fiber optic cabling.






COMMUNICATIONS

HORIZONTAL CABLING


07/13/2021

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similar to what is proposed in the BICSI TDMM, or

transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


G. Final testing and system acceptance:

a. Perform a walk thru with the RCDD that designed the system and observed all

system testing. The General Contractor shall arrange a walk-thru with DCWM,

and IT.

b. Provide three (3) sets of As-Built documents included in the Close-out documents,

for County Use.

c. All certified test reports, shall be evaluated by DIT before final acceptance of the

system and final payment can be made.

3.9 TRAINING

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including

changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and

keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new

workstation outlets. Include training for the automated infrastructure management software.


Rev by DIT 9/2020






PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275116 - Page 1 of 8 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Battery backup power unit.

2. Power amplifiers.

3. Microphones.

4. Volume limiter/compressor.

5. Control console.

6. Equipment rack.

7. Loud speakers.

8. Noise-operated gain controller.

9. Conductors and cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones,

with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker

alternative program signals.

B. VU: Volume unit.

C. Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be arranged for

selective switching between different channels.



B. Shop Drawings: Power, signal, and control wiring.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.







07/13/2021

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, required


connection.

3. Control panels.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.

b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.

c. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address systems to include in emergency,


1. Provide items specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" and Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data,".


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Personnel certified by NICET as Audio Systems Level II Technician.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain public address system from single source from single manufacturer.



C. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. System Functions:

1. Selectively connect any zone to any available signal channel.

2. Selectively control sound from microphone outlets and other inputs.

3. "All-call" feature shall connect the all-call sound signal simultaneously to all zones

regardless of zone or channel switch settings.

4. Produce a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers, overriding

signals currently being distributed.







07/13/2021

5. Reproduce high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loudspeakers at all

times during equipment operation including standby mode with inputs off; output free of

nonuniform coverage of amplified sound.


A. Compatibility of Components: Coordinate component features to form an integrated system.

Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Equipment: Comply with UL 813. Equipment shall be modular, using solid-state components,

and fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal

operation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

C. Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall

be designed to mount in a 19-inch housing complying with EIA/ECA-310-E.

D. Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for duty

outdoors or in damp locations.

2.4 POWER AMPLIFIERS

A. Mounting: Rack.

B. Output Power: 70-V balanced line. 80 percent of the sum of wattage settings of connected for

each station and speaker connected in all-call mode of operation.

C. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to 12,000 Hz.

D. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 80 dB, at rated output.

E. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 20 to 12,000 Hz.

F. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.

G. Controls: On-off, input levels, and low-cut filter.

H. Input Sensitivity: Matched to preamplifier and to provide full-rated output with sound-pressure

level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker microphone or handset transmitter.

2.5 MICROPHONES

2.6 VOLUME LIMITER/COMPRESSOR

A. Minimum Performance Requirements:







07/13/2021

1. Frequency Response: 45 to 15,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB minimum.

2. Reduction Ratio: Automatically vary compression ratio, and attack and release times for

voice and music inputs.

a. Compression Ratio Range: 3:1 to 10:1 minimum.

b. Averaging Compressor Attack Time: Up to 500 milliseconds.

c. Signal Fast Compression Attack Time: Less than 10 milliseconds.

d. Release time: Up to 500 milliseconds.

3. Distortion: 0.5 percent, maximum.

4. Rated Output: Minimum of plus 14 dB.

5. Inputs: Minimum of two inputs with variable front-panel gain controls and VU or decibel

meter for input adjustment.

6. Rack mounted.

2.7 CONTROL CONSOLE

A. Cabinet: Modular, desktop; complying with EIA/ECA-310-E.

B. Housing: Steel, 0.0478 inch minimum, with removable front and rear panels. Side panels are

removable for interconnecting side-by-side mounting.

C. Panel for Equipment and Controls: Rack mounted.

D. Controls:

1. Switching devices to select signal sources for distribution channels.

2. Program selector switch to select source for each program channel.

3. Switching devices to select zones for paging.

4. All-call selector switch.

E. Indicators: A visual annunciation for each distribution channel to indicate source being used.

F. Self-Contained Power and Control Unit: A single assembly of basic control, electronics, and

power supply necessary to accomplish specified functions.

G. Spare Positions: 20 percent spare zone control and annunciation positions on console.

H. Microphone jack.

2.8 EQUIPMENT RACK

A. Racks: 19 inches standard, complying with EIA/ECA-310-E.

B. Power-Supply Connections: Compatible plugs and receptacles.







07/13/2021

C. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use louvers in panels to ensure

adequate ventilation.

D. Finish: Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting primer.

E. Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master power on-off switch and

pilot light; and with cartridge fuse protection for rack equipment power.

F. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.

G. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 12 inches o.c.; the full height of rack for public

address system equipment use only.

H. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied independent of vertical plug

strip and located in front and bottom rear of rack.

I. Spare Capacity: 20 percent in rack for future equipment.

J. tlets with gray tapered rubber or plastic cable nozzles and fixed-outlet covers.

2.9 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper.

1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.

2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch thick, over shield with

filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or

approved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent.

3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

2.10 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with Division 26 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method:

1. Install cables in pathways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal

pathway and cables except in unfinished spaces.







07/13/2021

2. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and

without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and


3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Cable Installation Requirements:

1. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at outlets and terminals.

2. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,

and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be

spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used.

C. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring

runs. Install in separate pathways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors

at least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone

wiring. Separate other communication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment

manufacturer.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching

networks where required.







07/13/2021

C. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable

marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system

wiring diagrams.

D. Equipment Cabinets and Racks:

1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and arrange

controls symmetrically. Mount monitor panel above the amplifiers.

2. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear

of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without

disturbing other items or connections.

3. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is occupied

by panels.

E. Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. Install in

central equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.

F. Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.

G. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where

exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

H. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settings

indicated on Drawings.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,

common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and

equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for

Communications Systems."

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation

requirements.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.







07/13/2021

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain the public address system and equipment. Refer to Section 017900

"Demonstration and Training."

1. Provide additional two-hour training to Loudon County Parks and Recreation personnel

on the operation of the system for typical functions that will be used for game functions

(National Anthem, walk-on music, player announcements, play-by-play calls, weather

announcements).

a. Provide microphone and audio generating devices for training session.







CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280513 - Page 1 of 13 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 280513 -CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and

other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.

2. RS-232 cabling.

3. RS-485 cabling.

4. Low-voltage control cabling.

5. Control-circuit conductors.

6. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less

than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g.,

between the studs of a wall cavity).

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals as listed under Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures” and

as identified herein.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type








used:

a. Nominal OD.

b. Minimum bending radius.

c. Maximum pulling tension.

C. Shop Drawings: Communication (Comm) Room cable tray layout, showing cable

tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural,

electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling struc-

ture.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and

field inspector.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathways, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravi-

ty and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which thecertifi-

cation is based and their installation requirements.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in operation and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified elsewhere, include the

following:

1. Allowable pulling tension of cable.

2. Cable connectors and terminations recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an

RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products








according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with

appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to

end. Use optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to

verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector;

include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in

maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are

not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial

cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and

temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and

humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction

period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTP CABLE AND HARDWARE

A. Refer to Specification 271500 for requirements.

2.2 RS-232 CABLE

A. Provide cables by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Honeywell Cable

2. West Penn Wire/CDT, a division of Cable Design Technologies








B. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.1.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 18 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. Polypropylene insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent

shield coverage.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32)

tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Plastic insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent

shield coverage.

4. Plastic jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32)

tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.3 RS-485 CABLE

A. Provide cables by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Honeywell Cable

2. West Penn Wire/CDT, a division of Cable Design Technologies.

B. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper con-

ductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.









2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Provide low voltage control and power cables, by one of the following

manufacturers:

1. Anixter, Inc.

2. Belden Inc., Electronics Division.

3. Berk-Tek, a Nexans Company.

4. BIW Cable Systems, a Draka USA Company.

5. Champlain Cable Corporation.

6. Chromatic Technologies, a Draka USA Company.

7. Coleman Cable.

8. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

9. KRONE Incorporated.

10. Mohawk/CDT, a division of Cable Design Technologies.

11. West Penn Wire/CDT, a division of Cable Design Technologies.

B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with

UL 83, in raceway.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, power-limited cable, complying with

UL 83, concealed in building finishes.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF,

complying with UL 83.

E. Plenum-Type, Paired, Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cable: Paired, 3 pairs, No.

18 AWG, stranded (7 x 30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation,

individual aluminum foil-polypropylene tape shielded pairs each with stranded

tinned copper drain wire, 100% shield coverage and fluorinated-ethylene-

propylene jacket.

1. NFPA 70, Type CMP.








2. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 Flame Test.

F. Plenum-Type, Multiconductor, Readers and Wiegand Keypads Cable: 6 conductors,

No. 18 AWG, stranded (7 x 28) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-

propylene insulation, overall aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100% shield

coverage plus tinned copper braid shield with 85% shield coverage and fluorinated-

ethylene-propylene jacket.



G. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19 x

29) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded and PVC jacket.



H. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19 x

30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation,

unshielded and plastic jacket.



I. Plenum-Type, Paired Input Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (7 x 30)

tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, aluminum foil-

polyester tape shield (foil side out), with drain wire, 100% shield coverage and

plastic jacket.



J. Plenum-Type, Paired AC Transformer Cable: 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG,

stranded (19 x 30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene

insulation, unshielded and plastic jacket.



2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:


2. Hellermann Tyton.








3. Kroy LLC.

4. PANDUIT CORP.

5. Dymo

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,

laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Label all components that comprise the Security System(s) to note individual

purpose/function by using one of the following means:

D. Hybrid Cable, Individual Pair and/or Circuit Identification: Comply with ANSI

A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field

for each raceway and cable size.

1. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated witha

clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching

wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color- coded

acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it

identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

3. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-

colored acrylic sleeves, 2” (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit

diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping

action.

E. Controller Enclosure, Power Supply and Equipment Panel Identification:

Provide the following:

1. Clearly identify all controller enclosures by noting the contents and which

door locations are controlled by the enclosed equipment.

2. Identify Power Supply enclosures by noting the 120V panel and circuit

feeding the supply, power supply operating voltage and amperage,

battery supply voltage and ampere-hours, and when it was originally

installed.

3. Use 1 of the following means for identifying all System

Enclosures:

4. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or

equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8” (10 mm).

5. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in

black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height

shall be 3/8” (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and

ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.








6. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label:

Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8” (10 mm).

7. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled

for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8” (10 mm).


A. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

C. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-Aand

TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

D. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test

shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by

generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency

range and graphing the results.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. The contractor, subcontractors, and their personnel shall follow the procedures and

practices for waste separation, collection and transport as required by the General

Requirements.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Sections “Pathways for

Communications Systems” and "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for

installation of supports for conductors and cables.

B. J-hooks for plenum rated cables installed above accessible ceilings shall be

attached to structural elements. Do not support cables or J-hooks from drop

ceiling wires, other system conduits, piping or other system hangers.

3.3 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in conduit and raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces

where J-Hooks shall be used for plenum-rated cables. Cables may be installed in

cable tray and cable runway with other telecommunication system cables. All

raceways and wiring shall be installed concealed except in unfinished spaces and as

indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4”. Control and data transmission wiring








shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use

lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power- limited

conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel

with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are

terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system

to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make

all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless


C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect

and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and not more than 12 inches from cabinets, boxes,

fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii speci-

fied in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lac-

ing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not

splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard

cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereel-

ing. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor

cable pull tensions.

D. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Refer to Specification 271500 for requirements.








2. All CCTV camera cables shall home run to the UTP patch panel located in

the security cabinet in the Comm room.

3. No cable shall be longer than 295’.

E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Installation shall be conducted following guidelines established by the

product manufacturer and industry standards.

2. During installation of the optical fiber cable segments into the conduit

system, special care shall be taken to avoid damage to the cable. While un-

der pulling tension, the cable shall not be bent into a curve with a radius of

less than 20 times the cable diameter. Pulling tension shall not exceed

manufacturer's recommended maximum tensile load. Contractor shall utilize

a winch with tension control or a "break-away" link designed to break away

at or below the recommended maximum tension.

3. A minimum 20 feet service loop shall be provided at each end.

4. Contractor shall secure fiber optic cable strength member to inside of fiber

enclosure per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Contractor shall follow EIA/TIA Standards.

6. Contractor shall manage fiber optic cable at enclosure per enclosure

manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Contractor shall terminate connectors with vendor specific tool kits.

8. Contractor, unless otherwise noted, shall manage fiber optic service loop on

contractor provided re-closeable storage rings.

9. Fiber Optic Cable shall be installed in innerduct.

10. Terminations shall be performed by a manufacturer trained and certified

technician for optical fiber connections.

11. Terminations shall be made in a controlled environment. The Contractor

may choose to have the cables assembled off-site, although testing shall be

completed with the cable in its final installed condition.

12. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining minimum loss in fiber

connections and polishing per manufacturer's specifications.

F. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in

telecommunications spaces (Comm rooms) with terminating hardware and

interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8”








above ceilings by J-hooks spaced not more than 60” apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with

pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separat-

ing unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential

EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic

raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall

be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5”

(127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of

12” (300 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24”

(600 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic race-

ways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be asfol-

lows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-

1/2” (64 mm).


6” (150 mm).


(300 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic race-

ways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded me-

tallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.


3” (75 mm).


(150 mm).

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48” (1200 mm).








6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5”

(127 mm).

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section " Firestopping (Through

Penetrations)."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with

BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26

Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 27 Section

"Structured Cabling."




1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL

certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-

coding for pin assignments and inspect cabling connections to confirm

compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,

equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults,

and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in

connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.

4. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in

TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with

performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex,

complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement

Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that

are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test

configuration.








C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary

report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer

the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print and submit.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections, prior to activation.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports and submit to the County with close-out

documentation.

F. Provide low voltage permit and fire permit electromagnetic locks (maglocks) and

delayed egress electromagnetic locks.







ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL

28 10 00 - Page 1 of 28 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 28 10 00 - ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Refer to Specification Section “COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY” for project summary and work included information.

B. This section includes requirements for the following:

1. Security Workstation and Software.

2. Access Control System Panels, Controllers, Power Supplies and

Enclosures.

3. Electric Strikes, Electric Hinges and Request to Exit Motion Detectors.

4. Card Readers, Keypad/Readers and Cards.

5. Key Switch Overrides.

6. Door Position Switches.

7. Hardware Interface.

8. Cables.

1.3 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS CLAUSE:

A. Loudoun County has access control and intrusion detection system standards that

include proprietary products. No other products shall be acceptable for use on this

project.

B. Proprietary manufacturer for access control panels, software and controls:

1. IDenticard PremiSys

C. Control panels shall communicate over TCP/IP to the existing County

IDentiPASS Plus SQL server.

D. Proprietary manufacturer for intrusion detection panels and keypads:








1. GE Interlogix, Concord 4 Commercial (600-1040)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals as listed under Division 01 Section Submittal Requirements

and as identified herein.

B. Provide the complete Product Data cut sheets, with product specifications, power and

control requirements for the products, identifying the following:

1. Access Control System Panels and Power Supplies.

2. Software.

3. Card Readers, Keypad Readers and Cards.

4. Key Switch Override.

5. Cables.

C. Provide detail shop drawings specific to the system and building layout including

the following:

1. Symbols, legends, notes, general information, floor plans showing the

locations of all security devices, panels and equipment, network risers,

conduit and cable routing, etc.

2. The controllers, reader boards and input/output boards proposed in this

specification shall be compliant with UL 294. The supplier shall be

responsible for filing of all documents, paying all fees (including, but not

limited to plan checking and permit) and securing all permits, inspections

and approvals. Upon receipt of approved drawings from the authority

having jurisdiction, the supplier shall immediately forward two sets of

drawings to the Owner. These drawings shall either be stamped "Approved"

or a copy of the letter stating approval shall be included.

3. All backbone data drops, daisy-chains between panels and remote wiring

between central controller location and each controlled door NEMA 1

junction box with terminal strip(s).

a. Provide information on cables, including wire size, wire type,

quantity and color-coding. Identify any spare or unused

conductors.

4. Locations, quantities and types of all interface modules, including fire

alarm, power operated doors and elevators.

5. Provide information on interconnection cables, including wire size, wire








type, quantity and color-coding. Identify any spare or unused conductors.

6. Locations, types and quantities of all door hardware power supplies and

controllers, as furnished by the Architectural Door Hardware supplier.

Obtain the specific manufacturer and model information of electronic

hardware, power supplies and controllers for each controlled opening from

the Contract responsible for the Division 08 openings work and include on

the risers. Provide risers specific to each opening with all accessories,

options, etc., as coordinated with finish hardware submittal.

7. Riser diagrams and wiring schematics, including cable types and

quantities, for power (low voltage and 120 VAC) and control. All risers

shall be labeled with floor numbers and room numbers at each device,

panel, component and cable shown.

8. At each and every controlled door location and each and every reader control

panel location provide a complete wiring schematic that details the point-to-

point run of every circuit conductor regardless of its purpose. Provide

detailed and specific information about cable and shield grounding. Provide

the following additional information:

a. Identify/reflect every wire in the pigtail or terminal of each and

every field device regardless of whether active or spare. Provide

information for card readers, door contact switches, electronic

door hardware, request to exit switches, etc.

b. Identify/reflect every terminal strip and the purpose of each terminal.

Provide information for junction boxes at every controlled opening,

door hardware power supplies, interface modules, network panels,

field panels, reader interface modules, etc.

c. Color code and tagging scheme for each hybrid cable.

d. Identification of all components and cables, including

manufacturer, model number and function. Spare cables and

conductors shall also be identified.

9. Signal cable distance requirements.

10. Rack Elevations.

11. Battery calculations for back-up battery.

D. Provide a detailed sequence of operation for approval for each controlled and/or

monitored building entrance location. This shall include card reader operation,

hardware operation, power operator operation, relock delay settings, system reset

parameters, etc. See Part 3 Article “TYPICAL ACCESS CONTROL








OPERATIONAL SCENARIOS” for guideline sequences of operation. The

sequences of operation shall be customized for this project and shall not be the

manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems.

E. Prior to project close-out provide the following:

1. Record contract drawings.

2. Final updated risers.

3. Final sequences of operation for each controlled door.

4. O&M manuals.

1.5 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide an access control and monitoring system to control access to specific

building entrances and spaces.

B. Assume overall responsibility for all phases of the project including, but not limited

to: Hardware; software; Equipment set-up; equipment power distribution; access

control panels; security panels; control distribution; user interface installation; cable

installation; zoned fire protection system interface; door hardware; all data

gathering; programming; configuration; start-up; testing; and system training.

C. Provide all hardware, software, materials, devices, labor, cabling design,

terminations, database programming, configuration, testing, training, management

and supervision as required for a complete and 100% functioning integrated

system.

D. Provide the services of a single Security sub-contractor (Integrator) for furnishing,

installing, connecting, programming, testing and certifying the security systems as

described herein. The Security Integrator shall be an authorized Identicard Business

Partner representative who shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the

complete security management system, including the interface with the existing

Loudoun County Government electronic security system.

E. All control panels and connected field boards, readers and the like shall be tested to

ensure that a fully functioning system is designed and installed to be compatible with

the existing PremiSys Pro system. The system supplied under this specification shall

be a microprocessor-based system. The system shall utilize independently addressed,

microprocessor-based controller panels as described in this specification.

F. Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and

programmed system will function as designed, and will accommodate the existing

PremiSys Pro system as well as fulfill future requirements and operations of the

building owner. All specified operational features must be met without exception.








G. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The

materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a

nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected-premises

protective access-control system.

H. All control panel and connected field boards, readers and the like shall be tested to

ensure that the system operates as specified. The system shall utilize independently

addressed, microprocessor-based controller panels as described in this specification.

I. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with the

manufacturer's recommendations by the Security Contractor.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall submit all information requested under the Division 01 Section

“Submittals” (if provided) and General Requirements and as identified herein.

1.7 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install a new access control and intrusion detection system

consisting of:

1. Control panels located as shown on the drawings that shall communicate

with the existing County IDentiPASS Plus SQL server and that shall support

the IDenticard PremiSys software.

2. Auxiliary printed-circuit board components located in control panels as

shown on the drawings.

3. Readers and LCD displays as shown on the drawings.

4. Input points and relays located in control panels as shown on the

drawings.

5. Connections to central server(s) and among other system components.

B. The system software shall enable PC communication to any system control panel

over a LAN and/or WAN using Ethernet protocol. The software shall allow the user

to perform all system functions in a LAN/WAN environment as are possible when

panels are hardwired directly to the PC.

C. The system shall be fully programmable with multiple levels of security. These

levels shall give control and access to specific doors, based on user levels and

assignable schedules.

D. The system shall operate in multiple modes, i.e., normal mode - day, normal mode -

night, life safety emergency, burglary threat or break in threat. Coordinate with Fire








Alarm provider, Door Hardware provider and Security Personnel to meet the

Owner’s system requirements.

E. This system shall interface with the zoned fire protections system as required by the

local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

F. The system shall provide the Owner with transaction tracking and history for access

points. Access to all system reports shall be limited based on the security level of the

requester.

G. The system shall be as specified herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings

and/or as approved by the Owner and the Engineer.

H. The system shall be delivered with the most current version of compatible

software, firmware and hardware. Provide free software upgrades for the first

year after system cutover.

I. The access control system shall comply with all authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Requests to Exit (RX) shall be performed by request to exit motion detectors.

See project drawings for additional information.

K. Provide all system programming for various scenarios, including, but not limited

to, normal business hours, holiday schedules, after hours, alarm situations,

lockdowns and various levels of user logins, for a complete system.

1. Gather all information required for programming and set-up, program the

system, test to demonstrate full compliance with the contract requirements

and provide all training as required to provide a fully functioning and

operational system.

2. Refer to Part 3 paragraph “TYPICAL ACCESS CONTROL

OPERATIONAL SCENARIOS” for typical programming

scenarios.

L. Provide all mounting hardware required for all equipment.

M. The installation shall be neat and ergonomic, no cables exposed, with no need to

move equipment in order to use it.

N. The Contractor shall be responsible for ground loop isolation and correction.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Provide isolation through control relays between all contact points to protect

equipment from damage caused by over-voltage, etc. from other systems.

B. Coordinate power requirements for the system, in accordance with the








manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Coordinate in the field all security device placements with other trades working in

the area. Any problems that arise shall be reported to the Engineer for a decision as to

the solution.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. The manufacturer named herein shall be regularly involved in the design,

manufacture or distribution of products specified in this document and shall

have the technical staff to provide support to the installer. The

manufacturer's processes shall be monitored under a quality assurance

program that meets ISO 9000 requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. The Security contractor (integrator) shall have successfully installed

similar access-control systems on a previous project of comparable size

and complexity. The owner reserves the right to reject any control

components for which evidence of a successful prior installation performed

by the contractor cannot be provided.

2. The Security contractor (integrator) shall have in-house engineering and

project management capability consistent with the requirements of this

project. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer

shall perform the detailed engineering design of central and remote-control

equipment. Qualified and approved representatives of the system

manufacturer shall produce all controller and equipment drawings and

submittals, as well as operating manuals. The contractor is responsible for

retaining qualified and approved representative(s) ofthose system

manufacturers specified for detailed system design and documentation,

coordination of system installation requirements, and final system testing and

commissioning in accordance with these specifications.

3. The Security contractor (integrator) shall maintain a stock of spare parts

for the system(s) installed.

4. The low voltage systems contractor must be an authorized iDenticard

Systems dealer.

5. The low voltage systems contractor must be a Hanwha Techwin STEP

Gold partner and offer a 5 year limited manufacturer warranty on all

Video Surveillance equipment including network video recorders. This

warranty excludes moving parts such as motors found in PTZ (Pan-tilt-








zoom) cameras,

6. Low voltage systems integrator for this project must be located within 30

miles of Loudoun County General Services located at: 801 Sycolin Rd.,

Leesburg, VA 2017

C. All products and system components shall be of the latest design. Absolutely no

“end of life” or “end of sale” products shall be provided.

D. All 120V AC electrical work, including conduit runs, branch circuit wiring, field

terminations, circuit breaker installations, etc., shall be performed by a licensed

and qualified electrical contractor in compliance with all applicable codes and

regulations.

E. All equipment materials installed of a type for which there are UL standard testing

requirements, listing and labeling shall be listed and labeled by UL.

F. Where equipment and material installed have industry certification, labels or

standards available (i.e., NEMA, etc.), this equipment and material shall be

labeled or certified to comply with such standards.

G. Materials and equipment shall be new and conform to grade, quality and

standards specified. Equipment and materials of the same type shall be the

product of the same manufacturer throughout.

H. All work involving or affecting related trades shall be coordinated, arranged and

reviewed before commencing with fabrication or construction.

1.10 ADMINISTRATION FEATURES

A. The system shall have the ability for multiple user log-on names with various

permission levels to access system features. This access control and security

system shall provide personnel with:

1. Alarm reporting, including time, date and location of event.

2. Building lockdown capability.

3. Contact break alarm reporting on doors. The alarms shall be capable of

being prioritized based on user defined parameters.

4. An interface from other alarm contacts such as, but not limited to CCTV

alarm contacts (from motion detection) and panic duress alarms.

5. The ability to track or trap individual cards, doors or events.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The Owner has an existing access control system with an integrated access control

and alarm monitoring object-oriented software, PremiSys by IDenticard Systems.

All devices, panels and modules shall be by IDenticard or shall be specifically

listed by IDenticard as compatible with this system. Provide all controllers, reader

interfaces, Input/Output panels and power supplies as necessary for a complete

and first class installation.

B. Access Control system equipment shall be wall mounted in the Comm Room.

Refer to security floor plans for additional information.

C. The system shall consist of access-control software that enables communication

between IBM®-compatible personal computers and microprocessor-equipped smart

controllers with distributed databases. The smart controllers make access- control

decisions at doors, exits, entrances, etc., and communicate to PCs for programming

instructions, event monitoring and record keeping. The controller(s) shall be

designed specifically for access-control system applications.

D. The controller(s) shall receive data input from other hardware components of the

system, such as readers and relays. All system controllers shall be connected to the

system server(s) where event history, cardholder data and system programming data

shall reside. The controller(s) shall receive data input from, and provide system data

to, the controlling system server(s).

E. This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for the

Access-Control system. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all

equipment, materials, labor, documentation and services necessary to furnish and

install a complete and operational system to include, but not be limited to, the

following functions:

1. Enabling valid access and preventing unauthorized access at facility

portals.

2. Enabling alarm/alert notification of access breaches at facility portals and

other points as desired.

3. Enabling data collection and management for a cardholder database at the

facility.

F. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable Federal, State, local and/or

municipal codes and regulations governing the installation. If there is a conflict

between this specification and the referenced standards, federal, state, local and/or

municipal codes, it is the bidder's responsibility to immediately bring the conflict to








the attention of the Engineer for resolution. National standards shall prevail unless

local codes are more stringent. The bidder shall not attempt to resolve conflicts

directly with the local authorities unless specifically authorized by the Engineer.

G. All controllers and connected boards, readers and the like shall be tested to ensure

that a fully functioning system is designed and installed. The system supplied under

this specification shall be a microprocessor-based system. The system shall utilize

independently addressed, microprocessor-based controllers as described in this

specification.

2.2 SECURITY WORKSTATION AND ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. The specified PC-based Access Control and Monitoring Software shallbe

IDenticard® PremiSys Pro by IDenticard Systems.

B. The system shall use a server computer that communicates with a client computer or

computers. The system uses an IDenticard Windows Service, Database Service and

components requiring Internet Information System (IIS). It shall be possible to

install the IDenticard Windows Service, Database Service and the components

requiring IIS on the same or separate computers within a network.

C. Any system server computer shall have a 1 GHz or faster processor (Intel Pentium®

processor or equivalent), a minimum of 1536 MB of RAM, 1 GB of free space on the

hard drive for the PremiSys software, plus space for data; a CD- ROM drive or DVD

drive; a 1024 x 768 24-bit video card; and a 10/100Base-T network interface card.

The server computer shall have available as well COM ports if needed for the

connection of system controllers using serial communications. Any system client

computer shall have a 1 GHz or faster processor (Intel Pentium® processor or

equivalent), a minimum of 1024 MB of RAM, 650 MB of free space on the hard

drive for the PremiSys software, plus space for data; a CD-ROM drive or DVD

drive; a 1024 x 768 24-bit video card; and at least two USB 2.0 ports for camera and

printer.

D. The system shall be of true multiuser design and capable of simultaneous

operations from multiple client interfaces. A user logged onto any one client

interface shall not affect the system control by users logged onto other client

interfaces.

E. The minimum 32-bit operating system software for servers with all components

installed shall be Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 (R1 or R2); Microsoft®

Windows® 7 Professional; or Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003. The

minimum 32-bit operating system software for servers with all components

installed shall be Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003. The minimum 32-bit

operating systems for clients shall be; Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional or

higher; Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business or higher; or Microsoft








Windows® XP Professional with Windows® Service Pack 2 or higher. The

computer on which the components requiring IIS are installed shall have the

Internet Information System (IIS) installed and enabled. All clients and servers

in the system shall have Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 7 and Windows® Media

Player.

F. Additionally, the database installed with the access-control software of this

specification shall be Microsoft® SQL Server® 2008 Express R2. If the operating

system is 32-bit, the 32-bit version of SQL Server shall be installed; if the operating

system is 64-bit, the 64-bit version of SQL Server shall be installed.

G. The system shall be of true multiuser design and capable of simultaneous

operations from multiple client interfaces. A user logged onto any one client

interface shall not affect the system control by users logged onto other client

interfaces.

H. The software installation application shall allow the user/installer to install the

product for the first time or install a software upgrade, when new versions of the

software are made available. The installation process for these two scenarios shall

not vary significantly.

I. The complete software with all components and features shall be installable at one

time on one computer, using a full-installation option, by which this one computer

becomes a client-server computer. This arrangement shall permit the installation of

stand-alone systems. The software installation program shall also offer a client-only

option to install remote clients on separate PCs.

J. Licenses shall be activated separately from the software installation.

K. The software shall allow the integration of legacy IDenticard® Series 9000™ Panels

(with or without optional Reader Expansion Cards) and/or Remote Input/Output

(RI/O) boards. When these components are incorporated into the access control

system, the panels shall appear in the software as readerboards, and the RI/Os as

input and output boards. If the software is installed in a system that includes this

hardware, the baud rate of the communications for any data line connecting a

controller and these legacy I/O components (and any nonlegacy components on the

same data line) shall be 9600 only.

L. The user interface shall incorporate a menu bar with drop-down menus and display

icons for full system setup and operation. This menu and these icons shall offer to

system users complete access to all system functions and system setup parameters

to which the users have rights.

M. Users shall be able to design, store and display multiple, individually-created

screens used to display cardholder information and data. The system shall








support an unlimited number of user-defined screen layouts that shall

accommodate the data fields in the system. The system shall additionally be

built and delivered with a standard, ready-to-use data-entry screen. This product-

standard screen shall be able to be modified and saved under a new screen name

by the user.

N. A data-entry screen shall be assignable to a system user for automatic display when

that user logs in. It shall be possible to define default screens that always appear

when a particular user logs onto the system. The system software shall allow an

authorized user to select an appropriate screen layout from a menu on a per-client

interface basis.

O. The user interface shall provide windows and other controls for viewing system

cardholder activity; monitoring and acknowledging alarms; and monitoring and

controlling input points, relays and door configurations.

P. The software shall offer the following standard features:

1. Access control card customization.

2. Block Add and Block Update for Cardholders with Cards.

3. Global Access Groups.

4. Antipassback, Areas, Occupancy.

5. Use Limits.

6. Holidays and Time Zones.

7. Daylight Saving Time.

8. Duress Codes.

9. Selectable Card Formats.

10. User Levels.

11. Photo recall.

12. Alarm Acknowledgements.

13. Door Group and Access Area Customization.

14. Global Commands.

15. Reports and Journals – Audit Trails.

16. SMTP Mail Server.








Q. Transaction Printing: The software shall provide the user with the capability to

configure, customize and generate reports of system transactions, hardwareand

access-setting configurations, cardholders, etc. It shall be possible to output

generated reports to a local or network printer or in any of the following ways

(output file types in parentheses): Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets (.xls), Adobe®

PDFs (.pdf), Microsoft® Word documents (.doc), Crystal Report files (.rpt), or

Rich Text files (.rtf) openable by most word processors. Users shall be able to export

the generated report using an intuitive file name of their own devising. When the

report is displayed on the screen, the generated report shall appear in a window with

a toolbar that will allow the user to scroll to the next or a previous page, go directly

to the first or last page, jump to a specific page of the report, search for user-

specified text anywhere in the report, and zoom in or out on the report page.

Systems unable to provide such print previewing capabilities shall be unacceptable.

R. Online Manual: Selectable from the main menu of the software shall be a printable

portable document file containing detailed instructions and background on the setup

and operation of the system hardware components and a context- sensitive Help

manual.

S. Tech Support Utility: A software application shall be provided with the access-

control software as a utility that can be used to simplify contacting the

manufacturer’s Technical Support Department. This utility shall be a fill-in-the-

blank electronic form allowing the entry of a description of the problem and the

optional, automatic attachment of the database for submission for troubleshooting

purposes.

T. Combination Keypad / Proximity Readers: Keypad Readers designated on the

drawings as ‘KPR’ shall be programmed to accept either a valid proximity card or a

valid PIN number for access.

2.3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

A. Provide 2-Reader Control Board with the following features:

1. On board 10/100Base-T Ethernet connection

2. On board tamper switch connector

3. On board power loss sensor

4. Lithium ion battery for RAM and clock backup

5. (2) card reader ports

6. (4) relay outputs

7. (8) supervised or non-supervised inputs








8. IDenticard #PREM-CTLR2RDR

B. CARD READER INTERFACES

1. Provide Two Reader Interface Modules as called out on the Drawings.

Final card reader port count shall include a minimum of 2 spares.

Install in access control panels. Provide Reader Interface Modules with

the following features:

a. On board tamper switch connector

b. On board power loss sensor

c. (2) card reader ports

d. (4) relay outputs

e. (8) supervised or non-supervised inputs

2. IDenticard #PREM-BRD2DR

2.4 POWER SUPPLIES

A. Provide two (2) power supplies for the access control system equipment

enclosures. Each power supply shall have a 120 VAC 20 amp input. Power

supply shall have (8) 12VDC independently controlled PTC-protected outputs.

Outputs can be wired to operate in fail safe and/or fail-secure modes. Provide

suitable NEMA 1 steel enclosure, as supplied by the manufacturer.

1. IDenticard #PREM-PS10ALT

B. For the field mounted electric strikes, provide one (1) power supply suitable for

120 VAC 20 amp input. Power supply shall have eight (8) PTC protected Fail-

Safe and/or Fail-Secure 12VDC or 24VDC power outputs and the following

features: 10 amp of continuous supply current, Class 2 Rated power limited

output, Filtered and electronically regulated outputs, Short circuit and thermal

overload protection and NEMA 1 enclosure.

1. Altronix #AL1024ULACM

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Provide quantities and sizes of NEMA 1 enclosures for all boards and controllers.

Provide all necessary mounting plates and accessories.

1. IDenticard #PREM-ENCLG

2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES








A. Refer to specification 087100 DOOR HARDWARE.

1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-

rated devices.

2.7 ELECTRIC HINGES

A. Refer to specification 087100 DOOR HARDWARE.

2.8 REQUEST TO EXIT MOTION DETECTORS

A. Provide adjustable Passive Infrared RX motion detectors, wall or ceiling mount, 12

to 24V AC/DC, with power/operating LED, with cords, cables, mounting

hardware, and masking seals, as required for a complete system. Make all

adjustments required for proper operation.

B. Provide white or black housing, as required to match the surrounding finishes.

Coordinate color selection with the Architect.

C. Acceptable product shall be:

1. Bosch DS160i

D. Refer to specification 087100 DOOR HARDWARE for additional information.

2.9 CARD READERS (RDR)

A. Provide 13.56 MHz contactless and 125 kHz proximity card readers as shown on

the Drawings.

B. The card reader shall be a single unit of weatherproof construction with epoxy-

potted electronics. It shall be possible to mount the reader indoors or outdoors on a

metal or plastic single-gang outlet box. The reader shall have an independently

controlled tricolor LED and an independently controlled audio tone to advise user

that a credential has been read and data has been transmitted to the controller. The

reader shall also have a self-test mode to demonstrate the operational readiness of the

LED, audio tone and data lines. The reader shall be capable of indicating to the

controller panel at approximately one-minute intervals that the reader is functioning

normally.

C. The reader shall have a typical read range of up to 5 inches (up to 12.7 centimeters).

The card reader shall be listed under UL 294 and have the following certifications:

FCC Part 15, I-ETS 300 330 and CE marked per directive 89/336/EEC. The reader

shall communicate using Wiegand™ protocol and be compatible with all standard

access control systems.

D. Shall read the following formats:








1. 125 kHZ – HID, Indala or AWID Proximity

2. 13.56 MHz – iCLASS, DESFire-ISO 15693 CSN (MyD, ICODE, Tag-it),

ISO 4443A CSN (MIFARE) and US Government PIV

E. UL94 Polycarbonate and FCC certified for use in the United States.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. HID RP40 multiCLASS (920LTNNEK00017)

2.10 CARDS

A. Provide a quantity of fifty (50) 26-bit, 125 KHz credit-card size proximity cards, by

the same manufacturer and compatible with the proximity card readers for the

project, with the following minimum requirements:

1. Passive (no battery required) proximity with integrated circuit connected to

an antenna.

2. Infinite number of reads.

3. ABS plastic.

4. Suitable for use with self-adhesive photo pouches or PVC labels.

2.11 COMBINATION KEYPAD/READERS (KPR)

A. Multi-technology contactless smart card reader with integrated keypad shall read

access control data from both 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards. The

multi-technology contactless smart card reader shall be optimally designed for use in

access control applications that require reading both 125 kHz Proximity and 13.56

MHz contactless smart cards by providing:

1. Unique read selection that enables iCLASS, proximity, or both

technologies at the same time.

2. Dual authentication of identity supported through combined contactless

card presentation and entry of personal identification number (PIN)

through an integrated 12-key keypad.

3. A migration platform to upgrade from the most popular 125 kHz proximity

technologies to iCLASS by reading both 125 kHz proximity technology and

13.56 MHz contactless smart card technology.

4. Guaranteed compatibility to read all HID data formats and ensuring card-

to-reader interoperability in multi-location installations and multi-

card/reader populations when used with Genuine HID products








5. Secure access control data exchange between the smart card and the

reader utilizing key diversification and mutual authentication routines.

6. Universal compatibility with most access control systems.

7. Ease of installation through identical wiring methods as legacy 125 KHz

proximity readers.

8. The ability to read expanded smart card data format lengths up to 144

bits.

9. Backwards compatibility with legacy 125 KHz proximity access control

formats (E.g. 26-bit, 32, 35-bit, 37-bit, 56-bit, and HID Corporate 1000

formats).

10. Optimal read range and read speed for increased access control

throughput.

11. A full product line of compatible products including single- and multi-

technology readers, readers with integral keypads and LCD displays, long

range readers, biometric readers, read/write readers, card programmers, and

cards.

12. Global, off-the-shelf availability.

13. Built in compatibility across the product line without the need of special

programming.

14. Product construction suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications.

15. Customizable behavior for indicator lights and audible tones.

B. The contactless smart card reader shall provide a 12-position weatherproof keypad

featuring a waterproof silicon boot, vandal-resistant metal keycaps, and backlit

keypad numbering.

C. The weatherproof keypad shall provide a raised tactile mark on the “5” keycap for

visually impaired users.

D. Keypad lighting shall be configurable as “Always On”, Always Off”, “Triggeredby

Card Read”, or “Triggered by Key Press”.

E. The contactless card reader keypad output shall provide a variety of keypad

outputs to ensure compatibility with virtually any access control panel. Keypad

output settings shall include:

1. Buffer one key, no parity, 4 bit message

2. Buffer one key, add compliment, 8 bit message (Dorado)








3. Buffer six keys and add parity

4. Buffer one key and add parity

5. Buffer one to five keys (Standard 26 bit output)

6. Buffer four keys and add parity

7. Single Key buffering

8. Local PIN Verify.

F. Contactless smart card reader shall be fully compliant with Restriction of Hazardous

Substances directive (RoHS) restricting the use of specific hazardous materials

found in electrical and electronic products. The substances banned under RoHS are

lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), cadmium (Cd), hexavalent chromium (CrVI),

polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE).

G. Contactless smart card reader shall provide universal compatibility with most access

control systems by outputting card data in compliance with the SIA AC-01 Wiegand

standard.

H. Contactless smart card reader shall be available to provide Clock and Data

output.

I. Contactless smart card reader shall allow for secure installation practicesthrough

mounting methods utilizing tamper resistant screws.

J. Contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability to transmit an alarm signal via

and integrated optical tamper switch if an attempt is made to remove the reader from

the wall. The tamper switch shall be programmable to provide a selectable action to

provide a selectable action compatible with various tamper communication schemes

provided by access control panel manufacturers. The selectable action shall include

one of the following:

1. The reader open collector line changes from a high state (5V) to alow

state (Ground).

2. During a tamper state, the “I’m Alive” message is inverted.

K. Contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability for mounting to standard

electrical boxes through the use of universal international mounting holes.

L. Contactless smart card reader shall be provided with a full potted assembly.

M. The contactless smart card reader shall provide customizable reader behavior

options either from the factory, or defined in the field through the use of pre-

configured command cards. Reader behavior programming options shall include:








1. LED & Audio configurations

2. Disablement of reading specific card technologies (typically used after

migration is complete to new technology).

3. ISO 14443A CSN (E.g. MIFARE/DESFire) output configuration.

4. Wiegand output spacing and timing.

5. Keypad output and backlighting.

N. Contactless smart card reader shall provide the following programmable

audio/visual indication:

1. An audio beeper shall provide various tone sequences to signify: access

granted, access denied, power up, and diagnostics.

2. A high-intensity light bar shall provide clear visual status

(red/green/amber).

O. Contactless smart card reader shall be designed for low current operation to enable

migration from most legacy proximity applications without the need to replace

existing access control panels and/or power supplies. Contactless smart card power

requirements shall be:

1. Operating voltage: 5 – 16 VDC, reverse voltage protected. Linear power

supply recommended.

2. Current requirements: 85 mA AVG, 116 mA PEAK @ 12 VDC

P. Contactless smart card reader shall meet the following physical specifications: 1.

Dimensions: 3.3” x 4.8” x 1.05” (8.4 cm x 12.2 cm x 2.7 cm)

2. Weight: 9.1 oz (258 g)

3. Material: UL94 Polycarbonate

4. Plastics: Consist of two-piece design with mounting plate and combined

keypad reader housing/reader body (totaling two-pieces). Keypad reader

housing snaps onto mounting plate and is secured with a screw.

5. Color: Black or Charcoal Gray as approved by the project architect.

Q. Contactless smart card reader shall meet the following environmental

specifications:

1. Operating temperature: -31 to 150 degrees F (-35 to 65 degrees C)

2. Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing








3. Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments

a. Certified rating of IP55

R. Contactless smart card reader cabling requirements shall be:

1. Cable distance: (Wiegand or Clock & Data): 500 feet (150m)

2. Cable type: 5-conductor #22 AWG

3. Standard reader termination: 18” (0.5m) cable pigtail

S. The Contactless smart card reader shall provide a lifetime warranty against

defects in materials and workmanship.

T. Manufacturer

1. HID Global multiCLASS RPK40 (921LTNNEK00017)

2.12 ARM / DISARM CARD READERS (ARM)

A. Provide 13.56 MHz contactless and 125 kHz proximity arm/disarm card readers as

shown on the Drawings.

B. Reads

1. 125 kHZ – HID, Indala or AWID Proximity

2. 13.56 MHz – iCLASS, DESFire-ISO 15693 CSN (MyD, ICODE, Tag-it),

ISO 4443A CSN (MIFARE) and US Government PIV

C. UL94 Polycarbonate

D. FCC certified for use in the United States.

E. Manufacturer

1. HID RP40 multiCLASS (920LTNNEK00017)

2.13 KEY SWITCH OVERRIDE (KSO)

A. Provide UL listed key switch override, for 1-1/4” or 1-1/8” mortise cylinder, with 5

amp rated SPDT plunger switch and 12/24VDC bi-color LED.

B. Provide stainless steel 630/US32D single gang faceplate.

C. Plunger switch shall have integral backing bracket for 1-1/4” or 1-1/8” mortise

cylinder. Provide mortise cylinder per the requirements of specification 087100.

D. Manufacturer








1. Securitron Part # MKA

2.14 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES (DPS)

A. Doors at locations shown on the Contract Drawings shall be furnished with U.L

listed balanced magnetic contact switches (door position switches). Each switch

shall have 120 VAC, 1.25A; 30 VAC, .5A hermetically sealed contacts, a life

expectancy of 10,000,000 cycles and be suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.

Operating temperature shall be –40 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. Provide recessed magnetic door contact switches in new man door frames.

Provide recessed door magnets in new doors and test for proper operation.

C. The switch shall be suitable for use in an open and/or closed loop. The switch shall

be the wide gap version. The end-of-line resistor shall be factory-installed in the

switch housing. The switch shall be a single pole, double throw (S.P.D.T.) type

switch.

D. Provide an individual door contact in each door leaf, as shown.

E. In all new doors and frames, the door contact (DC) shall be fully concealed within

the doorframe and header and be installed in such a way that no wiring is exposed.

F. Acceptable products shall be:

1. GRI 8080-TWG-B

2. Honeywell (Ademco) 958

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide all Security equipment being furnished under the Contract unless

otherwise noted. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendations.

B. All software components shall be upgraded free of charge during the first year

after final acceptance of the system by the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall perform all setting, adjustment and programming required for a

complete and operational surveillance system as directed by the Owner and the

Engineer.








3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to beginning work at doors, inspect the doors, frames and hardware for

conditions which would prevent the proper operation of the control equipment.

Remove all burrs in door or frame openings that may damage cable jackets.

Provide protective inserts in all door and frame openings for protection of the

cable jacket.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide dedicated, prefabricated controller enclosures for each applicable floor at the

locations shown on the drawings. Do not share an enclosure between floors.

Enclosures shall only serve the floor on which they are located.

B. Do not install or mount any Access Control Equipment in the ceiling above a door

(unless specifically shown on the drawings) or outside the rooms or locations shown

on the drawings. Cabling from all door hardware and access control devices shall be

routed through the NEMA 1 junction box at the door and home run to the access

control field panel or RIM located at the designated central point on each floor, as

shown on the drawings.

C. Provide 3/4” fire-retardant plywood (sized as required or as noted on the

drawings) at the designated panel locations for mounting all equipment and

power supply boxes or enclosures.

D. Mount all prefabricated controller enclosures and their ancillary power supply

equipment, door hardware interfaces, etc. at the central locations shown on the

drawings.

E. Refer to the Electrical Drawings for identification of 120VAC circuits for all power

supplies and equipment.

F. Install devices according to standards referenced in these specifications. Install per

device manufacturer’s written instructions. Mount as specified and as

recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Door hardware will be furnished by the Contractor responsible part of the Division

08 Openings work. Installation of power supplies and connection to electrically

operated hardware shall be provided under this section.

3.4 TESTING

A. Provide a written testing plan for review prior to beginning final testing. Test each

and every component installed to ensure proper configuration and operation. Test

all control panels, connected field boards, readers, door devices and door hardware

to ensure that the system operates as specified. Use the approved access control








operational scenarios for final operational testing of the system. The Owner reserves

the right to have a representative present during any portion or all of the testing

process. Notify the Owner a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to starting any testing

so testing can be witnessed.

3.5 DOCUMENTATION

A. Before conducting a final inspection, the Contractor shall perform a series of system

installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal

describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for component testing.

3.6 CABLING

A. Cable installation shall comply with EIA/TIA-569, "Commercial Building Standard

for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements listed below are minimum requirements and shall be

exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

1. RS-232 Cabling: Provide at a maximum distance of 50’ (15 m).

2. RS-485 Cabling: Provide at a maximum distance of 4000’ (1220 m).

3. Card Readers and Keypads:

a. Provide number of conductor pairs recommended by

manufacturer for the functions specified.

b. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, provide

No. 18 AWG minimum.

c. If required for greater distances, provide "extender" or "repeater"

modules recommended by manufacturer of the Controller.

d. Provide minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and

keypads.

e. Provide minimum No. 12 AWG cable from Controller to electrically

powered mortise and all other solenoid-based locks. Do not exceed

200’ (75 m). For all other locks, follow vendor’s direction.

f. Provide minimum No. 14 AWG AC power wire from transformer to

Controller, with a maximum distance of 25’ (8 m).

C. All power and access control cables installed exterior to the building shall be

installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit, minimum size 3/4”.

D. All distribution cables installed in interior locations where exposed or subject to

damage or where installed in walls or non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in








EMT. Flexible metal conduit, minimum size 1/2”, shall be permitted (in interior

locations and where permitted by the NEC) for final connections to outlet boxes

installed in suspended acoustical tile ceilings, and for final connections to outlet

boxes in door frames.

E. All distribution cables installed above accessible suspended acoustic tile

ceilings shall be installed in conduit, cable tray or J hooks.

F. 120V power shall be run in a separate EMT conduit (3/4” minimum) from low

voltage cabling.

G. All cables shall be tagged in accordance with the component labeling plan, as

approved by the Engineer.

H. Cables shall be a minimum size of Number 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (STP).

Increase the cable size as needed to compensate for distance. All cables shall be

plenum rated.

I. No cable shall be visible or exposed to any physical damage.

3.7 LABELING

A. Refer to Specification Section “Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and

Security” for requirements.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "GROUNDING AND BONDING."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Power and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock

hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,

cross talk and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from

power system and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.

3. Backbone Cable: Provide from signal ground bus to signal ground

terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet.









A. After installation has been completed, demonstrate the operation of each door

system.

B. The Intelligent Controller and/or Channel Expander shall communicate with the

Campus’s Central Monitoring System located at the Pine Street Building.

C. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer

recommendations.

3.10 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and

marred finish to match original finish. Clean devices using methods and materials


B. Make all final adjustments to the electrical operation of all controlled hardware,

per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided to designated personnel on all system operations. Included

shall be at a minimum; operate equipment correctly, make changes, test system,

gather performance statistics, and perform maintenance or trouble shooting

procedures, and additional manufacturer’s recommended training.

B. For the card access system, provide a minimum of six (6) persons from the

Owner’s staff with the training necessary to enable them to program cards, assign

rights, modify the configuration of the system and perform basic troubleshooting.

The training shall be a minimum of 4 hours.

C. All training shall be provided by Manufacturer’s direct factory trained engineers or

by Contractor personnel specifically authorized by the manufacturer to conduct

training. All training shall be documented and recorded for future referral. Include

cost to provide 5 copies of that training recording in DVD formats.


A. Refer to Division 28 Section “Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and

Security”.

3.13 TYPICAL ACCESS CONTROL OPERATIONAL SCENARIOS

A. Provide configuration and programming necessary to set up card database,

assign privileges, set up door groups, access groups, schedules, alarm messages

and reports.








B. Operational scenarios listed below are typical and intended to demonstrate the

order of magnitude required for programming each scenario and should not be

construed as complete, exhaustive or sufficient.

C. Main entrance card reader, keypad and time-schedule controlled entrance

(normal business hours – main entrance is open to public):

1. At the pre-programmed time in the morning, the access control system

closes the relay to release the electric strike, mask the door

contacts and to enable the door to be opened manually. Visitors approach

the door and enter normally.

D. Main entrance card reader, keypad and time-schedule controlled entrance (after

hours valid keypad entry or card access):

1. Person with valid access card presents card to card reader at the controlled

entrance or Person with valid PIN number enters number on keypad. Access

control system closes the relay to release the electric strike, mask the door

contacts and to enable the door to be opened. Access control system

activates the CCTV system to attach a video clip from the local camera to the

access event. Person pulls the door handle manually and enters the Building.

The door closers automatically close the doors after the preset delay. The

access control system verifies the closed status of the door through the door

contacts and opens the relay to re-secure the door.

E. Main entrance card reader, keypad and time-schedule controlled entrance

(egress – normal business hours – main entrance is open to public):

1. At the pre-programmed time in the morning, the access control system

closes the relay to release the electric strike and mask the door contacts.

Visitor approaches the door from the inside, presses the panic bar and exits

the building. The door closer automatically closes the door after the preset

delay.

F. Main entrance card reader, keypad and time-schedule controlled entrance

(egress – after hours):

1. Person approaches the controlled opening is detected by the request to exit

motion detector. Access control system masks the door contact, so that no

alarm is reported. Person presses the panic bar on the door and egresses the

building normally via the mechanical operation of thedoor. The electric

strike remains secure since the mechanical function of the hardware

permits free egress at all times. The door closer automatically closes the

door. After a preset delay, the access control system verifies the closed

status of the door through the door contacts and returns the door to the








monitored state.

G. Card reader controlled opening:

1. Person with valid access card presents card to card reader at the controlled

entrance. Access control system closes the relay to release the electric

strike, mask the door contacts and to enable the door to be opened. Access

control system activates the CCTV system to attach a video clip from the

local camera to the access event. Person pulls the door handle manually

and enters the space. The door closers automatically close the doors after

the preset delay. The access control system verifies the closed status of the

door through the door contacts and opens the relay to re-secure the door.

H. Card reader controlled opening – egress:









monitored state.

I. Keypad controlled opening:

1. Person with valid PIN number enters number on keypad. Access control

system closes the relay to release the electric strike, mask the door contacts

and to enable the door to be opened. Access control system activates the

CCTV system to attach a video clip from the local camera to the access

event. Person pulls the door handle manually and enters the Building. The

door closers automatically close the doors after the preset delay. The access

control system verifies the closed status of the door through the door contacts

and opens the relay to re-secure the door.

J. Keypad controlled opening – egress:
















monitored state.

K. Arm/Disarm Reader and LCD Display:

1. Arm/disarm card reader shall be programmed to arm and disarm the alarm

zones for the facility. The alarm status shall be displayed on the LCD

monitor in the Watch Room. At a minimum, the zones shall include:

1) the entire facility perimeter, 2) the Apparatus bay and ancillary rooms

and 3) the support rooms, including bunk rooms, dining, etc.

L. Key Switch Override:

1. All exterior doors controlled by electric strike or electric trim shall be

programmed for a single point key switch override. The override shall

secure all controlled exterior doors regardless of the access control

system schedule.







ELECTRONIC SURVEILLANCE


SECTION 28 23 00 – ELECTRONIC SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Refer to Specification Section “COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY” for project summary and work included information.

B. This section includes requirements for the following:

1. Cameras, Lenses, Housings, Mounts.

2. CCTV Network Video Recorder (NVR).

3. CCTV Cables.

4. CCTV Power Supplies.

5. Network Switches.

6. Equipment Racks and Accessories.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section:

1. Division 28 Section "COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY.”

2. Division 28 Section “CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FORELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit all information requested as identified herein.

B. Provide the technical data cut sheets for the products proposed and detail

drawings identifying the following.

1. Cameras (interior and exterior).

2. Lenses.

3. Camera housings (interior and exterior).








4. Network video recorders (NVR) and associated equipment, including

software.

5. Network switches, patch panels, plug strips, cable management.

6. Racks and cabinets.

7. Category 6 UTP and low voltage power cables.

8. Power supplies.

9. Mounting brackets and details.

10. Miscellaneous accessories.

11. Console and Rack layouts.

12. Wiring schematics.

13. Cabling routes, pathways, types, terminations and labeling.

14. Configuration files.

15. Test reports.

16. Training manuals.

17. Record drawings.

18. O&M manuals.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit all information requested under Division 01 Specification ”TECHNICAL

SUBMITTALS” and as identified herein.

B. The camera matrix shall be updated as required. This includes information

regarding camera, lens, location/view, power, matrix port, housing, cable

pathway and routing.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section covers the installation, control and operation of all new cameras, digital

video recording, and all other appurtenances comprising the surveillance system for

the project.

B. Provide CCTV cameras, lenses, housings, mounts, brackets, boxes, etc., quantities

as required for a complete installation of a 100% functional system as outlined

below.

C. Provide new multi-camera isolation power supplies at locations shown on the

drawings. Provide low voltage power cables from the power supplies to each fixed

and pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) camera location. Provide a fuse-protected, low- voltage








circuit for each individual PTZ camera. Provide low voltage type CL3P cables from

CCTV power supplies to each individual camera location shown on the drawings.

D. Provide new layer 2/3 network switches, patch panels, patch cords, plug strips and

terminations. Provide CAT6 UTP CMP cable to each individual camera location

shown on the drawings. Verify network components with the County DIT prior to

ordering.

E. Provide new network video recorder(s) and mount on the wall in the

Communication (Comm) Room, as indicated on the drawings.

F. The system shall be as specified herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings

and/or as approved by the Owner and the Engineer.

G. The system shall be delivered with the most current version of compatible

software, firmware and hardware. Provide free software upgrades for the first

year after system cutover.

1.6 CCTV SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the project drawings and as identified herein.

B. System shall provide high-quality delivery and processing of IP-based video and

control data using standard Ethernet-based networks. All camera signals shall be

compressed, encoded, and delivered onto the network for processing and control by the IP

video-management software.

C. System shall have seamless integration of all video surveillance and control

functions.

D. Graphical user interface software shall manage all IP-based video matrix switching

and camera control functions, alarm monitoring and control, and recording and

archive/retrieval management. IP system shall also be capable of integrating into

larger system environments.

E. System design shall include all necessary compression software for high-

performance, dual-stream, MPEG-2/MPEG-4 video. Unit shall provide connections

for all video cameras, camera PTZ control data, bidirectional audio, discreet sensor

inputs, and control system outputs.

F. Camera system units shall be ruggedly built and designed for extreme adverse

environments, complying with NEMA Type environmental standards.

G. Provide all mounting hardware, fasteners and appurtenances for a complete

installation.

H. The installation shall be neat and ergonomic, no cables exposed, with no need to

move equipment in order to use it.

I. Provide ground loop isolation and any corrections required by ground loop








problems associated with the system.

1.7 CCTV SYSTEM CABLING

A. Interior and exterior cameras shall transmit signals over plenum rated Category 6 UTP

cables.

B. Type CL3P cables (minimum size Number 18 AWG) shall be run from the power

supplies located in the CCTV head end room (usually the Comm Room) to each

exterior camera to provide power (or as shown on the drawings).

C. Refer to Specification 280513 “CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY” for additional cabling

information.

1.8 POWER SUPPLIES

A. Provide power supplies as required and as approved by the camera

manufacturer.

1.9 INTEGRATION

A. Provide configuration and programming to integrate the cameras with the access

control system for “screen pops” and increased frame rate recording on alarm.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. P.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Ensure that each individual component provided is compatible with and can

integrate with the CCTV system as a whole. Provide shop drawings showing

product interconnection of all components.

B. All parts shall be UL listed, or listed by an equal testing laboratory approved by the

Engineer, for the application and intended use.

2.2 Camera Types & Minimum Technical Specification

A. Both fixed-field of view Dome and controllable pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras, Fisheye,

Muti-Imager/Multi-Sensor may be used. Cameras may be ceiling-mounted or attached to

a wall or pole, and are typically contained within an enclosure. Cameras are selected

based on the specifics of the scene being viewed and the mounting location.

2.3 Outdoor Cameras

For aesthetical reasons only outdoor PTZ, outdoor dome, and outdoor Multi-Directional cameras that

comply with the following specifications, are to be used on the perimeters of Loudoun County facilities.








PTZ Camera

XNP 6400RW 2MEGAPIXEL 40x IR WIPER PTZ CAMERA

1.3.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturer: Hanwha Techwin

B. Model XNP-6400RW

C. Model SBP-156CMW (Ceiling Mount)

D. Model SBP-300NB (Installation Box)

E. Model SBP-300WM1 (Wall Mount)

F. Model SBP-300KM (Corner Mount Adapter)

G. Alternates: None

A. This camera shall support multi-streaming technologies, transferring real-time high

resolution images. It shall support 60fps at all available resolution when using H.264 or

H.265.

B. The camera shall be of a PTZ dome type suitable for outdoor installation. The camera shall

be ivory and black in appearance.

C. The camera shall provide 4.5~170mm (Optical 40x) (Digital 32x) IR corrected optical

zoom with 16x digital zoom. It shall support SD, SDHC and SDXC memory and Bi-

directional audio.

D. The camera shall feature an Adaptive Infrared illumination system with 2 LEDs giving a

viewable distance of 200m (1148.29ft) in complete darkness.

E. The camera shall feature a motorized pan and tilt mechanism capable of panning at 500°/s

and tilt movement at 300°/s under preset mode. Under manual mode it shall be possible to

move at maximum speed of 250°/s

2.3.5.1 16 CHANNEL NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR)








REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations

1. ARP – Address Resolution Protocol

2. DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

3. DNR – Digital Noise Reduction

4. DDNS – Dynamic Domain Name Server

5. fps - frames per second

6. GUI – Graphical User Interface

7. HDD – Hard Disk Drive

8. HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol

9. ICMP – Internet Control Message Protocol

10. IGMP - Internet Group Management Protocol

11. IP - Internet Protocol

12. iSCSI – Internet Small Computer System Interface

13. JBOD – Just a Bunch of Disks

14. JPEG - Joint Photographic Experts Group

15. MJPEG - Motion JPEG

16. MP - Megapixel

17. MPEG - Moving Pictures Experts Group

18. NAS – Network Attached Storage

19. NTP - Network Time Protocol

20. POS – Point of Sale

21. PPPoE – Pont to Point Protocol over Ethernet

22. RAID – Redundant Array of Independent Disks (Drives)

23. RTP - Real-Time Transport Protocol

24. RTCP – Real-Time Control Protocol

25. RTSP - Real-Time Streaming Protocol

26. SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

27. SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol

28. SSL – Secure Sockets Layer

29. TCP - Transmission Control Protocol

30. UDP - User Datagram Protocol

31. UPnP – Universal Plug and Play








32. VMS - Video Management System

33. PoS – Point of Sales

34. VA – Video Analytics

35. PnP – Plug and Play

B. Definitions

1. CIF Resolution – 352 x 288 pixels

2. JBOD - a collection of hard disks that have not been configured to act as a

redundant array of independent disks (RAID) array.

3. GOV (Group of Video object planes) - A set of video frames for H.264 and H.265

compression, indicating a collection of frames from the initial I-Frame (key frame) to

the next I-Frame. GOV consists of 2 kinds of frames: I-Frame and P-Frame.

4. WiseStream – Smart Codec that controls quantization parameter in H.265 and

H.264 to efficiently manage bitrate of the video stream and reduce the storage

required.

5. Dynamic GOV – Dynamic assignment of GOV length based on the complexity of the

scene to efficiently manage bitrate of the video stream and reduce the storage required.

6. ARB (Auto Recovery Backup) – Automatic backup mechanism that enables

WiseNet cameras to store videos on to SD card during the network failure and

stream it to the storage device after the network is recovered.

C. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

1. Manufacturer’s printed or electronic data sheets

2. Manufacturer’s installation and operation manuals

3. Warranty documentation

2.3.5.2 Video Recording Server(s) – NVR

Wisenet WAVE optimized 2U rack server








EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturer: Hanwha Techwin

B. Model WRR-Q-A201W

C. Alternates: None

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The WISENET WAVE WRR Network Video Recorder (“NVR”) shall record video and audio up

to 470 Mbps and send data from video cameras to a hard disk array of 1 -12 HDD’s within a rack

mountable format and enable playback of video and audio from the hard disk array.

B. The NVR will be pre-configured with Wisenet WAVE VMS and preloaded with four (4) Professional

licenses to ensure quick and easy development with minimum setup time.

1. Additional camera licenses shall be WAVE VMS

a. WAVEPRO-01 – Additional Camera License (Single Channel)

b. WAVEPRO-16 – Additional Camera License (16 Channel)

C. The NVR shall provide a remote monitoring environment for video and audio over the network using

a remote computer.

D. NVR will use a SQLite – a free database technology – included in the installation package

E. The NVR shall have the following further general properties:

1. Camera search and discovery: The NVR shall have the capability to search the network for

connected compatible cameras via Onvif Profile S or Hanwha Techwin’s native driver.

a. Cameras are searched or discovered, each camera will be automatically registered

and current camera information (fps, days of recording) displayed.

b. Cameras are searched or discovered, the NVR shall provide the ability to selectively

register as many as cameras can be found.

2. The NVR shall support WiseStream, Wisestream II and Dynamic GOV, a smart codec

used by WiseNet IP cameras.

3. The NVR shall support dual monitor out.

4. The NVR shall support server backup if multiple servers are in the hive for failover for

redundancy.

5. Recording and playback functions:








a. Support recording 128 dual streams (256 streams) from 352 x 288 (CIF) up to

4000 X 3000 (12 MP) per channel

b. 470 Mbps network camera recording throughput

c. Simultaneous playback capability up to 128 video channels

d. H.265, H.264, and MJPEG compression support

e. NVR shall record and stream AAC, PCM, g726, and MPS audio

f. View status of internal connected storage hardware

g. Set recording schedules

6. Set up triggered recording based on:

a. sensor (input) detection

b. camera event, analytics based in Wisenet Cameras

c. Motion Detection

d. video loss detection

7. Available actions upon reaching full HDD storage capacity:

a. stop recording

b. overwrite

c. Search recorded data by time, event trigger, motion alarms, events

F. Storage

1. Up to 12, 8TB HDDs in JBOD configuration for a maximum of 96TB.

2. USB connection for memory/storage device for video clip backup and settings export

G. Live view:

1. Live, remote monitoring using Wisenet WAVE supplied viewe

2. Live Streams: H.265, H.264, MJPEG

3. Offline Media: AVI MKV MP4 MOV TS M2TS MPEG MPG FLV WMV 3GP JPG

PNG GIF BMP TIFF

4. Configure and exercise functions for connected PTZ cameras, including functionality

with compatible USB joystick

5. Capture and save snapshot images

6. Record current video in AVI format,

H. Remote access:

1. Multicast or unicast

a. Simultaneous unicast access is unlimited

b. Simultaneous multicast access is unlimited

2. Mobile device:








a. Supported platforms

b. Andriod

c. IOS

3. Supported remote users:

a. Unlimited amount either live or playback

4. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) support

I. VGA and High Definition (HDMI) local monitor outputs live viewing, playback, & backup

functions

J. ONVIF Profile S compliance

K. Alarm connections: none on server

1. Use of I/O software module to support I/O control

L. System

1. Processor: 1 x AMD® EPYC® Processor Memory: 16 GB DDR4

2. Operating Systems: Windows 10 IoT Enterprise

3. USB Ports: 6x USB 3.0(rear), 2x USB 3.0(front)

4. Video Output: 1x Display Port (rear), 1x HDMI (rear), 1x DVI (rear)

5. Other ports: 3.5mm audio in/out, 1x SPDIF out

6. Keyboard: Included

7. Mouse: Included

8. Sliding Rail Kit: Included

M. Video

1. Compression: H.265, H.264, MJPEG

N. Recording

1. Channel capability: no limit but recommended to use Wisenet WAVE Calculator

for maximum

2. Bit Rate: Up to 470 Mbps

3. Resolution range: 352 x 288 - 4000 X 3000

O. Events and Response Actions

1. Triggers:

a. Motion

b. video loss

c. event defined by camera

2. Response Actions:








a. Record

b. E-mail

c. activate PTZ preset

d. Event Trigger program

e. Sound output

3. Playback

a. Number of simultaneous channels: not limited

b. Bandwidth: 470 Mbps

4. OS Drive

a. OS Drive Bays 1 – 256GB SSD internally Mounted

5. Storage

a. Internal

b. Number of HDD’s bays: 1 – 12 Bays

c. Capacity per HDD: 1 – 8 TB

d. RAID 0/1/5/6/10/50/60 +BBU (backup battery unit)

6. External

a. Acceptable types:

b. USB HDD/Flash drive for backup of video clips, firmware update, settings

backup/restore, log export

P. Network

1. Connectivity: 1000 Base-T Ethernet, 2 x RJ-45 connectors

2. Protocols supported:

a. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), Internet Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User

Datagram Protocol (UDP)

b. Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

c. Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Secure HTTP (HTTPS)

d. Network services: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Domain Name System (DNS),

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Network Time Protocol (NTP), Simple

Network Management Protocol (SNMP v1/2c/3 – MIB-2), Universal Plug and Play

(UPnP)

e. Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-Time Control Protocol, Real-Time

Streaming Protocol (RTSP)

f. Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

g. Notifications: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)

h. Remote Access: Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)

3. DDNS – The NVR shall support DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and other publicly

available service offerings.

4. Security features:








a. user password protection with group restrictions

b. IP address filtering - list of allowed or blocked IP addresses

c. HTTPS(SSL) login authentication

d. User access log

e. 802.1x authentication

f. Restriction of all network access/web viewer access

5. Discovery - Manufacturer shall offer a discovery program to identify all devices of his

manufacture on the network, as well as ONVIF Profile S conformant devices.

Q. Alarm/sensor interface:

1. Input (0) : NO or NC, selectable

2. Output (0) : NO or NC, selectable

3. Use of I/O software module to support I/O control

R. Audio

1. Direction: Bi-directional

2. Compression: AAC (16/48KHz), G.711 u-law, G.726 selectable

3. Output: Line level (RCA)

S. Electrical

1. Power: 100 – 240 VAC

2. Power Supply: Redundant

T. Mechanical And Environmental

1. Color Black / Metal

2. Front Bezel Includes front bezel and lock

3. Form Factor 2U Rack Mount Chassis, Sliding rails included

4. Mouse and Keyboard Included

5. Dimensions (W x H x D): 17.2 in. x 3.5 in. x 26 in. (438 mm x 87.0 mm x 660 mm)

6. Weight 30.86 lbs. (14kg)

7. Temperature:

8. Operating and storage: 0° C to 50° C (32° F to 122° F)

9. Humidity: 5% - 85%, RH non-condensing

END OF SECTION






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

SECTION 284621.13 – CONVENTIONAL FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Notification appliances.

5. Device guards.

6. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.


1. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for cables and

conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them

to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, and profiles and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor

sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory

and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery size calculations.

7. Include input/output matrix.

8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

10. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.

11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,

detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.

c. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' control system.

d. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

e. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing zone designation of each

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in

addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and

installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of

detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals

and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in




a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide the "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of

Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" article in the

"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and

equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with

indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.

e. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria.

f. Record copy of site-specific software.

g. Provide the "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing

and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested.

2) Frequency of testing of installed components.

3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.

4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project.

B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.


A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or

components not functioning as designed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service

Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Notifier

B. Noncoded system dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. .

5. Dry system pressure flow switch.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm zone at fire-alarm control unit.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

5. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

6. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

7. Record events in the system memory.

Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

8. Valve supervisory switch.

9. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.

10. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

4. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

6. Break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit.

D. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Annunciate at fire-alarm control unit.

3. Record the event on system printer.

4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021


2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.

a. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events.

b. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system

service.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Display alarm, supervisory, and component status

messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, one line of 40 characters, minimum.

C. Circuits:

1. No Fewer Than four Initiating-Device Circuits:

a. No Fewer Than Two Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm

control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and

detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

F. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm

communicator transmitters shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of the entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the

power-supply module rating.

G. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and

automatic transfer switch.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

H. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or

glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe

appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the

system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be

finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show

visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as

surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-

powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.

3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268.

2.7 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate

of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of

90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test

protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or

nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is

engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and

shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-

alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for

a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be

transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall

initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the

remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,

transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the

following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Zone of the alarm initiating device.

2. Zone of the supervisory signal.

3. Zone of the trouble initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.

7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

9.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,

humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of theWork.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been

permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before

installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.







CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with

requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the

finished floor.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

6. Luminaires: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a luminaire and

not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover

shall remain in place, except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

F. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal

viewing position.

G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind

a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least

6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021

I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in

smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect

hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

B. Connect supervised interface devices to the following devices and systems. Install the interface

device less than 36 inches from the device controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

2. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION


identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground

wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.






CONVENTIONAL FIRE-

ALARM SYSTEMS


07/13/2021


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by a representative the Loudon County fire marshal’s office.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct the visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in Chapter 10 "Fundamentals," Section

10.18.21 "Completion Documents, Preparation."

b. Comply with NFPA 72, Chapter 14, "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance,"

Section 14.3, "Inspection" and the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table; retain

the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with NFPA 72, Chapter 14, "Inspection, Testing, and

Maintenance," Section 14.4 "Testing" and the "Test Methods" Table.

3. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72

and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or

replaced devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,

quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm

system complying with the visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms

developed for initial tests and inspections.







SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protection of existing trees.

2. Clearing and grubbing.

3. Removal of trees and other vegetation.

4. Topsoil stripping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site

disposing of stumps and roots.

B. Tree Protection Zone: The area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected

during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of

groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Topsoil: Friable, clay loam surface soil, found in varying depths.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared

materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees, plantings and other

improvements adjoining the construction that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the Work.








A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,

and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied

or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing

improvements indicated to remain in place.

1. Protect existing improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.

2. Restore existing improvements damaged by clearing operations to their original condition.

C. The conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner

to the extent practical. However, minor variations may occur due to natural occurrences prior to the

start of clearing work.

D. Do not commence site-clearing operations until erosion and sedimentation control measures are in

place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE PROTECTION FENCING

A. Tree protection fencing shall conform to standard and specification 3.38-2 (plastic fence) of the

Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION

A. Install tree protection fencing as indicated. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around the drip line

of individual trees or around the perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, topsoil or other excavated material within the tree

protection zone.

2. Do not permit vehicles or other equipment within the tree protection zone.

3. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash.

B. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting,

breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling

construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or

parking of vehicles within drip line.

C. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat

cut faces with emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant

tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with

earth as soon as possible.







D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction

operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect.

3.2 SITE CLEARING

A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation as required to permit installation of the

Work. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where

such roots and branches obstruct installation of the Work.

B. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation within the clearing limits

indicated.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.

3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless

further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding

6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

C. Selective Clearing: Clear areas designated as “Selective Clearing” of all ground covers, underbrush

and trees less than 6-inches in diameter at breast height. Coordinate extent of material removed with

Architect.

1. Remove trees that appear to be dying or weakening for any reason and at any point during

construction up to and including Substantial Completion at the Architect’s direction.

3.3 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered, but to a minimum of at least 4 inches.

C. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other material.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and

other waste materials.

D. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent

damage to root system.

E. Temporarily stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to

provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.

1. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.

2. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

F. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil in a legal manner off-site.







3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning shall not be permitted on this site for any reason or purpose.

B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials generated by clearing operations from

Owner's property and dispose of in a legal manner off-site.

1. Remove waste materials and debris from the site in a manner to prevent spillage. Pavements and

the area adjacent to the site shall remain free from mud, dirt and debris at all times.

2. Clean up debris resulting from site clearing operations continuously with the progress of the work.

END OF SECTION 31 1000


Philip A. Bolen Memorial Park - Concession and Restroom Facilities

County Project: C02152 Stantec Project: 2270458501

Earthwork 31 2000 - Page 1 of 15 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 31 2000

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 01 2110 and the Bid Form for information concerning required allowances and unit

prices.

C. Refer to Section 31 1000 for topsoil stripping and Section 32 9200 for topsoil placement.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavation, filling, backfilling, and grading indicated and necessary for proper completion of the

work.

2. Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements.

3. Drainage/porous fill course for support of building slabs.

4. Excavating and backfilling of trenches.

5. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried

mechanical and electrical appurtenances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. VDOT approved Job Mix for stone.

B. Imported fill (if required): Submit location of borrow pit and a sample of the soil for approval to the

Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer a minimum of fourteen (14) working days prior to use

C. Geotextile Fabric

D. Copy of Blasting Permit, approved by authorities having jurisdiction, for record purposes.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Removal of all material (except for rock) encountered to design subgrade elevations

indicated for cut areas and to subsoil elevations in fill areas. Excavation also includes subsequent

respreading, moisture conditioning, compaction, and grading of satisfactory materials removed.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Removal of materials beyond the limits indicated in the definition of

“Excavation” without specific direction of Architect.





C. Additional Excavation: Removal, disposal and replacement of materials beyond the limits indicated

in the definition of “Excavation” at the direction of the Architect. Refer to Part 3 of this Section for

requirements of Additional Excavation.

D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth (in cut) or the compacted soil layer (in fill) immediately below

granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

E. Subsoil: The undisturbed earth immediately below the existing topsoil layer.

F. Building Pad: The area extending 10 feet beyond the exterior limits of the building/column footings

and down to undisturbed soils at a one horizontal to one vertical slope.

G. Structures: The area extending a minimum of ten (10) feet beyond the edge of foundations, slabs,

curbs, underground tanks, piping or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below

ground surface.

H. Pavements: The area extending 10 feet beyond the exterior limits of paved areas and down to

undisturbed soils at a one horizontal to one vertical slope. The area extending 3 feet beyond the

exterior limits of walks and down to undisturbed soils at a one horizontal to one vertical slope

I. Subbase Material: Artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel or crushed stone meeting VDOT

specifications. Material type is indicated on the drawings.

J. Drainage/Porous Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel meeting the requirements of VDOT No. 57 Stone.

K. Rock: Hard bed rock, boulders or similar material requiring the use of rock drills and/or explosives

for removal. The criteria for classification of general excavation as rock is any material which cannot

be dislodged by a Caterpillar D-8 Tractor, or equivalent, equipped with a single tooth hydraulically

operated power ripper. The criteria for trench rock shall be that a Caterpillar 345 Backhoe, or

equivalent, with a proper width bucket cannot remove the material.

1.5 ADDITIONAL WORK

A. Paragraph 4.3.4 of General Conditions refers to certain conditions that may require additional

excavation work. This paragraph is further defined herein and, where there are conflicts, is

superseded by this section.

B. Claims for concealed, unknown, or unanticipated subsurface conditions are limited to those

circumstances where:

1. Additional excavation work is required below the contract limits indicated to provide acceptable

bearing for building pad, structures or pavements.

2. Additional excavation work is required to raise, lower, or revise the footings, foundations or other

parts of the building to provide acceptable bearing.

3. Additional excavation work below the utility trench design elevations, for utilities outside the

limits of the building, as required to provide acceptable bearing for the utility.

4. Rock is encountered between existing grade and design subgrade.

C. The risks of concealed, unknown, or unanticipated subsurface conditions (except for rock) from

existing ground surface to the design subgrade elevations in cut areas and to subsoil elevations in fill





areas shall be included in the Contract Amount and shall not be considered as grounds for additional

costs to the Contract. The risks of concealed, unknown, or unanticipated subsurface conditions below

the elevations stated above shall be considered as Additional Excavation.

D. During construction, if concealed, unknown, or unanticipated subsurface conditions are encountered

which require that footings, foundations or other parts of the building be raised, lowered or revised to

provide acceptable bearing for the building or if, outside the building limits, additional depth of utility

trench excavation below the design subgrade or subsoil elevations is required, immediately notify the

Architect upon discovery of such condition prior to disturbing the material encountered.

E. Payment for additional Work

1. Additional excavation shall be counted toward the unit price allowances established in the Bid

Form. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate said unit price allowances prior to the Award

of Contract.

2. Lowering of footings shall be paid for at a negotiated amount. The additional excavation

involved shall be counted toward the unit price allowance.

3. Rock removal, if required, shall be counted toward the unit price allowances established in the

Bid Form. All rock removal required to complete work other than trenching shall be paid for at

the unit price for mass rock removal. Rock payment lines are limited to the following:

a) Two feet outside of concrete work for which forms are required, except footings.

b) One foot outside perimeter of footings, two feet below bottom of footings.

c) In pipe trenches, 6 inches below invert elevation of pipe and 2 feet wider than outside

diameter of pipe, but not less than 3 feet minimum trench width.

d) Outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are required.

e) Under slabs on grade, 6 inches below bottom of concrete slab.

4. No payment will be made for unauthorized excavation.

5. The expense of surveying quantities of rock removal and additional excavation shall be included

in the unit price allowances.

1.6 EARTHWORK BALANCE ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjustments of grades may be allowed with prior written approval of the Architect in order to

accommodate shortfall or surplus of material that may occur. Should adjustments be allowed,

maintenance of designed drainage patterns and required adjustments to drainage structures shall be a

Contract responsibility. No additional payment will be made for these adjustments.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of


B. Environmental Compliance:





1. Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment

Control Handbook for erosion control during earthwork operations.

2. Comply with the permit conditions for all work performed within wetlands.

C. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for an independent Geotechnical testing

and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations.

Cooperate with Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer as required for testing and inspection of work. These

services do not relieve the responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.


A. Site Information: Data concerning subsurface materials or conditions, which are based on test borings,

have been obtained by the Owner for his use in designing the project. This data is contained in a

report titled “Geotechnical Engineering Report, Philip A. Memorial Park Phase III, Leesburg,

Loudoun County, Virginia” by GeoConcepts Engineering, Inc. dated October 14, 2019. This report

is included in this project manual for information only.

1. The accuracy or completeness of the data is not warranted or guaranteed by the Owner or the

Architect/Engineer, and in no event shall be considered part of the Contract Documents. The

Owner and Architect/Engineer expressly disclaim any responsibility for the data as being

representative of the conditions and materials that may be encountered.

B. Bidders and interested parties (prior to receipt of bids) are encouraged to conduct their own soil and

subsurface investigations, examinations, tests, and exploratory borings to determine the nature of the

soil conditions underlying the project site. Contact the Owner's office to make an appointment to

enter the site for the purpose of conducting your own investigation prior to bid.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner of

others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide acceptable temporary utility services.

1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect’s written permission.

3. Existing utilities across or along the line of work are indicated only in an approximate location.

Locate all underground lines and structures. Call “Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001 prior to

construction. If utilities are marked that are not shown on the plans, locate utility vertically

and horizontally and provide information to architect. Repair and correct any damage to

underground lines and structures.

1.9 SAFETY

A. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and

post with warning lights.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction and governing

regulations and standards.





2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork

operations.

B. Work within the road right-of-way shall meet all requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia

Department of Transportation Work Area Protection Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification

groups CL, GC, SC, GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP.

B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification

groups CH, OL, OH, MH, ML and PT.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 4 inches

in any dimension (2 inches for material used in trench backfill), debris, waste, frozen materials,

vegetation and other deleterious matter.

D. Imported material for structural fill shall comply with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups CL,

ML, SC, SM, SP, SW, GC, GM, GP, or GW.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Non-woven Geotextile Fabric (for drainage): Mirafi 140N, or equivalent.

B. Woven Geotextile Fabric (for reinforcement): PROPEX 2002, or equivalent.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork

operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris,

obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Section 02230 "Site

Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.

3.2 DEWATERING





A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from

flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of

foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrade

and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines,

and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits

to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not

use utility trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

B. Should any springs or running water be encountered in the excavation, notify the Architect and

provide discharge by trenches (or other acceptable means) and drain to an appropriate point of

disposal. Provide temporary drainage facilities to minimize the flow of rainwater onto adjacent

property. Repair any damage to property or to subgrade as a result of construction and/or dewatering

(or lack thereof) operations at no additional cost to the Contract. If permanent provision must be made

for disposal of water other than as indicated, the Contract price shall be adjusted.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Blasting may be done only if authorized by the Owner and local authorities having jurisdiction. When

explosives are used, experienced powdermen or persons who are licensed or otherwise authorized to

use explosives shall execute the work. Explosives shall be stored, handled, and used in accordance

with local regulations and with the “Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction” of the

Associated General Contractor of America, Inc. Correct any damage to foundations or other work

caused by use of explosives. Meeting the requirements of the blasting permit, if issued, is a Contract

responsibility.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation consists of removal, placement and disposal of material encountered when establishing

required subgrade or finish grade elevations.

1. Excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground

surface; underground structures, utilities and other items indicated to be demolished and

removed; together with earth and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock or

unauthorized excavation.

B. Rock Excavation: If Rock is encountered the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will verify that the

material qualifies for classification as rock excavation.

1. If rock is encountered in grading, remove to depths as follows:

a) Under surfaced areas, to 6” under the respective subgrade for such areas.

b) Under grass and planted areas - 12” minimum.

c) Under footings – Two feet below bottom of footing, One foot outside of perimeter of footing.

d) Under trenches – 6” below bottom of trench.





2. Contractor shall employ a surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia to calculate the

quantity of material removed as Rock Excavation. The quantity of rock calculated shall not

exceed the volume determined by the payment limits. The Owner’s Project Representative shall

review the quantity calculated within 48 hours of receiving the survey notes.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR BUILDING PAD AND STRUCTURES

A. Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and

extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of

concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and for review.

B. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottoms of excavation. Excavate by hand

to elevations required just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines

and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

1. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation to required elevations and backfill with crushed

stone prior to installation of footing.

C. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Structures: Conform to

elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot plus a sufficient

distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other

construction and for review. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as indicated.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a

minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.

B. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and

to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter, excavate

trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

1. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation to required elevations and backfill with VDOT #57

crushed stone prior to installation of pipe.

2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-duct

conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate

elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.

3. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom

of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill depressions with tamped sand

backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing

of pipe barrel on bearing surface.

3.8 EXCAVATION STABILITY





A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies

having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or

stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until

completion of backfilling.

C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,

stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in

excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as

excavation progresses.

3.9 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when mass, trench and footing excavations have reached required subgrade. The

Architect will arrange for an inspection of conditions by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer.

Alternative procedures for arranging this review may be implemented at the Owner’s written option.

B. If the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer determines that the subgrade bearing conditions are

unacceptable, the Architect will authorize additional excavation until suitable bearing conditions are

encountered.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment

to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons

(13.6 tonnes).

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Under supervision of the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer, proofroll subgrade in cut areas below the

building pad and pavement(s) with a loaded dump truck or other approved pneumatic tired vehicle.

Should any unstable sub-soil be encountered below pavement or structures, break up the top eight

inches of ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact

to percentage of maximum density as stated in Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements.

Perform this work at no additional cost and/or time to the Contract.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.10 ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION

A. Additional Excavation (Mass): Remove excavated materials and dispose of on-site as directed by the

Architect. Replace this excavated material with satisfactory material placed and compacted according

to the requirements of the “Placement and Compaction” section.

B. Additional Excavation in Trenches: Remove excavated materials and dispose of on-site as directed

by the Architect. Replace this excavated material with stone.





C. Additional Excavation in Footings: Remove excavated materials and dispose of on-site as directed

by the Architect. Replace this excavated material with lean concrete/flowable fill or with stone

extending 12 inches laterally beyond the footing in all directions.

D. The quantity of material removed as Additional Excavation (Mass, Trench or Footing) shall be

calculated by a surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia and employed by the Contractor.

The Owner’s Project Representative shall review the quantity calculated within 48 hours of receiving

the survey notes.

E. Protect the subgrade during construction. During wet conditions, the subgrade soils may become

saturated and soften, possibly resulting in damage to the subgrade if disturbed by equipment.

Correct subgrade damaged in this manner. No additional payment will be made to correct

subgrade damaged in this manner.

3.11 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Correct Unauthorized Excavation as follows:

1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending

indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom without altering required top

elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable

to Architect.

2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as indicated for authorized

excavations of same classification unless otherwise directed by Architect.

3.12 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Temporarily stockpile excavated materials acceptable for use as backfill and fill. Place, grade, and

shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile excavated materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within the drip line

of trees to remain.

3.13 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Acceptance by local authority having jurisdiction of construction below finished grade, including

perimeter insulation.

2. Review, approval, and recording of the locations of underground utilities.

3. Removal of concrete formwork.

4. Removal of shoring and bracing (including backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials).

5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.

6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow or ice.





C. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from

ground surface prior to placement of fills.

D. Bench sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing

material. Plow, scarify, bench or break up sloped surfaces flatter than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

E. Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below,

using materials indicated in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.

2. Under walks, curbs, and pavements, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.

3. Under building slabs, use satisfactory excavated or borrow materials and drainage/porous fill

material as indicated.

3.14 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course

to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and

bodies of conduits.

C. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall

footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings. Place

concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.

D. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30

inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping

or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway

subbase.

E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil], free of particles larger

than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or

conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides

and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping

or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a

height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.

G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

I. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final

subgrade elevation.

J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6

inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.





K. Do not backfill trenches until any required testing and inspections have been completed and Architect

authorizes backfilling. Backfill carefully to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

L. Under piping and conduit and equipment, use crushed stone where required over rock bearing surface

and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of

cylinder.

M. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations.

Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying

material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.

3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percentage points of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or

ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds

optimum moisture content by 2 percentage points and is too wet to compact to specified dry

unit weight.

B. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before

compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in

minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent

to compaction operations. Maintain the moisture content of the structural fill materials to within 2

percentage points of the optimum moisture content until permanently covered.

C. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to

required density.

1. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit

compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced

to a satisfactory value.

2. Work wet materials as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer. Base bids on working

material daily for a maximum of five days of acceptable weather.

3. No additional payment will be made for these operations.

3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILL AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted

by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted

by hand-operated tampers.

B. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.

Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each

area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.





C. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density indicated for each area

classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect

if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction.

D. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following

percentages of maximum density at a moisture content within 2 percentage points of optimum in

accordance with ASTM D698:

1. Under structures, building pad and pavements, compact each layer of backfill or fill material at

95 percent maximum density. This includes ground under future expansion areas.

2. Under grass or unpaved areas, compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent

maximum density.

E. Seal all fill areas at the end of each working day, utilizing a smooth drum roller.

3.17 GRADING

A. General: Rough grading of areas within the Project, including cut and fill sections and adjacent

transition areas, shall be reasonably smooth, compacted and free from irregular surface changes. The

degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or motor patrol except as

otherwise indicated. The finished subgrade surface from the grassed areas generally shall be not more

than 0.2 feet above or below the final grade or approved cross section, with due allowance for topsoil.

B. The tolerance for areas within 10 feet of building perimeter, walks and all areas to be paved shall not

exceed 0.10 feet above or below the established subgrade. Finish all ditches, swales and gutters to

drain readily. Unless otherwise indicated, evenly slope the subgrade to provide drainage away from

building walls in all directions at a grade not less than ¼ inch per foot. Provide rounding at top and

bottom of cut and fill slopes and at other breaks in grade.

C. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas and areas of cut, fill and design/subgrade

elevations from the actions of the elements and from deterioration as a result of construction

operations and weather conditions (frost, rains, snow, sleet, hail, etc.). Repair any settlement or

washing that occurs prior to or after acceptance of the work. Fill to required subgrade levels any

areas where settlement occurs. Protect trees to remain, and, at all areas of the Site where construction

operations are in progress, provide protection for the safety of occupants of the existing facilities.

D. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

E. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish

subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).





F. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested

with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.18 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE:

A. General: Place subbase material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support a

pavement base course.

B. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of

subbase course.

C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct

shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase

course layer. Compact and roll at least at 12” width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and

rolling each layer of subbase course.

D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,

conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for

compacting subbase material during placement operations.

E. When a compacted subbase course is 6” thick or less, place material in a single layer. When more

than 6” thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6” or less than 3” in

thickness when compacted.

F. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

G. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

3. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer.

4. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3

inches (75 mm) thick.

5. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to

ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557.

H. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral

movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials

and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of

maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557.

3.19 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE

A. General: Place drainage/porous fill material, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs

and sidewalks areas indicated.





B. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Placing: Place drainage/porous fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,

conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for

compacting material during placement operations.

D. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single

layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single

layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.


A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each

subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.

1. If in the opinion of the Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills

have been placed that are below required density, perform additional compaction and testing until

required density is obtained.

B. The Owner will engage, and pay for, the services of a Geotechnical Engineer whose function shall be

to afford complete engineering control by testing of the conditions of all footing subgrades, the

placement of all structural fills under structures, building pad and pavement areas, and all compaction

where required, and to observe the proof rolling of the building pad and pavement areas.

C. The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will be present as deemed necessary during all phases of the

Work requiring filling, compaction operations or testing. The Geotechnical Engineer will provide

the Architect with written certification that fill and compaction was completed with accepted

materials in accordance with the Documents, and give a professional opinion regarding shrinkage or

settlement of fill and safe load bearing capacity of fill.

D. Site Preparation and Proofrolling: The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will determine if any

additional excavation or in-place densification is necessary to prepare a subgrade for fill placement

for slab or pavement support.

E. Fill Placement and Compaction: The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will witness all fill operations

and take sufficient in-place density tests to verify that the indicated degree of fill compaction is

achieved. The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will observe and approve borrow materials used and

shall determine if their existing moisture contents are suitable/acceptable.

F. Footing Excavation Review: The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will review the footing excavations

for the building foundations. He will verify that the design bearing pressures are available and that

no loose or soft areas exist beneath the bearing surfaces of the footing excavations.

G. The Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer will submit two (2) copies each of his reports, recommendations

and/or opinions to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. Pertinent information will be provided to

the Contractor as required.

3.21 EROSION CONTROL:

A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction,

the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, and as indicated in the Contract Documents.





3.22 PROTECTION

A. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to indicated tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where subsequent construction operations or adverse weather

disturbs completed compacted areas, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior

to further construction.

C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project

warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact,

and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

D. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F.

3.23 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove excess and/or waste materials, including trash and debris,

and dispose of it off Owner's property in a legal manner.

B. Dispose of excess material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill legally offsite.







EROSION CONTROL 312500 - Page 1 of 6 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 31 2500 - EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


B. The Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, latest edition.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the installation, maintenance and removal of erosion control measures

required for prevention of sediment leaving the project site.

B. This Section also includes the requirement to file the Virginia Stormwater Management Program

(VSMP) General Permit Registration Statement for Storm Water Discharges from Construction

Activities with the State Department of Conservation and Recreation.

1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PERMIT

A. Prior to commencement of work, obtain a copy of the approved Erosion and Sediment Control

Plan from the Owner.

B. Apply for the Land Disturbance Permit (if required). The contractor shall have a Registered Land

Disturber on staff at time of bid award and on site during the entire project. The Grading Permit /

Land Disturbance Permit will be assigned to that individual.

C. Post Erosion and Sediment Control Bond (if required).

D. Schedule a pre-construction conference on-site with the Owner, Architect, Engineer. County

Field Manager and DCR (if required). Hold this meeting prior to the start of any construction

activities.

1.4 VSMP REGISTRATION

A. Prior to commencement of work, register the site with the State Department of Conservation and

Recreation (DCR) per the requirements of the Virginia Stormwater Management Program

(VSMP). The site must be registered prior to the start of construction activities.

B. Utilize the following process for registering the site:

1. Complete the VSMP General Permit Registration Statement – Construction Activity

Stormwater Discharges (DCR01). A copy of this form and the instructions for completion

are included in this section.

2. Utilizing the approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as a base, prepare the required







07/13/2021

Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPP). At a minimum, the additional information

required on the SWPP includes:

a) A description of any potential pollution sources such as vehicle fueling areas, storage of

fertilizers and chemicals, and sanitary waste facilities. Identify the proposed location of

these items on the site.

b) A description of the pollution prevention measures associated with these potential

pollution sources.

c) The plan shall be labelled “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan”.

3. File the completed Registration Statement, Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and a

registration fee with the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR).

C. During construction, the following requirements shall be met:

1. A copy of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPP) shall be kept at the job site at all

times.

2. Amend the SWPP as necessary to account for significant changes in design, construction or

maintenance that would increase the pollution potential of the site. File a copy of the

amended plan with DCR and with the Architect.

3. The Responsible Land Disturber shall perform weekly inspections of the erosion and

sediment control measures. Inspection reports shall be filed as an appendix to the SWPP.

Copy these reports to the Architect and the Owners Representative.

D. Following final acceptance of the site by the Owner, file a Notice of Termination with the

Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Responsible Land Disturber registration information.

B. A copy of the VSMP registration application and a copy of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention

Plan.

C. Copies of the weekly Erosion Control Measure inspection reports. These may be submitted at the

monthly progress meetings.

D. Silt Fence

E. Safety Fence

1.6 PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR EROSION CONTROL MEASURES

A. Establish a line item in the Schedule of Values for Erosion Control Maintenance. This line item

shall represent a minimum of thirty percent (30%) of the total value of the erosion control for the

project.

B. Erosion control maintenance will be paid on a monthly basis, following the satisfactory







07/13/2021

installation and maintenance of the erosion control measures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS:

A. Safety Fence

1. Six foot high chain link fence, complying with the requirements of Standard and

Specification 3.01 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

2. Post appropriate warning signs along the Safety Fence.

B. Construction Entrance

1. Heavy-duty stone aggregate and filter fabric construction entrance, complying with the

requirements of Standard and Specification 3.02 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment

Control Handbook.

2. Reinforced concrete wash-rack, draining to a sediment trap.

3. The water source for washing operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Silt Fence

1. Synthetic filter fabric, complying with the requirements of Standard and Specification 3.05 of

the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

2. Wooden stakes shall be 2” oak, a minimum length of five feet.

D. Wire Reinforced Silt Fence

1. Synthetic filter fabric, complying with the requirements of Standard and Specification 3.05 of

the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

2. Wooden stakes shall be 2” oak, a minimum length of five feet.

3. Wire fence reinforcement shall be a minimum of 14-guage and have a maximum mesh

spacing of six inches.

E. Storm Drain Inlet Protection

1. Block and Gravel Drop Inlet Sediment Filter, complying with the requirements of Standard

and Specification 3.07 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

2. Gravel Curb Inlet Sediment Filter, complying with the requirements of Standard and


F. Temporary Diversion Dike

1. Berm of compacted soil material, stabilized with vegetation, complying with the requirements

of Standard and Specification 3.09 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

G. Outlet Protection







07/13/2021

1. A level area of riprap, placed over filter fabric, complying with the requirements of Standard


H. Riprap

1. Graded stone, placed over filter fabric, complying with the requirements of Standard and


2. The size of the stone required is indicated on the drawings.

I. Temporary Seeding

1. Temporary vegetative cover for disturbed areas, complying with the requirements of Standard


J. Permanent Seeding

1. Refer to Section “Lawns and Grasses” for permanent seeding requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES

A. Install all erosion and sediment control measures per the requirements of the Virginia Erosion and

Sediment Control Handbook.

B. Protect all points of construction ingress and egress to the site to prevent tracking of mud onto

public streets. Provide temporary construction entrances at all points of access to the site.

C. Clear only those areas necessary for installation of the perimeter erosion control measures. The

balance of the site shall not be cleared or otherwise disturbed until the perimeter erosion control

measures are installed and functional.

D. Follow the construction sequence and install erosion control measures as indicated on the

Contract documents and as directed by the Owner.

E. Install additional measures as necessary to prevent sediment from leaving the project site.

3.2 MAINTENANCE OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES

A. Maintain all erosion and sediment control measures per the requirements of the Virginia Erosion

and Sediment Control Handbook.

B. At a minimum, the following maintenance is required:

1. Safety Fence

a) Review fence regularly for damage. Repair any damage immediately.

b) Secure the fence at the end of each working day. Repair or replace all locking devices as

necessary.







07/13/2021

2. Construction Entrance

a) Wash and rework stone and/or place additional stone as required to prevent tracking of

mud onto the roadways.

b) Clean out the sediment-trapping device for the washrack.

c) Remove all materials spilled, dropped, washed or otherwise tracked onto roadways or

into storm sewers immediately. Do not use water trucks to wash the roadways.

3. Silt Fence

a) Inspect immediately following each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall.

b) Make any required repairs immediately. Give special attention to damage resulting from

end-runs and undercutting.

c) Replace fabric that is decomposing or is otherwise ineffective.

d) Clean out accumulated sediment following every storm event. Do not allow sediment to

accumulate higher than one-half the height of the barrier.

4. Wire Reinforced Silt Fence


b) Make any required repairs immediately. Give special attention to damage resulting from

end-runs and undercutting.

c) Replace fabric that is decomposing or is otherwise ineffective.

d) Clean out accumulated sediment following every storm event. Do not allow sediment to

accumulate higher than one-half the height of the barrier.

5. Storm Drain Inlet Protection


b) Remove and clean or replace stone filters that have been clogged with sediment. Make

any required repairs immediately

c) Remove accumulated sediment as required. Do not allow sediment to accumulate higher

than one-half the height of the measure.

6. Temporary Diversion Dike


Inspect at least once every two weeks, whether or not it has rained. Make any necessary

repairs immediately.

b) Repair damages caused by construction activities by the end of each working day.

7. Temporary Fill Diversion

a) Review measure at the end of each working day to ensure its effective operation.

8. Riprap







07/13/2021

a) Inspect riprap following every storm event. Re-lay riprap as necessary to prevent

concentrated flow from running under or around the riprap.

b) Clean out accumulated sediment from the riprap.

9. Rock Check Dams


b) Remove and clean or replace stone that has been clogged with sediment.

c) Inspect for evidence of by-pass flows. Make any required repairs immediately

d) Remove accumulated sediment as required. Do not allow sediment to accumulate higher

than one-half of the height of the dam.

10. Temporary Seeding

a) Re-seed and mulch areas where cover is inadequate to protect against erosion until

adequate cover is obtained.

C. Remove accumulated sediment as required and at appropriate intervals to maintain the effective

function of all erosion control measures.

D. Inspect, repair and remove accumulated sediment from erosion control measures following

significant (greater than ½”) rainfall events.

E. If erosion control measures become clogged, causing the impoundment of water, restore the

measures immediately. Ponded water poses a potential drowning hazard and shall be relieved

immediately by either pumping (through an approved dewatering structure) or by removal of the

blockage.

3.3 REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES

A. Remove all temporary erosion control measures following the stabilization of the site. Do not

remove erosion control measures until authorized by the Owner and Loudoun County Inspector.

B. Topsoil, permanently seed and stabilize areas occupied by erosion control measures.







TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - Page 1 of 3 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 31 3116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and application instructions.

B. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

regulations for termiticides.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations for preparing substrate and application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of governing

authorities to apply soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local


1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations

are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during

inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant

manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY







07/13/2021

A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied

soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite

activity is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by

termite infestation.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Also, include a renewable

warranty for the Owner’s future consideration.

C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other

warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION:

A. Use an emusible concentrate insecticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent

infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a working solution of

one of the following chemical elements and concentrations:

1. Cypermethrin (Demon TC) 0.5% in water emulsion.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to local governing

authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to planting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas

to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under

slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if

recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:

1. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following

application rates:

a) Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet (5.1 L of chemical solution per

meter) to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter of foundation

walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric

conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers.

b) Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. (4.1 L of chemical solution per sq. m) as

an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.







07/13/2021

Apply 1-1/2 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. (6.1 L of chemical solution per sq.

m) to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

c) Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet (5.1 L of chemical solution per

meter) of trench for each 12 inches (300 mm) of depth from grade to footing, along outside

edge of building. Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) wide along outside of

foundation to a depth of not less than 12 inches (300 mm). Punch holes to top of footing

at not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical

solution with the soil as it is being replaced in the trench.

2. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 linear

feet 2.6 L per meter, poured directly into the hollow spaces.

3. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4

gallons per 10 linear feet (5.1 L per linear m) of penetration.

C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.

Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.

D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or

other construction activities following application.

E. Allow not less than 12 hours drying time after application before beginningconcrete placement or

other construction activities.







SHORING AND UNDERPINNING 314000 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 314000 - SHORING AND UNDERPINNING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.

2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information

that apply to work under this Section.

B. Section Includes:

1. Design of bracing, shoring, and underpinning.

2. Selection of construction sequence.

3. Temporary bracing of the structure or portions of the structure as required to prevent the

structure from becoming unsafe during construction.

4. Temporary shoring of portions of the structure as required to prevent the structure from

becoming unsafe during construction.

5. Temporary shoring of excavations.

6. Construction and removal of posts, timbers, lagging, braces, etc. required in connection

with bracing, shoring, and underpinning the structure during construction.

7. Excavation, concrete placement and backfilling required in connection with underpinning

foundations.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

2. Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."

3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

4. Division 31 Section "Excavation".

5. Division 31 Section "Trenching".

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:

1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where

differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection

shall apply.

2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of

commencement of the Work.

3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable regulatory

requirements.

B. State of Virginia – Virginia Occupational Safety and Health (VOSH):

1. Standard Specifications.







07/13/2021

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: The stability and integrity of the structure during construction shall be maintained at

levels generally acceptable within the construction industry by the use of bracing, shoring, and

underpinning. In no case shall the structure be allowed to become unsafe during construction as

defined by the local governing jurisdiction. Design stresses in bracing, shoring, and

underpinning shall not exceed the allowable stresses in Section 51-1.06A (2) of the Standard

Specifications.

B. Bracing and Shoring for Structures:

1. The bracing and shoring systems required to provide temporary support of a structure or

portions of a structure during construction shall be designed to support the dead, live,

soil, earthquake and wind loads that may be imposed on the structure during construction

in accordance with industry standards and generally accepted engineering principles.

2. The proposed bracing and shoring systems shall have foundations designed for allowable

soil bearing pressures in accordance with the geotechnical investigation prepared for the

Project.

C. Shoring of Excavations and Underpinning: The proposed shoring and underpinning systems

shall be designed for earth pressures and allowable soil bearing values as applicable in

accordance with the geotechnical investigation prepared for the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

B. Shop Drawings indicating layout, member sizes, connection details and construction sequence

for bracing, shoring and underpinning. No work related to bracing, shoring or underpinning

shall take place until the University has reviewed the Shop Drawings.

C. Design calculations of bracing, shoring and underpinning showing member stresses and

connections due to imposed loads.


A. Design calculations and Shop Drawings of proposed bracing, shoring, and underpinning of the

structure shall be prepared, stamped, and signed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State

of Virginia.








07/13/2021

1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS FOR SHORING AND BRACING

A. Materials for shoring and bracing shall be undamaged, high quality materials.

2.2 CONCRETE FOR UNDERPINNING

A. Concrete for underpinning shall meet the requirements of Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place

Concrete".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction of bracing, shoring and underpinning shall be in accordance with the reviewed

Shop Drawings prepared by the Subcontractor's Engineer.

B. The Subcontractor shall hire the Engineer responsible for the design of bracing, shoring and

underpinning and inspection of the work as detailed on the bracing, shoring, and underpinning

Shop Drawings, prior to sawcutting or removing portions of the structure.

C. Excavations for underpinning the foundations shall be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer

prior to placement of concrete.

D. The Engineer responsible for design of bracing, shoring, and underpinning shall write a letter to

the University certifying that construction of bracing, shoring, and underpinning was completed

in accordance with the bracing, shoring, and underpinning Shop Drawings and meets its

approval, prior to placement of concrete, sawcutting, and removal or modification of portions of

the structure.

E. Remove surplus excavated materials from site.

3.2 REMOVAL OF BRACING AND SHORING

A. Bracing and shoring shall not be removed until the new members have acquired sufficient

strength to support their weight and the loads superimposed thereon safely. In no case may

bracing or shoring be removed until the time and sequence has been approved by the Engineer

responsible for bracing and shoring and reviewed by the University.







07/13/2021

B. In general, bracing and shoring of concrete shall remain in place for at least ten days, when they

may be removed provided the concrete is sufficiently hard and will not be injured.







ASPHALT PAVEMENT 32 1216 - Page 1 of 6 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving over prepared subbase.

2. Hot –mix asphalt patching.

3. Asphalt surface treatments

a) Coal tar sealant

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix

proposed for the Work.

B. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material complies

with requirements.

C. Traffic maintenance and Work Area Protection Plan: Submit a plan indicating sequencing and

measures to be used for the maintenance and protection of traffic during operations within or

immediately adjacent to existing roadways open to vehicular traffic. The Architect and the Virginia

Department of Transportation must approve this plan prior to commencement of work within the

Right-of-Way.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of

successful in-service performance.

B. Asphalt paving materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of

the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications and Road and

Bridge Standards.







07/13/2021


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp

or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum ambient temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C), and when

temperature has not been below 35 deg F (1 deg C) for 12 hours immediately prior to

application.

2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at time

of placement.

3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at time

of placement.

1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Within the road Right-of-Way and in the bus loop, VDOT inspectors shall observe the asphalt

placement. Coordinate the necessary inspection schedule with the Ashland Residency.

B. The Owner’s testing agency will observe the asphalt placement in the parking lots and on-site areas

not in Right-of-Way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE

A. General: Provide plant-mixed, hot-laid asphalt-aggregate mixture complying with the

requirements of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications and as recommended by local paving

authorities to suit project conditions.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow

setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

B. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to VDOT requirements.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Paving Geotextile: Nonwoven polypropylene, specifically designed for paving applications,

resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







07/13/2021

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that

require further compaction.

C. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until

these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.

3.2 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC

A. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required by the Virginia Work

Area Protection Manual.

3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.

Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300

mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.

1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.

2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush

with adjacent surface.

B. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt

surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

C. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch

(6 mm). Refill with asphalt joint-filling material to restore watertight condition. Remove excess

filler that has accumulated near cracks or joints.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland

cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt pavement.

Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m) of surface.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillage and clean affected surfaces.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from

substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge

or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.







07/13/2021

C. Prime Coat: For asphalt sections less than 4” thick, apply uniformly over surface of compacted-

aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to

penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 24 hours minimum.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface

to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose

sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

3.5 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply bond coat, consisting of asphalt cement, uniformly to existing surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to

0.30 gal./sq. yd. (0.8 to 1.2 L/sq. m).

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll

geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm)

and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place overlay paving the same day.

3.6 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place

asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of

mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thickness indicated.

2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill edge strips

of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap

previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing intermediate or

surface courses.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to

remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.7 JOINTS

A. Construct joints between old and new pavement, or between successive days work, to ensure

continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same

texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.

2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).







07/13/2021

3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).

4. Construct transverse joints as required by the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement.

3.8 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate

compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,

and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and

rerolling to required elevations.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot-

mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve indicated density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt

course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 95 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 1559.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm. Surface course average density shall be 95 percent of reference laboratory density.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper

alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly

using tamper or other satisfactory method. Edges adjacent to curbs and curb and gutter sections

shall be flush with the edge of concrete.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove

paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to

specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and

hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become

marked.

3.9 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following

tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.







07/13/2021

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following

tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or

longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch (3 mm).

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Architect.


A. Within the VDOT Right-of-Way and in the bus loop, coordinate required inspections with the

Ashland Residency of the Virginia Department of Transportation.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field

inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work

complies with or deviates from requirements.

C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected

Work with requirements.

D. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with requirements.







SITE CONCRETE 32 1313 - Page 1 of 5 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 32 1313 - SITE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of Portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including:

1. Service area pavement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide certification that all materials meet VDOT standards for the class of concrete required.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction

activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete

placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of

distortion and defects.

1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.

2. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of

concrete.

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185.

C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed

D. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete

materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.

E. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed

expansion joint fillers and sealers.







F. Antispalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with

AASHTO M-233.

G. Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with VDOT Road and Bridge

Specifications.

2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING

A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and

testing, and quality control or VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications whichever is more stringent.

B. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate,

water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining admixture,

and water to produce the following properties:

1. Comply with the requirements of VDOT Std. Class A3 Concrete, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction.

Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving,

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress

of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inches in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from

concrete without damage.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT

A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated.







3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete

or VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications whichever is more stringent.

B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase

if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete

around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms

and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,

reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation.

Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.

D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If

interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.

E. Fabricated Bar Mats: Keep mats clean and free from excessive rust, and handle units to keep them flat

and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required

before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.

F. Place concrete in 2 operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required

depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of

concrete, strike off, and screed.

G. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes

without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Architect.

H. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement. If machine

placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed

minimums indicated. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section,

lines, grades, finish, and jointing as indicated for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove

and replace with formed concrete meeting requirements.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with

face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline,


B. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at

least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a

recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.

2. Sawed Joints: Form weakened-plane joints with powered saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not

be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.







3. Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal or sealed wood to form weakened-plane joints. Set strips

into plastic concrete and carefully remove strips after concrete has hardened.

C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement

operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion

joints.

1. Construct joints as indicated or, if not indicated, use standard metal keyway-section forms.

D. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch

basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Locate expansion joints at 50 feet o.c. for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated.

F. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with

finished concrete surface.

G. Provide joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more

than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

H. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material.

Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

I. Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of

joints, materials, installation, and performance.

J. Refer to Drawings for scoring patterns for:

1. Selected sidewalk areas

2. Courtyard

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand

methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and

produce uniform texture.

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to

remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.

C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round

to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.

D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete

troweling and finish surface as follows:

1. Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic.

Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect.







E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of

joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major

defects, as directed by Architect.

3.7 CURING

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3

sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods.

3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS

A. Repair or replace cracked, broken or defective concrete curbs and curb and gutter, as directed by

Architect.

B. Replace cracked, broken or defective concrete sidewalks.

C. Repair or replace cracked, broken or defective concrete pavement, as directed by Architect.

D. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or

defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete

bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

E. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14

days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible

by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

F. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just

before final inspection.



Philip A. Bolen Memorial Park - Concession and Restroom

FacilitiesCounty Project: C02152


PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - Page 1 of 3 ISSUE FOR BID07/13/2021

SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Painted markings applied to existing paving.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 099114 "Exterior Painting (MPI Standards)" for painting exterior concrete

surfaces other than pavement markings.2. Section 099124 "Interior Painting (MPI Standards)" for painting interior concrete

surfaces other than pavement markings.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to marking asphalt paving or concrete surfaces including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of traffic during installation period.


A. Product Data: Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Pavement-marking paint, alkyd.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work.






C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified; on rigid backing, 8 inches square.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of VDOT for pavement-marking work.


A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for alkyd materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company (The); or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. PPG Paints.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain pavement-marking paints from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint, Alkyd: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952F.

1. Color: Match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement-marking substrate is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.










3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.







SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - Page 1 of 4 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 32 3300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Trash Receptacles

2. Bicycle Racks

3. Perforated Benches

4. Picnic Table

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section 31 2000 Earthwork

2. Division 32 Section 32 1313 Site Concrete

C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include pipe sleeves and anchor bolts to

be cast in concrete footings or installed in paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Warranty and Maintenance Data: For all site furnishings.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package materials for delivery in manufacturer’s standard protective coverings. Cover and

protect material in transit and at site. Material not properly protected and stored and which is

damaged or defaced during construction shall be rejected.







07/13/2021

B. Do not deliver components or materials for site furnishing installations to the project site until

related site preparation work is complete and related site locations are ready for installation of

site furnishings. Store materials and components in secure places. Store materials and

components neatly, properly stacked and covered with plastic.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site furnishing(s) through one source from a single

manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Site furnishings shall be standard production devices or systems of manufacturers successfully

engaged in the manufacture of items (similar to those indicated) for a period of not less than

five (5) years. Each site furnishing item type shall be a complete assembly and the product of a

single manufacturer. Specific manufacturers' models are referenced as a standard of design and

quality. Complying products of other manufacturers may be considered in accordance with

Contract Documents

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Trash Receptacles

a) Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc. (Part 9560)

b) Size: 32 gal perforated with tome top and liner

2. Bicycle Racks

a) Madrax Division: Graber Manufacturing, Inc [Product ORN-2(LB)-

SF(IG)]

3. Perforated Benches with Backs

a) Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc.

b) Size: 6’ or 8’

c) Color: By Owner

4. Picnic Tables

a) Pilot Rock by RJ Thomas Mfg. Co., Inc. (Model WXT/G-6RR)







07/13/2021

2.3 TRASH RECEPTACLE

A. Provide Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc. , Part 9560,or approved equal. Trash Receptacles

are to be powder coated color: green. Install in accordance with manufacturers specifications.

Trash Receptacles are to be permanently affixed to the ground. The quantity shall be as shown

on the plans.

2.4 BICYCLE RACK

A. Provide Madrax Product ORN-2(LB)-SF(IG), or approved equal. Bike rack to be powder

coated – color: By Owner. Install in accordance with manufacturers specifications.

2.5 PERFORATED BENCHES

A. Provide Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc perforated benches, 6’ or 8’ long. Color or other

visual characteristics indigenous to the particular material and adequately demonstrated in the

sampling will be accepted provided they do not compromise the structural or durability

capabilities of the material. Finish shall be within the range of samples approved by the

Architect or Owner.

2.6 PICNIC TABLES

A. Provide Pilot Rock by RJ Thomas Mfg. Co., Inc. (Model WXT/G-6RR). Install in accordance

with manufacturers specifications. The quantity shall be as shown on the architectural plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorage devices with templates, diagrams and instructions for their

installations, for site furnishings indicated to be attached to (or cast in) concrete, masonry, and

steel constructions. Coordinate delivery of these items to project site so as not to delay other

work.

B. Cover and protect all materials from damage and take proper precautions to protect all finished

surfaces over which or against which site furnishings must be installed. Repair or replace any

damaged finished surfaces of the site furnishings.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions

affecting performance.







07/13/2021

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements

are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been

completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored and positioned at locations

indicated on Drawings.

D. Anchoring: Permanently affix all Site Furnishings per manufacturer recommendations. All

concrete footings (if applicable) shall have a smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion

of site furnishing above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that anchoring system is at

correct height and spacing. Coordinate with final grades and surface materials.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing site furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and

debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component.







LAWNS AND GRASSES 32 9200 - Page 1 of 9 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 32 9200 - LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fine grading and preparing lawn areas (including courtyards)

2. Topsoil Placement

3. Soil amendments

4. Fertilizers

5. Seeding

6. Lawn Restoration

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Lawns: All areas disturbed by construction and not otherwise covered by paving, buildings or other

structures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification by product manufacturer that the following products supplied comply with

requirements:

1. Grass Seed

a) Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the

botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and

percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date

of packaging.

b) Blue Tag Certification tag for each bag of seed.

2. Sod

a) Gold Tag Certification.

B. Installers qualifications







07/13/2021

1. Provide a list, with references, of the past three projects of a similar magnitude.

C. Topsoil Amendment Plan.

1. Provide copy of topsoil testing report.

2. List of amendments proposed for topsoil, including application rates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer, who has successfully completed lawn

establishment projects similar in size and complexity to this project. The installer’s primary business

(defined as a minimum of 60% of total billings) shall be establishment of lawns.


A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod

Producers Association (ASPA) “Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and

Transplanting/Installing”.

1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Planting Season: Sow lawn seed during normal planting seasons for type of lawn work required.

1. Spring Planting Season: March 15 through May 15

2. Fall Planting Season: September 15 through November 15

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecast weather conditions

are suitable for work.

C. Lawn Seeding Schedule

1. If job completion schedule does not allow seeding within a normal planting season, provide

interim temporary seeding necessary to stabilize site. Complete permanent seeding during the

next planting season.

1.8 LIMITS OF SEEDING

A. Spread topsoil and seed all lawn areas.

1.9 LIMITS OF LAWN RENOVATION

A. All existing lawn areas disturbed by construction activities.

B. The areas under the existing Eloo buildings removed.







07/13/2021

1.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR LAWNS AND GRASSES

A. Establish a line item in the Schedule of Values for Lawn Maintenance. This line item shall

represent a minimum of thirty percent (30%) of the total value of the seeding for the project.

B. Lawn maintenance will be paid on a monthly basis, following the satisfactory maintenance of the

lawns.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content;

free of stones 1” or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface

soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other

extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a) Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities

are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or

mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from

agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

B. Have topsoil tested by a certified soil testing laboratory to determine the type and quantity of soil

amendments necessary. Add amendments to topsoil as necessary to meet these requirements.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. If the topsoil analysis indicates the need for inorganic soil amendments, the following standards

apply:

B. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate

equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: Class O, with a minimum 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a

minimum 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

C. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99

percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40

(0.425-mm) sieve.

D. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent

sulfur.

E. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

F. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.







07/13/2021

G. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate.

H. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.

I. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140

percent water absorption capacity by weight.

J. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. If the topsoil analysis indicates the need for organic soil amendments, the following standards

apply:

B. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture

content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19-mm) sieve; soluble

salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of

substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-

separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

3. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially

decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity

of 1100 to 2000 percent.

4. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

5. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent

by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks,

soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZER

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20

percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available

phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in topsoil

analysis reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

2. Minimum Composition: No less than 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen,

4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.







07/13/2021

2.5 SEED

A. Grass Seed: All grass seed must be fresh, clean, and dry.

B. Seed Species

Proportion by

Weight

Grass Species Min. %

Germination

Min. % Pure

Seed

Max. % Weed

Seed

10% Kentucky bluegrass (Poa

pratensis).

80 85 0.50

90% Tall Fescue (Festuca

arundinacea).

85 98 0.50

A. Varieties shall be selected from the 2003-2004 list of recommended turfgrass varieties, published

by Virginia Tech.

B. All seed shall be Blue Tag certified by the Oregon State Seed Laboratory. Tags must be attached

to each bag delivered on site.

2.6 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified sod, complying with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials"

in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Comply with ASPA specifications for

machine cut thickness, size, strength, moisture content, and mowed height and free of weeds and

undesirable native grasses. Provide viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly

rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. Provide the following

turfgrass species:

1. 90% Tall Fescue (Festuca arundinacea). 10% Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis) mix.

B. All sod shall be Gold Tag certified by the Virginia Crop Improvement Association.

2.7 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,

rye, oats, or barley.

B. Peat Mulch: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially

decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of

1100 to 2000 percent.

C. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve;

soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and

free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:







07/13/2021

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight.

D. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or

germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

2.8 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92

lb/sq. yd. (0.5 kg/sq. m), with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended

steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and for conditions

affecting performance of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings

from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-

bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseed overspraying.

3.3 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT FOR LAWNS

A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.

B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones, sticks and roots larger than 2

inches in any dimension from subgrade. Completely remove trash and other extraneous debris from

subgrade.

C. Have topsoil tested by a certified soil testing laboratory to determine the type and quantity of soil

amendments necessary.

D. Sift topsoil to remove stones and other objects larger than 1” in any dimension. Maximum object

size for topsoil shall be achieved by sifting not by hand removal or raking following placement of

topsoil.

E. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates required by soil testing. Delay mixing

fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within 4 days. Either mix soil before







07/13/2021

spreading or apply soil amendments on surface of spread topsoil and mix thoroughly into top 4

inches (100 mm) of topsoil before planting.

F. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer.

G. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of six inches (6”).

3.4 SEEDING LAWNS

A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity

exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right

angles to each other.

B. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.

C. Sow seed at the following rates:

1. Seeding Rate: 200 lbs./acre.

D. Rake seed lightly into top 1/4 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

E. Protect seeded areas 3:1 slope/grade or steeper against erosion by providing erosion-control

blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Protect seeded areas less than 3:1 slope/grade against erosion by spreading straw mulch after

completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg

per 100 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) loose depth over seeded areas.

Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment.

3.5 MAINTENANCE OF NEW LAWNS

A. Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable

lawn is established. Maintain seeded lawns until Substantial Completion. Maintain all grassed

areas as necessary to ensure a satisfactory lawn is achieved at Substantial Completion.

B. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and

other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly

smooth lawn.

1. Replant bare areas with same materials as for lawns.

2. Replace disturbed mulch.

C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water

from a water source to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Provide a source of water for irrigation. Utilize temporary irrigation meters, a well or water

trucks as necessary for the water source.







07/13/2021

2. Water seeded areas as necessary to promote vigorous growth of grass but at the minimum rate

of 1 inch per week.

3. Water sodded areas per the requirements of the grower. Maintain moist soil to a depth of at

least four inches.

D. At a minimum, the following fertilizer applications are required:

1. By November 30, 2001, apply 15-5-10 commercial fertilizer at the rate of 200 lbs. per acre

over all seeded and sodded areas.

2. By March 30, 2002, apply 15-5-10 commercial fertilizer at the rate of 350 lbs. per acre over all

seeded and sodded areas.

3. By November 30, 2002, apply 15-5-10 commercial fertilizer at the rate of 200 lbs. per acre and

apply lime at 2000 lbs. per acre over all seeded and sodded areas.

4. Provide written acknowledgement that this requirement has been met prior to requesting

Substantial Completion.

E. Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at indicated height. Repeat

mowing as required to maintain indicated height without cutting more than 40 percent of the grass

height (minimum of 3 mowings). Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial

or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted.

Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain following

grass height:

1. Mow grass to a finished height of 2 to 3 inches high.

3.6 SATISFACTORY LAWN

A. Seeded lawns shall be considered satisfactory/acceptable provided requirements, including

maintenance, have been met and a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass is established, free of

weeds, bare spots exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm), and surface irregularities.

B. Sodded lawns shall be considered satisfactory/acceptable provided requirements, including

maintenance, have been met and a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn is established,

free of weeds, open joints, bare areas and surface irregularities.

C. Replant lawns that do not meet requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are

satisfactory/acceptable.

D. Substantial Completion of the building and the remainder of the project may be achieved (pending

prior Architect and Owner approval) before achieving a satisfactory/acceptable lawn. Continue to

replant and maintain unsatisfactory/unacceptable lawn areas until acceptance is obtained.

Warranties for lawns shall begin at the time of acceptance of the lawn.







07/13/2021

3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from sidewalks and paved areas. Clean

wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of roads, walks, or other

paved areas.

B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain

barricades throughout maintenance period until lawn is established.







EXTERIOR PLANTS 329300 - Page 1 of 9 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 32-9300 - EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Trees

2. Shrubs

3. Groundcovers

4. Other Plant Materials

5. Stakes & Guys

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Installers Qualifications: Provide a list, with references, of the past three projects of similar scope.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Plant Material Certifications:

1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.

2. Label data substantiating that plant materials comply with specified requirements.

D. Planting Schedule:

1. Typewritten planting schedule.

2. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing and submitted to Architect.

E. Maintenance Schedules: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures for maintenance of

landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to completion of project.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer, who has successfully completed planting projects

similar in size and complexity to this project. The installer’s primary business (defined as a minimum of

60% of total billings) shall be exterior plant installation.







07/13/2021

B. Installer’s Field Supervision: Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the project site

when exterior planting is in progress.

C. Exterior Plant Materials:

1. Provide plant materials of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety indicated on the Drawings.

2. All plant materials and work shall comply with recommendations and requirements of ANSI

Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock.”

3. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of

non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material.

4. The Architect may inspect plant materials either at place of growth or on site before planting, for

compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right

to further inspect trees for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent

defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work.

Remove rejected trees immediately from project site.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer or

grower.

2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

B. Exterior Plant Materials

1. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other

handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy

their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop

exterior plants during delivery.

2. Deliver exterior plant materials after preparations for planting have been completed and plant

immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set plant materials in shade,

protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist and free from frost.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time.

4. Balled and burlapped material shall be freshly dug.

5. Handle planting stock by root ball.








07/13/2021

A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations, and observe the conditions under which work is to be

performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a

manner acceptable to the installer.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible

damage. Hand excavate as required.

C. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage

conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting.

D. Provide all necessary safeguards for the protection of all planted areas until provisional

inspection/acceptance is accomplished.

E. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods.

1. Spring Planting: Unfrozen soil conditions March 1-June 1st.

2. Fall Planting: September 1-November 1st or until frozen soil conditions prevent work.

3. Summer Planting: June 1 – September 1 with approved irrigation system.

F. Coordination with Lawns: Install plant materials after finish grades are established and before planting

lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.

1. When planting exterior plants after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by

planting operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty exterior plant materials for a period of one year after date of Final Completion against defects

including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or

damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Contractor’s control.

1. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Architect of any practice which will affect the

warranty if not remedied promptly. The Architect will render an opinion of the conflict if

necessary.

2. Make replacements of all dead plants or plants in impaired condition (more than 25% dead or

dying) condition in early spring/fall following installation. Replacements of dead or rejected

plants should again be made prior to the expiration of the warranty period.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. The Owner is responsible for maintaining all exterior plant material throughout the warranty period

according to the submitted Maintenance Schedule.

B. Remove all stakes and guy wires at the end of the 12 month guarantee period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS







07/13/2021

2.1 EXTERIOR PLANT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide nursery-grown plant materials complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems

developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock

free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and

disfigurement.

B. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag

bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

2.2 PLANTS

A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety indicated. Provide only plants that

are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom

B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery of species and variety shown

or listed.

C. Vines: Provide plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than three runners and a vigorous

well-developed root system.

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and

slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,

phosphorous, and potassium. Revise fertilizer mix to remedy deficiencies found in soil.

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2

percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from

a qualified soil-testing agency.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,

phosphorus, and potassium. Revise fertilizer mix to remedy deficiencies found in soil.

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from

a qualified soil-testing agency.

2.4 MULCHES

1. Organic Mulch: Six (6) month old well rotted double shredded native hardwood bark mulch not

larger than 4” in length and 1/2” in width, free of woodchips and sawdust.

2.5 WATER

1. Free of substances harmful to plant growth.







07/13/2021

2.6 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content. Topsoil

shall be fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of subsoil material, obtained

from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free from clay, lumps, coarse sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks

and other foreign materials.

B. Topsoil Source:

1. Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil.

Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to

plant growth.

a) Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are

insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at

least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2. Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally

well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from

agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

3. Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce

topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials

harmful to plant growth.

a) Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources.

Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches

(100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2.7 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate

equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum

75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Class: Class O, with a minimum 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum

55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

3. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99 percent

passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm)

sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.







07/13/2021

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.

H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent

water absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.8 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content

35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of

5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to

plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; bio-solids; yard trimmings; or source-separated

or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum peat moss: Sphagnum peat moss shall be partially decomposed, finely divided or granular

texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed

moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform

texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with at least

0.15 lb (2.4 kg) of ammonium nitrate or 0.25 lb (4 kg) of ammonium sulfate per cubic foot (cubic

meter) of loose sawdust or ground bark.

E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, poultry, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by

volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed

seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and

shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's









07/13/2021

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting

installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Tree save areas as indicated shall be tagged and approved by the Architect prior to any clearing and/or

thinning.

B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior

plants from damage caused by planting operations.

C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing

water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

D. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations,

outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout

before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

E. Lay out exterior plants at locations indicated. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline

areas for multiple plantings.

F. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks,

branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving

and again two weeks after planting.

3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than

1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally

dispose of them off of Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil

mix.

a) Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b) Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine

texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.







07/13/2021

3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING

A. Set all plant materials plumb and in center of pit or trench as per detail.

1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove

from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is

cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

3. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder

of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping

final layer of planting soil mix.

4. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by

hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling and

maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Tamp final layer

of backfill. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly, do not break.

5. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching.

B. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch (75-mm.) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300

mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or

stems.

3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as indicated.

3.6 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated in details.

B. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an orderly

condition.

B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and

trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or

replace damaged exterior planting.

3.8 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.







07/13/2021







EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEM 331000 - Page 1 of 15 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 331000 - EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of this Section, except where

prohibited by the local water authority.

B. Service Authority – Town of Leesburg Water and Sewer Utility Standards Manual (latest

Addition and Addenda).

C. Town of Leesburg Utility - approved products list (latest edition)

D. Except where prohibited by the Service Authority and for domestic-only systems, compliance

with the National Fire Protection Association 13-2007 and 24-2007 is required.

E. Reference Specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:

1. American National Standards Institute ANSI

2. National Sanitation Foundation NSF

3. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM

4. American Water Works Association AWWA

5. National Bureau of Standards NBS

6. Virginia Department of Transportation VDOT

7. Virginia Department of Health VDH

8. Town of Leesburg TOL

9. National Fire Protection Association NFPA

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes water service piping, fire protection service mains and appurtenances from

the source of water to a point 5 feet outside the building.

B. Private Water Meter(s) shall be provided onsite at the face of the proposed building. Installation

of the water meters shall be part of the Work and in strict accordance with TOL requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of the following:

1. Pipe

2. Fittings







07/13/2021

3. Valves

4. Air Release Valves

5. Valve Boxes and/or Vaults (including frames and covers, ladders, drains, sump pumps and

wiring diagrams).

6. Meter Vault Enclosures and Accessories

7. Fire Hydrants

8. Flushing Hydrants

9. Fire Department Connections

10. Backflow Preventers and Assemblies

11. Yard Hydrants

12. Thrust Restraint

13. Detectable Marking Tape

14. Tracing Wire

B. Certification provided by the contractor that all water systems and appurtenances have been

tested and meet the provisions of the contract documents.

C. Record Drawings at the completion of the project, indicating the as-built condition of all

waterlines, connections and appurtenances.


A. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency

regulations pertaining to water systems, and to the requirements of the latest edition of the

Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook for erosion control during installation.

B. Utility Compliance: Comply with the requirements of Service Authority Standards (latest

Addition and Addenda).

C. Fire Marshall and Building Inspector

D. Utility installation, bedding, backfill and all connections to be inspected by owners testing agency

or local authority having jurisdiction of the utility.

E. Except where prohibited by the Service Authority and for domestic-only systems, compliance

with the National Fire Protection Association 13-2007 and 24-2007 is required.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, and fire hydrants for shipping as follows:

1. Ensure valves and fire hydrants are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect valves and fire hydrants against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and coatings.







07/13/2021

3. Set valves and fire hydrants in best position for handling. Set valves and fire hydrants closed

to prevent rattling.

B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves and fire hydrants during storage:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect valves and fire hydrants from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve

temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary,

support valves and fire hydrants off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.

C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by crane

or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use hand wheels or stems as

lifting or rigging points.

D. Maintain piping and fittings through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent interior coating

and pipe-end damage, and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. If any portion of

piping and fittings is damaged, repairs should be made in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations prior to installation.

E. Protect stored piping and fittings from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade.

F. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Site Information: Perform site surveys, research public utility records, and verify existing utility

locations. Verify that sanitary sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with

original design and referenced standards.

B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner of

others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide acceptable temporary utility services.

1. Notify Owner and Service Authority not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving the Service Authorities and

Architect’s written permission.

3. Existing utilities across or along the line of work are indicated only in an approximate

location. Locate all underground lines and structures. Call “Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001

prior to construction. If utilities are marked that are not shown on the plans, locate utility

vertically and horizontally and provide information to Architect.

4. Repair and correct any damage to underground lines and structures caused by construction

activities.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with interior water piping and interior fire protection piping.







07/13/2021

B. Coordinate with other utility work.

1. Utility interruptions shall be coordinated with the Service Authority and the Architect.

Written notice 48 hours in advance of utility interruption shall be provided to all affected

customers, owner and architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All piping valves, fittings, fire hydrants, meters, meter vaults, appurtenances and other products,

except where prohibited by local water authority.

B. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic only-systems, require ALL pipe, fittings,

joints, valves, etc. to comply with NFPA 13 and 24 and be listed for fire service use.

2.2 PIPE:

A. Ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51-96. 3” through 12”

pipe shall be, at a minimum, pressure class 350; 14” through 20” pipe shall be, at a minimum,

pressure class 250. 24-inch diameter pipe shall be a minimum pressure class 200. Pipe shall

have cement-mortar lining and a bituminous seal coat conforming to the requirement of AWWA

Standard C104. A minimum of 5% of the pipe furnished shall be gauged for roundness full

length and so marked. Pressure class of pipe shall be increased if the specific installation

warrants it.

B. Pipe fittings shall be ductile iron meeting the requirements of AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11-95,

pressure class 250. Fittings shall have a cement-mortar lining and a bituminous seal coating.

C. Buried pipe and fittings shall have either mechanical joint or push-on joint, both conforming to

the requirements of AWWA C111. Bolts for mechanical joint fittings shall be high strength cast

iron having an ultimate tensile strength of 75,000 psi and a minimum yield point of 45,000 psi.

D. Cell Classification for water pipe shall be 12454-B.

E. All proposed water pipe shall be buried below the frost line, a minimum of 36” unless otherwise

specified on the Contract documents.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Fittings shall be ductile iron. Ductile iron fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C110.

Pressure ratings shall be a minimum of 250 psi for fittings 12 inch and smaller and at least 150

psi for fittings 14 inch and larger, or pressure specified for adjacent piping, whichever is greater.

All fittings shall be all bell, mechanical joint or mechanical joint plain end unless otherwise

approved by the Engineer. All fittings shall have a cement mortar lining on the interior and a

bituminous seal coating on the exterior.

1. Mechanical joints at hydrants and line valves shall meet requirements of AWWA C111.

Cement mortar lining shall be standard thickness.

2. MEGALUGS, or approved equivalent, shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA

C153/A21.51.

3. Push-on joint and rubber gasket shall meet requirements of AWWA C111







07/13/2021

4. Restrained push-on joints may be used, if approved in writing from TOL..

5. Flanged joints for ductile iron pipe shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1.

6. Flanged joint gaskets shall be full-face, made of rubber, and shall meet requirements of ANSI

B16.21.

7. Cement mortar lining with asphaltic seal coat for ductile iron pipe and fittings or for cast iron

fittings shall meet requirements for AWWA C104.

a) Cement mortar lining shall be standard thickness.

8. Exterior, asphaltic coating for ductile iron pipe and fittings and cast iron fittings shall meet

requirements of AWWA C151 as applicable.

9. Metal harness shall be galvanized rods and clamps as detailed on Contract documents.

2.4 VALVES

A. Resilient Seat Gate Valves

1. All resilient seat gate valves 6” –12 in size shall comply with AWWA C-509, latest revision.

2. All valves shall be manually operated non-rising stem, equipped with operating nut, for

installation in a vertical position, unless otherwise specified, and the valve body shall be

ductile iron or high strength cast iron with reinforced flanges.

3. All iron surfaces, internal and external must be coated with a minimum 8 mils thickness of

hand applied epoxy or 3-5 mils thickness fusion bonded epoxy.

4. The valve stem shall have an independent stem nut (not rigidly attached to the gate) which

allows the gate to flex without stressing the stem.

5. All valves shall have either a bronze stem collar bushing with two O-rings above the stem or

a stem collar with one O-ring below and one O-ring above the stem collar.

6. Seating shall use compression closure. The gate shall be of a true bi-directional, mirror

image design.

7. Valves shall have a smooth bottom design.

8. Valves shall have a port in the bottom of the gate to allow purging of the gate.

9. All valves shall open left (counter-clockwise). Buried valves shall have mechanical joints

while exposed valves shall have flanged joints.

10. The bodies, bonnets and other cast iron parts shall conform in all respects to the American

Society for Testing Materials’ Standard Specifications of Gray Iron Castings, ASTM

Specification Designation A-126, Class B for valve sizes 2” through 12”. The castings shall

be clean and perfect without blow or sand holes or defects of any kind. No plugging or

stopping of holes will be allowed

11. Valves must have a 250 psi working and 400 psi test pressure.

12. If the standard valve provided by a manufacturer does not fully comply with these

specifications, but compliance can be attained by providing optional features, then each valve







07/13/2021

must be permanently marked to indicate the option or options that have been provided. The

method of marking valves to indicate that options are included must be approved by the

Service Authority.

2.5 VALVE BOXES AND/OR VAULTS

A. All underground valves, 2” – 16”, outside of paved areas shall be installed in approved cast iron

valve boxes, having suitable base and shaft sections and covers to protect the valve and permit

easy access and operation. Box assemblies shall have screw adjustment. Also provide a 24” x

24” x 4” concrete collar around the valve box (3000 psi. concrete) according to the details on the

Contract documents.

B. Valve boxes shall be two piece with 5.25 inch shaft and read head marked “WATER”. Shaft

shall be no less than 5 inches in diameter, with a minimum extension range to fit two (2) inch to

twelve (12) inch valves inclusive, placed on mains depths of three (3) to five (5) feet of cover in

order that the top cover of the valve box is set at finished grade. Valve boxes shall be centered

over the valve screw and set plumb.

C. All valves in which operating nut is greater than three (3) feet below the normal ground or road

surface shall be provided with extension stems to bring the operating nut to within two (2) feet of

the finished grade. The extension shall be provided with a two inch square operating nut on top

and a coupling to connect the extension to the operating nut on the valve. A stem guide shall be

provided to keep the valve stem extensions concentric with the valve box. Extension stems shall

be of the same diameter as the valve stem unless otherwise specified.

2.6 FIRE HYDRANT

A. Fire hydrants shall be manufactured in full compliance with this specification and shall also

comply with the AWWA Fire Hydrant Specification C-502, latest revision and the following:

1. Type: Compression - Dry Standpipe: Valve shall open against and close with the pressure.

The design shall be such that all internal operating parts can be removed through the

standpipe and main valve rod extended without excavating. Hydrants shall be one of three

specified by the Service Authority and shall be a traffic model type.

2. Size: Internal valve diameter shall be a minimum 5”.

3. Inlet Size and Type: 6” mechanical joint end with accessories.

4. Hose Nozzles: Each hydrant shall be equipped with two 2-1/2” I.D. hose nozzles with

National Standard threads, one quarter turn bayonet lock or threaded in with O-ring seal and

suitable locking arrangement.

5. Steamer Nozzle: Each hydrant shall be equipped with one 4-1/2” Steamer Nozzle having

National Standard Threads, one quarter turn bayonet lock, or threaded in with O-ring seal and

suitable locking arrangement.

6. Direction of Open: Left, counterclockwise.

7. Size and Shape of Operating Nut and Cap Nuts: to be 1-1/2” point to flat pentagon. Each

hydrant shall be equipped with a weather cap. Nozzle caps shall be provided for all outlets

with suitable gaskets to provide a tight seal with the nozzles. Said caps shall be securely

chained to the barrel of the hydrant.







07/13/2021

8. Seal Plate: The hydrant shall be so constructed that a moisture-proof lubricant chamber is

provided which encloses the operating threads, thereby automatically lubricating the threads

each time the hydrant is operated. The lubricant chamber shall be enclosed with at least three

O-rings. The two lower O-rings will serve as pressure seals; the third O-ring will serve as a

combined dirt and moisture seal to prevent foreign matter from entering the lubricant

chamber. The hydrant shall be equipped with either an anti-friction washer or bronze bushing

to reduce operating torque. The bonnet will be secured to the hydrant using bolts and nuts.

9. Standpipe - Groundline Safety Construction: The standpipe sections shall be connected at the

groundline by a two part, bolted safety flange or breakable lugs. The main valve rod sections

shall be connected at the groundline by a frangible coupling. The standpipe and groundline

safety construction shall be such that the hydrant nozzles can be rotated to any desired

position without disassembling and removing the top operating components and the top

section of the standpipe. The minimum inside diameter of the standpipe shall be 6”.

10. Main Valve, Rod Assembly: The main valve rod assembly shall be so constructed to allow

removal of all operating parts through the standpipe regardless of depth of bury, using a

removal wrench which does not extend below the groundline of the hydrant. The main valve

seat ring shall be bronze, and its assembly into the hydrant shall involve bronze to bronze

thread engagement, and the valve assembly pressure seals shall be obtained without the

employment of torque compressed gaskets. The design of the main valve rod shall be such

that operating threads at the top of the rod and the valve assembly threads at the bottom of the

rod are isolated from contact with water in the standpipe or in the hydrant inlet shoe.

11. Drain Valve: The operation of the drain mechanism shall be correlated with the operation of

the main valve and shall involve a momentary flushing of the drain ports each time the

hydrant is opened. The drain ports shall be fully closed when the hydrant valve is more than

2-1/2 turns open and the drainage channel in the bronze valve seat ring shall connect to two

or more outlet drain ports. No springs may be employed in the hydrant valve or drain valve

mechanism.

12. Depth of Bury: Normally hydrants shall be suitable for installation in trenches 4-1/2’ deep.

Required parts and materials to adjust fire hydrants to different depth of bury shall be

provided by the manufacturer to meet actual field conditions as required.

13. Painting Instruction: All fire hydrants shall be painted with at least two (2) coats of fire

hydrant paint pursuant to Prince William County Sanitation Authority from the bonnet down.

The bonnet shall be painted with 1460 alert bright white light reflective coating (or per SA),

manufactured by Axon Aerospace, Inc. The wetted surface of the hydrant shoe shall be

epoxy coated to prevent corrosion of the waterway.

14. Pressure Rating: Test pressure 300 psi, working pressure 150 psi.

B. Approved Manufacturers include:

1. Mueller Centurion A-421

2. Kennedy 4-1/4” Figure K-81A

3. U.S. Pipe - Metropolitan 250

4. American Flow Control - Mark 73







07/13/2021

C. If the standard hydrant provided by a manufacturer does not fully comply with these specifications,

but compliance can be attained by providing optional features, then each hydrant must be

permanently marked to indicate the option or options that have been provided. The method of

marking hydrants to indicate that options are included must be approved by the TOL.

2.7 FLUSHING HYDRANTS

A. Flushing hydrants shall be manufactured in full compliance with the following specifications

and shall also comply with AWWA’s latest specifications on flushing hydrants:

1. The flushing hydrant shall be capable of being locked and shall be freeze-proof. It shall be

equipped with National Standard fire thread connections and a breakaway union for high

traffic areas.

2. It shall be of size 2”.

3. The hydrant barrel shall be 2” iron pipe. The exterior shall be painted with approved coating

for durability. The overall length of hydrants can vary according to the depth of water

systems.

4. The barrel and the standpipe shall be joined with a breakable malleable union. A brass hose

connection, 2-1/2” NSFT with attached cap and chain, shall be provided for convenience in

flushing.

5. The body valve shall have bronze body with automatic weep, such that when the valve is in

OFF position the hydrant barrel shall automatically drain. The valve stem shall be above

ground and shall be lockable to prevent tampering. Its operating device shall be of key-type

design, with permanent attachment to the valve stem.

B. Approved manufacturers and model numbers:

1. Kupferle Foundry number 78 (with straight neck).

2.8 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Thrust blocking and/or joint restraint units shall be as specified on Contract documents or as

directed by the inspector based upon field conditions. Concrete shall have 3000 psi strength at

28 days, and shall meet requirements of ASTM C94. Except where prohibited by local water

authority.

B. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic-only systems, thrust restraint to comply

with NFPA 13-2007 and NFPA 24-2007.

2.9 DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE

A. Tape shall be polyethylene tape with a metallic core, 2” in width, with the continuous printed

message, “Caution – Waterline Buried Below.”

B. Tape shall be Catalog No. 2 WAT as manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Corp. or approved

equal.

C. Tape shall be installed 18” above the utility line during backfill operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







07/13/2021

3.1 PIPE LAYING

A. Take all precautions necessary to insure that pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories are not

damaged in unloading, handling, and placing in trench. Examine each piece of material just prior

to installation to determine that no damage has occurred. Remove any damaged material from the

site and replace with undamaged material. Except where prohibited by local water authority.

B. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic-only systems, ALL pipe, fittings, joints,

valves, etc. to be installed in compliance with NFPA 13 and 24, the device listings, the

manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Exercise care to keep foreign material and dirt from entering pipe during storage, handling, and

placing in trench. Close ends of in-place pipe at the end of any work period to preclude the entry

of animals and foreign material. Bedding of pipe shall be as specified on the Contract documents.

D. Do not lay pipe when trench bottom is muddy or frozen, or has standing water.

E. Use only those tools specifically intended for cutting the size and material and type pipe involved.

Make cut to prevent damage to pipe or lining and to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis

of the pipe.

F. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying. Where grade is 10 percent or greater, lay

pipe uphill with bell ends upgrade.

G. Separation of sanitary sewer lines and water lines shall be in accordance with the Service

Authority Regulations.

3.2 JOINING MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE

A. Thoroughly clean inside of the bell and 8 inches of the outside of the spigot end of the joining

pipe to remove oil, grit, excess coating and other foreign matter. Paint the bell and the spigot

with soap solution (half cup granulated soap dissolved in 1 gallon water). Slip cast-iron gland on

spigot end with lip extension of gland toward end of pipe. Paint rubber gasket with or dip into the

soap solution and place on the spigot end with thick edge toward the gland.

B. Push the spigot end forward to seat in the bell. Then, press the gasket into the bell so that it is

located evenly around the joint. Move the gland into position, insert bolts and screw nuts up

finger tight. Then tighten all nuts to torque listed below

Bolt Size - Inches Torque Ft. - Lbs.

5/8 40 – 60

3/4 60 – 90

1 70 – 100

1-1/4 90 – 120

Tighten nuts on alternate side of the gland until pressure on the gland is equally distributed. Join

lock-type mechanical joint pipe according to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Permissible deflection in mechanical joint pipe shall not be greater than 1/2 of that listed in AWWA

C600.







07/13/2021

D. Permissible deflection in lock-type mechanical joint pipe shall be as recommended by

manufacturer.

3.3 JOINING PUSH-ON JOINT PIPE

A. Thoroughly clean inside of the bell and 8 inches of the outside of spigot end of the joining pipe to

remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. Flex rubber gasket and insert in the

gasket recess of the bell socket. Apply a thin film of gasket lubricant supplied by pipe

manufacturer, to either the gasket or the spigot end of the joining pipe. Start the spigot end of the

pipe into the socket with care. Then complete the joint by forcing the plain end of the bottom of

the socket with a forked tool or jack-type device. File the end of field cut pipe to match the

manufactured spigot end.

B. Join restrained push-on joints according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Permissible deflection in restrained push-on joint pipe shall be not greater than ½ of that


D. Join PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and install in

accordance with ASTM D2321.

3.4 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

A. Install valves with operator stems in the vertical plane through the pipe axis and perpendicular to

the pipe axis. Locate valves where specified on Contract documents. Thoroughly clean before

installation. Check valves for satisfactory operation.

B. Equip all underground valves with valve boxes where specified on the Contract documents. Set

valve boxes in accordance with the Contract documents. Set box in alignment with valve stem

centered on valve nut. Set the valve box to prevent transmitting shock or stress to the valve. Set

the box cover flush with the finished ground surface or pavement. PVC extensions shall not be

permitted.

3.5 JOINT RESTRAINTS

A. Provide reaction anchors of concrete blocking, metal harness, retainer gland type or restrained

joint type pipe at all changes in direction of pressure pipelines and as specified on Contract

documents.

B. Concrete reaction anchors shall bear against undisturbed earth and shall be of the size and shape

specified on the Contract documents.

C. Use metal harness restraints as specified on Contract documents.

D. Where retainer glands are used, extreme care shall be taken so that each set screw is tightened as

recommended by the manufacturer before the pipe is backfilled and tested.

3.6 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE

A. Install detectable warning tape in utility trench above all pipes in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation. Install tape approximately 12 to 18 inches above the pipe, not less than 24

inches nor more than 54 inches deep along the side of the trench in such a manner as not to be

broken or otherwise damaged during backfilling or compacting.







07/13/2021

B. Electric tracing wire must be completely insulated from ground. The wire will be attached to the

top of water main by non-conductive method such as Duct Tape.

PART 4 - TESTING

4.1 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS

A. The Contractor is responsible for supplying water required for testing, except where prohibited

by local water authority.

B. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic-only systems, the hydrostatic testing,

including (but not limited to) the leakage limits and the minimum 200 psi test pressure, to comply

with NFPA 13 and 24.

C. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic-only systems, after the line has been

backfilled and at least seven days after the last concrete reaction anchor has been poured, subject

the line or any valved section of the line to a hydrostatic pressure test in accordance with AWWA

C600, except as modified herein, to comply with NFPA 13 and 24. Fill the system with water at

a velocity of approximately 1 ft. per sec. while necessary measures are taken to eliminate all air.

After the system has been filled, raise the pressure by pump to 1.5 x the working pressure. Test

pressure shall: (1) Not be less than 1.25 x the working pressure at the highest point along the test

section; (2) Not exceed thrust restraint pressure; (3) Not vary by more than + or - 5 psi; (4) Not

exceed twice the rated pressure of the valves or hydrants when test includes closed gate valves;

(5) Not exceed rated pressure of valves if resilient-seated gate valves or butterfly valves are used;

(6) Shall be at least 100 psi. Measure pressure at the low point on the system compensation for

gage elevation. Maintain this pressure for two hours. If pressure cannot be maintained,

determine cause, repair and repeat the test until successful.

D. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage is defined as the

quality of water to maintain a pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure, after air has

been expelled and the pipe filled with water. Leakage shall not exceed that specified by AWWA

C-600. If leakage exceeds that specified, find and repair the leaks and repeat the test until

successful.

E. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage in a manner approved by

the Service Authority.

4.2 DISINFECTION

A. Disinfect, flush and test water mains and accessories in accordance with the procedures listed

below. The water used in the disinfection process shall be potable water from an approved

supply. If water is to be transported to the subject site, then the tank trucks must also be properly

disinfected prior to transporting water. Disinfection of the vehicle should also include all

appurtenances used such as valves, hoses, etc. except where prohibited by local water authority.

B. Except where prohibited by the TOL and for domestic-only systems, the underground systems to

be flushed in compliance with NFPA 13 and 24.

C. Preliminary Flushing: The main shall be flushed prior to disinfection, except when the tablet

method is used. Flushing shall be at a velocity of not less than 3.0 ft/sec. Adequate provisions

shall be made for drainage of flushing water. Flushing is to be performed only with the approval

of and under the direction of the County Inspector. The contractor shall inspect areas of







07/13/2021

discharge and provide the necessary equipment to prevent any environmental damage or erosion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage that may result from flushing.

D. Form of Chlorine for Disinfection:

1. Liquid chlorine shall be used only when suitable equipment is available and only under the

direct supervision of a person familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical

properties of this element and who is properly trained and equipped to handle any emergency

that may arise. Introduction of chlorine-gas directly from the supply cylinder is unsafe and

shall not be permitted

2. Calcium hypochlorite contains 70 percent available chlorine by weight. It shall be either

granular or tabular form. The tablets, 6-8 to the ounce, are designed to dissolve slowly in

water. A chlorine-water solution shall be prepared by dissolving the granules in water in the

proportion requisite for the desired concentration.

3. Sodium hypochlorite is supplied in strengths from 5.25 to 16 percent available chlorine. The

chlorine-water solution shall be prepared by adding hypochlorite to water. Product

deterioration shall be reckoned with in computing the quantity of sodium hypochlorite

required for the desired concentration.

4. Application: The hypochlorite solutions shall be applied to the water main with a gasoline or

electrically-powered chemical feed pump designed for feeding chlorine solutions. For small

applications the solutions may be fed with a hand pump, for example, a hydraulic test pump.

Feed lines shall be of such material and strength as to withstand safely the maximum

pressures that may be created by the pumps. All connections shall be checked for tightness

before the hypochlorite solution is applied to the main.

E. Methods of Chlorine Application:

1. Continuous Feed Method: Water from the existing distribution system or other approved

sources of supply shall be made to flow at a constant, measured rate into the newly-laid

pipeline. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant, measured rate. The

two rates shall be proportioned so that the chlorine concentration in the water in the pipe is

maintained at a minimum of 50 MG/L available chlorine. To assure that this concentration is

maintained, the chlorine residual shall be measured at intervals not exceeding 2,000 feet in

accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of “Standard Methods” and

AWWA M12 - “simplified procedures for water examination”. In the absence of a meter, the

rate may be determined either by placing a pitot gage at the discharge or by measuring the

time to fill a container of known volume. Table I gives the time to fill a container of known

volume. Table I gives the amount of chlorine required for each 100 ft. of pipe of various

diameters. Solutions of 1 percent chlorine may be prepared with sodium hypochlorite or

calcium hypochlorite. The latter solution requires approximately 1 lb. of calcium hypochlorite

in 8.5 gallon of water.







07/13/2021

TABLE I

CHLORINE REQUIRED TO PRODUCE 50 MG/L CONCENTRATION

IN 100 FT. OF PIPE - BY DIAMETER

100 Percent 1 Percent

Pipe Size Chlorine Chlorine Solutions

In. Lb. Gal.

4 0.027 0.33

6 0.061 0.73

8 0.109 1.30

10 0.170 2.04

12 0.240 2.88

16 0.430 5.12

20 0.675 8.00

During the application of Chlorine, valves shall be manipulated to prevent the treatment

dosage from flowing back into the line supplying the water. Chlorine application shall not

cease until the entire main is filled with the chlorine solution. The chlorinated water shall be

retained in the main for at least 24 hours, during which time all valves and hydrants in the

section treated shall be operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24

hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than 25 MG/L chlorine throughout the

length of the main.

2. Slug Method (use only if authorized by Engineer): Water from the existing distribution

system or other approved source of supply shall be made to flow at a constant, measured rate

into the newly laid pipeline. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant,

measured rate. The two rates shall be proportioned so that the concentration in the water

entering the pipeline is maintained at no less than 300 MG/L. The chlorine shall be applied

continuously and for a sufficient period to develop a solid column or “slug” of chlorinated

water that will, as it passes along the line, expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of at

least 300 MG/L for at least 3 hours. The application shall be checked at a tap near the

upstream end on the line by chlorine residual measurements.

As the chlorinated water flows past tees and crosses, related valves and hydrants shall be

operated so as to disinfect appurtenances.

3. Tablet Method: Use only when scrupulous cleanliness has been exercised because

preliminary flushing cannot be used. Do not use this method if trench water or foreign

material has entered the main or if the water is below 41 deg. f (5 deg. C). This method may

be used for mains up to 12 inches in diameter and where the total length of the main is less

than 2,500 feet. Tablets shall not be used with PVC pipe.

Place tablets in each section of pipe and also in hydrants, hydrant branches, and other

appurtenances. Attach tablets using Permatex No. 1 adhesive or other adhesive approved by







07/13/2021

the engineers, except for the tablets placed in hydrants and in the joints between the pipe

sections. Tablets shall be free of adhesive except on the one broad side to be attached. Place

all tablets at the top of the main. If the tablets are attached before the pipe section is placed in

the trench, mark the position of the tablet in the pipe and assure that the pipe is placed with

the tablet at the top.

The following table shows the number of 5 grain HTH tablets necessary per joint of pipe to

obtain 50 PPM chlorine.

PIPE SIZE TABLETS PER 18-20 FT. JOINT

3 IN. 1

4 IN. 1

6 IN. 2

8 IN. 3

10 IN. 4

12 IN. 7

When installation is completed fill the main with water at a velocity of less than 1 foot per

second. The water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours. Operate valves so that the strong

chlorine solution will not flow back into the line supplying the water.

F. Final flushing: After the applicable retention period the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed

from the main until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that

generally prevailing in the system, or less than 1 MG/L. Chlorine residual determination shall be

made to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been removed from the pipeline.

G. Bacteriologic Tests:

1. After final flushing, and before the water main is placed in service, samples shall be collected

and tested for bacteriologic quality and shall show the absence of coliform organisms. At

least two samples shall be collected at least 24 hours apart at intervals not exceeding 2,000 ft.

and tested by a State Health Department approved laboratory and results submitted to

engineer.

2. Samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium

thiosulfate. If laboratory results indicate the presence of coliform bacteria, the samples are

unsatisfactory and disinfection shall be repeated until the samples are satisfactory. Cleaning,

disinfection and testing will be the responsibility of the contractor. Water for these operations

will be furnished by the owner, but the contractor shall include in his bid the cost of loading,

hauling and discharging the water.

3. A sampling tap consisting of a corporation cock with metal pipe shall be installed within two

feet of valves. The corporation stop inlet shall be male one inch in size and the outlet shall

have one inch I.P. threads and a cap.

H. Testing and disinfection of the completed sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his

responsibility to repair or replace any cracked or defective pipe. All work necessary to secure a

tight line shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.







07/13/2021







SANITARY SEWERAGE 333000 - Page 1 of 14 ISSUE FOR BID

07/13/2021

SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Service Authority of Lovettsvile and Loudoun Water and Sewer Utility Standards Manual (latest

Addition, Addenda, and approved materials list).

C. Reference Specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:

1. American National Standards Institute ANSI

2. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM

3. American Water Works Association AWWA

4. National Bureau of Standards NBS

5. Virginia Department of Transportation VDOT

6. Virginia Department of Health VDH

7. Town of Leesburg TOL

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a point 5 feet outside

the building to the point of disposal of existing off-site TOL sanitary sewerage system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of the following:

1. Pipe

2. Fittings

3. Special Pipe Couplings

4. Manholes and Accessories

a) boots

b) frame and covers

c) adjusting rings

d) entry seals

e) vent piping

f) frame-to-manhole sealant

g) steps







07/13/2021

h) exterior coatings

i) interior protective linings and coatings

5. Sewage Combination Valves and Accessories

6. Detectable Marking Tape

7. Tracing Wire

8. Test Stations

9. Cleanouts

B. Submit product data for the following:

1. Pipe lining

2. Manhole lining

C. Certification provided by the contractor that all materials and sewage piping have been tested and

meet the provisions of the contract documents.

D. Connections to existing system:

1. Before the start of the construction, the Contractor shall dig test pits on all crossings of and

connections to the existing system, as applicable, to determine the existing system location, size,

and piping material. If the location, size, and piping material differs from that specified on the

Contract documents, notify Engineer immediately.

2. The Contractor shall make connections to the existing system under a pressure or non-pressure

condition, as indicated; complying with the system owner’s requirements for the time of day

such work can be done. The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the connections

unless otherwise indicated. If the system owner performs the work, the Contractor shall arrange

for the work to be done.

3. Valves are to be operated only by the Owner.



regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems, and to the requirements of the latest edition of

the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook for erosion control during installation.

B. Utility Compliance: Comply with the requirements of Loudoun Water and Sewer Utility Standards

Manual (latest Addition, Addenda, and approved materials list).

C. Utility installation, bedding, backfill and all connections to be inspected by owners testing agency or

local authority having jurisdiction of the utility.


A. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.







07/13/2021

B. Maintain piping and fittings through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent interior coating

and pipe-end damage, and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. If any portion of

piping and fittings is damaged, repairs should be made in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations prior to installation.

C. Protect stored piping, fittings, and seals from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

E. Do not store plastic structures, piping, or fittings in direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging

and bending.



locations. Verify that sanitary sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with Contract

documents and referenced standards.


C. Existing Utilities: The location of existing utilities, including underground utilities, is indicated

on the Contract documents insofar as their existence and location were known at the time of

preparation of the Contract documents. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be

construed as a guarantee that such utilities are in the location idicated or that they actually exist,

or that other utilities are not within the area of operations. The Contractor shall make all

necessary investigations to determine the existence and locations of such utilities far enough in

advance of pipe laying to allow for adjustments due to conflicts in the horizontal and vertical

positions of the pipeline.

1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving the Service Authorities written

permission.

2. Notify Architect and Service Authoritiy not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utiltity

interruptions.

3. Do not interupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by others except when permitted

by the utility owner and after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services.

4. Existing utilities across or along the line of work are indicated only in an appoximate

location. Locate all undergound lines and structures. Call “Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001

prior to construction. If utilities are marked that are not shown on the Contract drawings,

locate utility vertically and horizontally and provide information to architect.


A. Coordinate with interior building sanitary drainage piping.


C. Utility interruptions shall be coordinated with the Service Authority and Owner. Written notice

shall be required 48 hours in advance of utility interruption and shall be provided to all affected

customers.







07/13/2021

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. General: Provide pipe materials compatible with each other. All materials shall comply with the

requirements of the Loudoun Water Standards (latest Addition, Addenda, and approved materials

list). Refer to Drawings for required pipe material

B. Gravity Sewer Pipe:

1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer:

a) Polyvinylchloride (PVC) non-pressure pipe (4”-15”) shall meet requirements of AWWA

C900 (DR-25) with push on joints meeting requirements of ASTM D3139. Bedding shall

be as required by the Service Authority for plastic pipe as shown on the Contract documents

and in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations (ASTM D 2774 or D 2321 – Class

I, II or III bedding).

2. Ductile Iron (DI) Sewer:

a) Ductile iron (D1) non-pressure pipe shall meet requirements of AWWA C151. Pipe shall be

thickness Class 52. Pipe shall have cement-mortar lining and a bituminous seal coat.

Thickness classes shall meet requirement of AWWA C150.

b) Mechanical joints and jointing material shall meet requirements of AWWA/ANSI

C111/A21.11.

c) Flanged joints for ductile iron pipe shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1. Flanged joint

gaskets shall be full face, made of 1/16-inch thick rubber, and shall meet the requirements of

ANSI B16.21.

d) Push on joint and rubber gasket shall meet requirements of AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.

e) Cement mortar lining with bituminous seal coat for ductile iron pipe and fittings shall meet

requirements of AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4.

f) Cement mortar lining shall be standard thickness.

g) Exterior, bituminous coating for ductile iron pipe shall meet requirements of AWWA/ANSI

C106/A21.6 or AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 as applicable.

2.2 FITTINGS:

A. General - Provide pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. All materials shall comply with

the requirements of the Service Authorities Standards (latest Addition, Addenda, and approved

materials list).

B. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer:

1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) non-pressure fittings (4”-16”) shall meet requirements of

ANSI/AWWA C900 with elastrometric gasket joints meeting requirements of ASTM D3212.

C. Ductile Iron (DI) Gravity Sewer and DI/PVC Force Main







07/13/2021

1. Fittings shall be ductile iron. Ductile iron fittings shall meet requirements of AWWA C110.

Pressure ratings shall be a minimum of 350 psi for all fittings. Fittings shall have cement-

mortar lining and a bituminous seal coat.

2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastometric seal.

3. Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, for push-on joints.

4. Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.

5. Fitting Interior Coating: AWWA C104, asphaltic-material seal coat, minimum 1-mil

thickness.

6. Mechanical joints and jointing materials shall meet requirements of AWWA C111.

a. Mechanical joint retainer glands shall meet requirements of AWWA C111. Retainer

gland shall be fitted with setscrews.

b. Metal harness shall be galvanized rods and clamps as detailed on Contract documents.

c. Provide systems called for (or equals) as required on the Contract documents for

restrained joints on aerial pipe.

7. Mega-Lugs, or approved equivalent, shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

D. Sewer Saddles:

1. Taps for service lines of 4 inches or 6 inches on main line pipe up to 12 inches.

2. Straps shall be stainless steel, 24-guage, 2.5 inches wide.

3. Nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel, 3/8-inch diameter.

4. Saddle shall be coated cast iron, with tubular rubber gasket.

5. Adapter compatible with service line shall be secured to saddle with PVC sleeve.

6. Sewer saddles shall be as manufactured by one of the following:

a. ROMAC Industries, Inc.

b. GENCO (The General Engineering Co.)

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Use flexible pipe couplings where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is

specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods.

1. Use the following pipe couplings for non-pressure applications:

a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in outside diameter.

b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes.

2.4 MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES

A. General







07/13/2021

1. Manholes shall be constructed of pre-cast reinforced concrete manhole sections in accordance

with the requirements of ASTM C478 and detailed on the Contract document.

2. A maximum of two lift holes per manhole section may be provided.

3. Provide tongue and groove joints in manhole sections with a preformed groove in the tongue

for placement of an O-ring type round, rubber gasket, or Press Seal, Inc.’s Profile RS gasket.

a. Gasket shall comply with requirements of ASTM C443.

b. Gasket shall provide the sole element in sealing the joint from either internal or external

hydrostatic pressure.

B. Flexible Pipe Connections: Provide flexible pipe connections to manholes, other than acid-

resistant manholes, for pipes 24 inches and smaller in size.

1. Materials shall be resistant to water, sewage, acids, ozone, weathering and aging. Connectors

shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C923. Use neoprene conforming to ASTM C443

and stainless steel, Series 300.

2. Cast or core drill openings in manholes to receive connectors. Connectors shall be suitable

for field repair or replacement. Connectors not suitable for field replacement are

unacceptable.

3. The assembled connectors shall allow at least an 11° angular deflection of the pipe and at

least one inch of lateral misalignment in any direction and be suitable for a normal variation

in diameter or roundness for the pipe material used.

4. Connectors shall be similar to Kor-N-Seal as manufactured by NPC, Inc.

C. Frames and Covers: Manhole frames and covers shall be molded of gray cast iron conforming to

ASTM A48, Class 30. Castings shall be coated with a coal tar pitch varnish, to which sufficient

oil has been added to make a smooth coating, tough and tenacious when cold, but not tacky or

brittle. Seating surfaces between frame and cover shall be machined. Manhole frame and covers

shall be one of the following, or equivalent:

1. Street Type (MH-1-S)

a. Neenah Foundry

b. Capitol Foundry

c. Sigma Corporation

d. East Jordan Iron Works

2. Watertight

a. Capitol MH 1-S/WT

b. East Jordan Iron Works

3. Vandal Proof

D. Adjusting Rings: Adjusting rings shall be made of reinforced concrete or HDPE (as manufactured

by LadTech, Inc. Brick, block and mortar construction shall not be permitted in lieu of rings.







07/13/2021

Rings shall be of required thickness to obtain the desired top elevation and match the diameter of

the frame and cover. Any combination of adjustment rings shall not exceed a total thickness of 9

inches.

E. Entry Seals: Entry seals shall be furnished on all sanitary sewer manholes. Entry seals may be

installed on the interior of the manhole using Cretx Specialty Products’ “Chimney Seal” or on the

exterior of the manhole using Canvsa’s “Wrapid Seal,” or approved equivalents.

F. Vent Piping: Vent piping shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the Contract

documents.

G. Frame-to-Manhole Sealant: Sealant for manhole frames shall be a one-component polyurethane

sealant similar to Sika “Sikaflex” Type 1a.

H. Steps: Manhole steps shall be corrosion-resistant and shall be on-half inch grade 60 steel

reinforcing rod encapsulated in a copolymer polypropylene. The steps shall conform with ASTM

C478 paragraph 11 and to the dimensions shown on the Standard Details.

I. Exterior Coating: Exterior of manhole to be coated with bitumastic waterproofing.

J. Interior Product Coatings

1. Coatings: Coatings for proposed and existing manholes shall be Raven Lining System epoxy

coatings.

2. Admixtures: Admixtures for use in concrete manholes shall be ConShieldTM or approved

equivalent.

a. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Model C

2.5 Detectable Marking Tape:

A. Detectable marking tape shall be installed above all gravity sewer (including all service

laterals) and force main pipe.

B. Plastic marking tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two layers

of inert plastic film. Tape shall be resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive agents

commonly found in the soil. The laminate shall be strong enough that the layers cannot be

separated by hand.

C. Tape shall be a minimum of 4-1/2 mils thick with a minimum tensile strength of 60 lbs. in the

machine direction and 58 lbs. in the transverse direction per 3" wide strip. Tape color shall be

APWA Color Coded for marking the particular utility line and shall be imprinted with a

continuous warning message to indicate the type of utility being marked, the message normally

being repeated every 16 to 36". Tape shall be inductively locatable and conductively traceable

using a standard pipe and cable-locating device. Tape shall be 3" wide Terra Tape "Sentry Line

Detectable 620."

2.6 Tracing Wire

A. Tracing Wire to be used for PVC and PE force main pipe only.

B. Wire - #12, Stranded, Type THHN, Thermoplastic Insulated and Nylon Jacketed. Color

Coded: Sanitary – Green







07/13/2021

C. Wire Connector

1. Connector, Wire, Set Screw Pressure type for use with No. 12 stranded wire size.

a. Holub Industries MA-2 or equivalent

b. Ideal Industries Model 30-222 or equivalent

2. Connector, Wire, C-Tap for two-way splicing of tracer wire for use with No. 12 stranded wire

size.

T&B #54705 or equivalent

3. Connector, Wire, Split Bolts - Three-Wire Type for use with No. 12 stranded wire size.

ILSCO Catalog # SEL-2S or equivalent.

4. Wire Nut - Non-conductive for No. 12 stranded wire size.

5. Electrical Coating - Scotchkote 3M Electrical Coating or equivalent. 1 - Scotchkote 3 M

Electrical Coating Part No. 054007

6. Electric Tape - 3M Super 33 + Scotch Brand Premium Vinyl Electrical Tape or equivalent. 1

- Super 33 + Scotch Brand Vinyl Electrical Tape

2.7 TEST STATION

A. Box, Plastic, for corrosion protection.

B. Plastic shaft a minimum of 3” long when placed in concrete and 18” long otherwise with cast iron

lid and collar. Collar shall be a minimum 2” deep. Lid shall be bolted to collar with brass bolt.

Lid shall be imprinted with the word “TEST.”

2.8 CLEANOUTS

A. General: Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron

access frame heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover.

B. Sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout: 4” dia. ductile iron pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Pipe and fittings shall be strung out along the route of construction with the bells facing in the

direction in which the work is to proceed. Pipe shall be placed where it will cause the least

interference with traffic. Laying of the pipe shall be commenced immediately after the

excavation is started and every means must be used to keep pipe laying closely behind the

trenching. The Engineer may stop the trenching when, in his opinion, the trench is open too far in

advance of the pipe laying operation. The bottom of the sewer trench shall be shaped to give

substantially uniform circumferential support to the lower one-third of each pipe. Holes shall be

scooped out where the bells occur leaving the entire barrel of the pipe bearing on the pipe bed.







07/13/2021

B. Sewers Crossing Streams, Estuaries, Lakes, or Reservoirs - Sewers entering or crossing streams

shall be constructed of watertight pipe. The pipe and joints shall be tested in place and shall

exhibit zero infiltration. Sewers laid on piers across ravines or streams shall be allowed only

when it can be demonstrated that no other practical alternative exists. Such sewers on piers shall

be constructed in accordance with the requirements for sewers entering or crossing under streams.

Construction methods and materials of construction shall be such that sewers will remain

watertight and free from change in alignment or grade due to anticipated hydraulic and physical

loads, erosion, and impact.

C. Take all precautions necessary to insure that pipe, valves, fittings, and related items are not

damaged in unloading, handling and placing in trench. Examine each piece of material just prior

to installation to determine that no damage has occurred. Remove any damaged material from the

site and replace with undamaged material. Keep pipe clean. Exercise care to keep foreign

material and dirt from entering pipe during storage, handling and placing in trench. Close ends of

in-place pipe at the end of any work period to prevent entry of animals and foreign material.

D. Excavation, trenching, backfilling and bedding for all piping specified herein shall conform to the

applicable requirements of Section 31 2000 EARTHWORK and/or to details shown on the

Contract documents.

E. Do not lay pipe when weather or trench conditions are unsuitable.

3.2 SEPARATON OF WATER LINES AND SANITARY AND/OR COMBINED SEWERS

A. Follow the Service Authorities Standards for the separation of sanitary sewer and water

distribution systems.

B. Parallel Installation

1. Normal Conditions - Sewer lines and manholes shall be constructed at least 10 feet

horizontally from a waterline whenever possible. The distance shall be measured edge-to-

edge.

2. Unusual Conditions - When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of at least 10

feet, then maximum horizontal separation shall be provided with vertical separation of bottom

of waterline at least 18 inches above top of sewer. Where this vertical separation cannot be

obtained, the sewer shall be constructed of AWWA approved water pipe pressure-tested in

place to 50 psi without leakage prior to backfilling. The sewer manhole shall be of watertight

construction and tested in place.

C. Crossing:

1. Normal Conditions - Sewers crossing under waterlines shall be laid to provide a separation of

at least 18 inches between the bottom of the waterline and the top of the sewer whenever

possible.

2. Unusual Conditions - When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described in

Crossing, Normal Conditions, paragraph above, the following construction shall be used:

3. Sewers passing over or under waterlines shall be constructed of cast or ductile iron pipe with

mechanical joints as described in Parallel Installation, Unusual Conditions above.

4. Sewers passing over waterlines shall be laid to provide:







07/13/2021

a. Adequate structural support for the sewers to prevent excessive deflection of the joints

and settling on and breaking waterline.

b. Maximum separation of water and sewer line joints.

D. Sanitary and/or combined sewers or sewer manholes - No water pipes shall pass through or come

in contact with any part of a sewer or sewer manhole.

3.3 GRAVITY SEWERS

A. Lay gravity sewers so as to maintain a true alignment and grade as indicated on Contract

documents. After completion, the pipe shall exhibit a full circle of light when lighted at one

manhole and viewed from the next.

B. Commence laying gravity sewers at the lowest point on a section of line and lay pipe with the bell

ends uphill.

C. Pipe Joint. Preparatory to making pipe joints on gravity sewer lines, clean and dry all surfaces of

joint pipe and jointing material. Use lubricants, primers, adhesives and similar materials as

recommended by the manufacturer. Place, fit, join and adjust the jointing materials or factory

fabricated joints as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain the degree of water tightness

required. As soon as possible after the joint is made, place sufficient backfill material, as specified

under Section 31 2000 EARTHWORK along each side of the pipe to resist forces that might tend to

move the pipe off line and grade.

D. Complete backfilling as specified under Section 31 2000 EARTHWORK. Place backfill over the

pipe immediately after the pipe has been laid. Ductile iron pipe shall be used, regardless of how it

is indicated in the Contract documents, where cover over sewer pipe is less that 5.5 ft. in public

roadways or 3.5 ft. in easements.

3.4 MANHOLES:

A. Manholes shall be constructed to the elevations shown on the Contract documents in accordance

with the provisions of the Standard Details.

B. Set manhole base section on bed of VDOT #57 stone to a minimum depth of 8 in. Stone shall be

thoroughly compacted and carefully leveled.

C. Join all manhole riser and cone or flat slab top sections by the use of o-ring type round rubber

gaskets.

D. Pack and brush joints in FRP lining in acid-resistant manholes with sealant to provide a watertight

and acid-resistant seal. Field weld joints in PVC lining of acid-resistant manholes in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install pipe stubs in manholes where called for on the Contract documents. All stubs shall be sealed

watertight with a plug or cap at both ends.

F. Install flexible manhole connections for all pipes sizes 4 in. to 24 in., inclusive and apply sealant to

completely fill joint between manhole barrel and flexible connection for the full thickness of the

manhole barrel.

G. Plug lift holes and repair any defects in manhole.







07/13/2021

H. Set adjusting rings in Portland cement mortar bed.

1. Rings will not be required outside of paved roadways or walkways unless called for on the

Contract documents.

2. Rings in paved roadways or walkways shall permit upward or downward adjustment of

manhole frame by six inches.

I. Set manhole frame in bed of sealant. Bed shall consist of one, 3/8 in. bead laid flush with the inside

edge of the frame base and another 3/8 in. bead laid flush with the outside edge of the frame base.

J. Construct bench of concrete or brick and mortar.

1. Lowest elevation of bench shall be at the spring line of the outgoing pipe.

2. Slope bench three inches toward channel for drainage.

3. Where stubs or knockouts are provided for future pipe connections, bench shall be so formed.

4. Use sulfate resistant cement for concrete or mortar on all acid-resistant manholes.

5. Where sealant is used, bench shall not be in contact with pipe or flexible pipe connection.

6. Factory installed inlet shaping is also acceptable.

3.5 DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE AND TRACING WIRE:

A. Install detectable marking tape in all trenches containing buried, non-metallic, pressure pipelines.

Tape shall be installed in all trenches with a cover of 18” to 54" and a minimum clearance over the

pipelines of 18". Place tape on edge of trench toward the center of the pavement in roadways. In

other locations, place tape to the north or east of the utility line. Tape shall be made electrically

conductive throughout the entire system through the use of splices of a type recommended by the

manufacturer.

B. All buried sewer force mains including those made of ductile iron will have insulated wire attached

to the top of the pipe and secured with tape at distances not exceeding every sixteen (16) feet. Each

service connection must include this insulated wire. The connection from the main line must be

electronically secure and waterproof with solder or waterproof electronic clamps not wire nuts.

Wire nuts must be used at the end of each wire inside the meter box or test station as the case may

be; however, wire nuts may not be used at connection points.

C. A test station shall be installed every 500 feet on the locating wire.

3.6 ROAD/HIGHWAY CROSSINGS:

A. Where crossing is to be installed beneath a Commonwealth of Virginia road or highway, all

operations and materials shall conform to the requirements of the Virginia Department of

Transportation governing such crossings, and the contractor shall obtain approval of all materials

and methods to be employed before such work is started. A copy of such permission shall be filed

with the Owner prior to starting the work. The contractor will also be required to furnish a release

from the proper authorities before final acceptance of the work by the Owner. The contractor shall

secure from the Department of Transportation the necessary information regarding proper bracing,

sheeting, shoring and other required protection of the highway and traffic during the construction

operation. Where an open cut is permissible in crossing the State Highway instead of boring, the







07/13/2021

contractor shall make the necessary provisions for handling traffic and replacing the roadbed and

surface as required by the Virginia Department of Transportation.

3.7 TESTING

A. Gravity Sewers:

1. Testing of gravity sewer lines shall be conducted on short sections of sewer line, i.e., between

manholes. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to make the tests, and

ensure that zero infiltration is provided. All equipment and methods used shall be acceptable

to the Engineer and the Owner. All monitoring gages shall be subject to calibration, if

deemed necessary.

2. Sanitary sewer lines 24 in. diameter and smaller shall be tested after backfill using a low-

pressure air test in accordance with ASTM C924, described as follows:

3. Summary of Method: Plug the section of the sewer line to be tested. One of the plugs used at

the manhole must be tapped and equipped for the air inlet connection for filling the line from

the air compressor. Introduce low-pressure air into the plugged line. Use the quantity and

rate of air loss to determine the acceptability of the section being tested.

4. Preparation of the sewer line: Flush and clean the sewer line prior to testing, thus serving to

wet the pipe surface as well as clean out any debris. A wetted interior pipe surface will

produce more consistent results. Plug all pipe outlets using approved pneumatic plugs with a

sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the line being tested to resist the test

pressure. Give special attention to laterals.

5. Groundwater Determination: Install a 1/2 inch capped galvanized pipe nipple, approximately

12 inches long, through the manhole on top of the lowest sewer line in the manhole.

Immediately prior to the line acceptance test, the ground water elevation shall be determined

by removing the pipe cap and blowing air through the pipe nipple into the ground so as to

clear it, and then connecting a clear plastic hose to the pipe nipple. The hose shall be held

vertically and a measurement of the height in feet of water over the invert of the pipe shall be

taken after the water has stopped rising in the plastic hose.

6. Procedures: Determine the test duration for the section under test by computation from the

applicable formulas shown in ASTM C828. The pressure-holding time is based on an

average holding pressure of 3 psi gage or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gage.

a. Add air until the internal air pressure of the sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi

gage. After an internal pressure of approximately 4.0 psig is obtained, allow time for the

air pressure to stabilize. The pressure will normally show some drop until the

temperature of the air in the test section stabilizes.

b. When the pressure has stabilized and is at or above the starting test pressure of 3.5 psi

gage, commence the test. Before starting the test, the pressure may be allowed to drop to

3.5 psig. Record the drop in pressure for the test period. If the pressure has dropped

more than 0.5 psi gage during the test period, the line shall be presumed to have failed.

The test may be discontinued when the prescribed test time has been completed even

though the 0.5 psig drop has not occurred.







07/13/2021

c. The test procedure may be used as a presumptive test, which enables the installer to

determine the acceptability of the line prior to backfill and subsequent construction

activities.

d. If the pipe to be tested is submerged in ground water, the test pressure shall be increased

to 1.0 psi for every 2.31 feet the ground water level is above the invert of the sewer.

7. Safety: The air test may be dangerous if, because of lack of understanding or carelessness, a

line is improperly prepared.

a. It is extremely important that the various plugs be installed and braced in such a way as

to prevent blowouts. In as much as a force of 250 lbs. is exerted on an 8 inch plug by an

internal pipe pressure of 5 psi, it should be realized that sudden expulsion of a poorly

installed plug or of a plug that is partially deflated before the pipe pressure is released can

be dangerous.

b. As a safety precaution, pressurized equipment shall include a regulator or relief valve set

at perhaps 10 psi to avoid over-pressurizing and damaging an otherwise acceptable line.

No one shall be allowed in the manholes during testing.

B. Sewage Force Mains:

1. After pipe is laid and joints completed, the force main system shall be tested according to

AWWA C600-87, Section 4: Hydrostatic Testing. Allowable leakage is determined by the

following formula: L = (S x D /133,200, where L is the allowable leakage in gallons per

hour, S is the length of pipe in feet, D is the pipe diameter in inches, and P is the average test

pressure in psi. All force mains shall be tested at a minimum pressure of at least 50 percent

above the design operation pressure (or 100 psi), for at least 30 minutes. The contractor must

furnish all necessary equipment and shall bear the cost of testing the force mains. All tests

shall be made in the presence of the Service Authority Inspector.

C. Manholes:

1. Vacuum testing of manholes: Vacuum tests shall be conducted on newly constructed

manholes following construction and after all connections have been made but before any

backfilling around the manhole. Successful testing shall be accomplished before any

backfilling operations.

2. Provide necessary vacuum pump, pneumatic plugs and accessories required for proper

performance of the test. Plugs shall have a sealing strength equal to or greater than the

diameter of the connecting pipe to be sealed.

3. Follow all local, state and federal safety precautions. Brace inverts if lines entering the

manhole have not been backfilled or otherwise restrained to prevent pipe from being

dislodged and pulled into the manhole.

4. Install vacuum tester head assembly at the top access of the manhole. Adjust the cross brace

to insure that the inflatable sealing element inflates and seals against the straight top section

of the manhole if possible.

5. Attach the vacuum pump assembly to the proper connection on the test head assembly. Make

sure the vacuum inlet/outlet valve is in the closed position.







07/13/2021

6. Following safety precautions and testing equipment manufacturer's instructions, inflate

sealing element to the recommended maximum inflation pressure. Do not over-inflate.

7. Start the vacuum pump assembly engine and allow preset pump to stabilize. Open the

inlet/outlet ball valve and evacuate the manhole to 10" Hg (approximately - 5 psig).

Pressurizing the manhole may result in damage to manhole or to test equipment.

8. Close vacuum inlet/outlet ball valve and monitor vacuum for specified test period (see table).

If vacuum does not drop in excess of 1" Hg., manhole is considered acceptable and the

manhole passes the test. If manhole fails the test, complete necessary repairs and repeat test

procedures until satisfactory results are obtained.

VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SPECIFICATIONS

4-FT. DIAMETER MANHOLE

Minimum Elapsed Time for a

Manhole Depth Pressure Change of 1 Inch Hq

10 Ft. or Less 60 Seconds

Greater Than 10 Ft. But 75 Seconds

Less Than 15 Ft.

Greater than 15 Ft. But 90 Seconds

Less Than 25 Ft.

Greater Than 25 Ft. Add 2 Seconds Per Foot of

Additional Manhole Depth.

For manholes five feet in diameter, add an additional 15 seconds, and for manholes six

feet in diameter, add an additional 30 seconds to the time required for four-foot diameter

manholes.

Repeat the above test procedure after backfilling manhole for final acceptance test.







STORM DRAINAGE 33 4100 - Page 1 of 6 ISSUE FOR BID 07/13/2021

SECTION 33 4100 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes the roof drainage collection system, the storm sewerage system piping and

appurtenances from a point 5 feet outside the building to the point of disposal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for:

1. Concrete pipe

2. Polyethylene pipe

3. Ductile iron pipe

4. Frames and covers.

5. Grates

B. Certification, signed by material producer and contractor, that standard precast and cast in place

concrete storm drainage manholes and Drop Inlets comply with VDOT standards and specifications.

C. VDOT approved job mix for bedding stone.

D. Shop drawings for:

1. Non-standard precast or cast-in-place concrete storm drainage manholes and Drop Inlets.

2. Cleanouts

3. Underdrains

E. Record drawings of installed storm drainage system.



regulations pertaining to storm sewerage systems.

B. Utility Compliance: Comply with state and local regulations and standards pertaining to storm

sewerage systems.







C. All materials shall be new and free of defects (i.e. pipe shall not have chipped spigots or bells).



locations. Verify that storm sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with original

design and referenced standards.


C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing storm sewer serving facilities occupied by the Owner

of others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide acceptable temporary storm sewer services.

1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed storm sewer interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with storm sewer interruptions without receiving Architect’s written

permission.

D. Existing utilities across or along the line of work are indicated only in an approximate location.

Locate all underground lines and structures. Call “Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001 prior to

construction. If utilities are marked that are not shown on the plans, locate utility vertically and

horizontally and provide information to architect.


A. Coordinate with interior building storm drainage piping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials used for construction of the storm sewerage system shall comply with the requirements

of the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Standards and Road

and Bridge Specifications.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. Pipe materials are indicated on the

drawings.

B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C76/AASHTO M170,

Class III, unless otherwise indicated.







C. O-Ring Gasket Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C76/AASHTO

M170, Class III, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

C443/AASHTO M198.

D. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (P.E.): Shall have a smooth lined interior and meet the requirements of

ASTM F405 or AASHTO M252 for 10” diameter and smaller, and ASTM F667 or AASHTO M294

for 12” diameter and larger.

E. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe: Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR-35 with bell and

spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477 elastometric seals

a) Connections to the building downspouts shall be made with Schedule 40 PVC.

F. Ductile Iron Storm Sewer Pipe: Shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C151, Class 52. Flanged

joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C115.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Precast Concrete Manholes: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia

Department of Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards, and Road and Bridge Specifications.

B. Cast-in-Place Manholes: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia Department

of Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards, and Road and Bridge Specifications.

C. Manhole Steps, Safety Slabs and Inlet Shaping: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of

the Virginia Department of Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards, and Road and Bridge

Specifications.

D. Manhole Frames and Covers: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia


2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron access frame and

heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover.

2.5 DROP INLETS

A. Precast Concrete Drop Inlets: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia


B. Cast-in-Place Drop Inlets: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia

Department of Transportation's Road and Bridge Standards, and Road and Bridge Specifications.

C. Drop Inlet Steps, Safety Slabs and Inlet Shaping: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition

of the Virginia Department of Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards, and Road and Bridge

Specifications.







D. Drop Inlet Frames and Grates: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia


E. Plastic Drain Basins: ADS 2812AG or approved equal.

2.6 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Concrete: Conform to the requirements of VDOT Standard Class A3 concrete.

B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following:

1. Fabric: ASTM A 185 welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

2.7 END WALLS AND END SECTIONS

A. End walls: Conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge

Specifications and the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards.

B. End sections: Conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge

Specifications and the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards for the size of pipe indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install the storm sewerage system in accordance with the latest edition of the Virginia Department of

Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards and Road and Bridge Specifications.

3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation, throughout the length

of the pipe.

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and

backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.

C. Install pipe bedding conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia Department of

Transportation’s Road and Bridge Standards and Road and Bridge Specifications.

3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and







couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and

other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

B. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of pipes and

fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Extend storm sewerage system piping to connect to building storm drains, of sizes and in locations

indicated.

D. Join and install concrete pipe and fittings per VDOT specifications.

E. Join and install PE pipe and fittings per manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings intended for that

purpose.

3.4 MANHOLES

A. General: Install manholes complete with accessories as indicated. Form continuous concrete or split

pipe section channel and benches between inlets and outlet. Set tops of frames and covers flush with

finish grade, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install in accordance with ASTM C 891.

C. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated.

D. Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections.

3.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. Set cleanout frame

and cover in concrete block 12 by 12 by 6 inches deep or as indicated on the plans, except where

location is in concrete paving. Set top of cleanout flush with finish grade.

3.6 DROP INLETS

A. Construct drop inlets to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.7 INLET SHAPING

A. Construct inlet shaping conforming to VDOT Standard IS-1 at all drop inlets and manholes.








A. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work

progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.

2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops.

3. Flush piping between manholes and drop inlets to remove collected debris. Flush pipes through

an approved erosion and sediment control measure.

B. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has

occurred.

1. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations has been installed and

approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at completion of project.

2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects correct

such defects and reinspect.
